LC3J 19A321 AA
2020 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual
ford.ca
owner.ford.com
2020 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual
August 2020
Third Printing
Litho in U.S.A.
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2020
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201909 20200716184112
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and
maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle
in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Introduction
About This Manual ..........................................7
Symbols Glossary ............................................8
Data Recording ...............................................10
Perchlorate .......................................................14
Ford Credit ........................................................14
Replacement Parts Recommendation
...........................................................................14
Special Notices ...............................................15
Mobile Communications Equipment
...........................................................................16
Export Unique Options ................................16
Environment
Protecting the Environment .......................17
At a Glance
Instrument Panel ...........................................18
Child Safety
General Information .....................................20
Installing Child Restraints ..........................22
Booster Seats ..................................................31
Child Restraint Positioning ........................33
Child Safety Locks ........................................35
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation .................................36
Fastening the Seatbelts ..............................37
Seatbelt Height Adjustment ....................40
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ............................................................40
Seatbelt Reminder ........................................41
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance ...............................................42
Seatbelt Extensions .....................................42
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation .................................43
Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................44
Side Airbags ....................................................49
Safety Canopy™ ...........................................50
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ........51
Airbag Disposal ..............................................52
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies .................................................53
Remote Control .............................................53
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
..........................................................................59
MyKey™
Principle of Operation .................................60
Creating a MyKey ...........................................61
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................62
Checking MyKey System Status ..............63
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems ........................................................63
MyKey – Troubleshooting ..........................63
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking ................................65
Keyless Entry ..................................................68
Tailgate
Tailgate Lock ...................................................70
Electronic Tailgate ........................................70
Removing the Tailgate ..................................71
Tailgate Step ....................................................71
Bed Extender ...................................................72
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ........................75
Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................75
Power Running Boards
Using Power Running Boards ....................77
1
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column ..........................................................79
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column ..........................................................79
Audio Control .................................................80
Voice Control ...................................................81
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control ...........................................................81
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control ..............................................81
Information Display Control .......................81
Heated Steering Wheel ...............................81
Horn ....................................................................82
Adjustable Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals ....................................83
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers .......................................84
Autowipers ......................................................84
Windshield Washers ....................................85
Lighting
General Information ....................................86
Lighting Control .............................................86
Autolamps .......................................................87
Instrument Lighting Dimmer .....................87
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running Lamps
...........................................................................87
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .........88
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................88
Direction Indicators ......................................89
Spot Lamps ....................................................89
Interior Lamps ................................................89
Ambient Lighting ..........................................90
Cargo Lamps ..................................................90
Automatic High Beam Control
What Is Automatic High Beam Control
..........................................................................92
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off ...................................................92
Automatic High Beam Control Indicators
..........................................................................92
Overriding Automatic High Beam Control
..........................................................................92
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows ............................................94
Global Opening ..............................................95
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................95
Interior Mirror ..................................................98
Sliding Windows ...........................................98
Sun Visors ........................................................99
Moonroof .........................................................99
Instrument Cluster
Gauges .............................................................101
Warning Lamps and Indicators ..............104
Audible Warnings and Indicators ..........108
Information Displays
General Information ...................................109
Information Messages ...............................120
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control ............................139
Automatic Climate Control .....................140
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
- Vehicles With: Automatic
Temperature Control ..............................142
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
- Vehicles With: Manual Temperature
Control .........................................................143
Heated Windshield .....................................144
Heated Rear Window .................................144
Heated Exterior Mirrors .............................144
2
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
Remote Start ................................................144
Interior Air Quality
What Is the Cabin Air Filter ......................146
Locating the Cabin Air Filter ....................146
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter .................146
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position .................147
Head Restraints ............................................147
Manual Seats ................................................149
Power Seats ..................................................150
Memory Function .........................................153
Rear Seats ......................................................154
Heated Seats ................................................156
Ventilated Seats ...........................................157
Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener ..............158
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ...............................162
Wireless Accessory Charger ....................163
Storage Compartments
Center Console .............................................165
Overhead Console ......................................165
Under Seat Storage ....................................165
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information ...................................168
Ignition Switch ..............................................168
Keyless Starting ...........................................169
Starting a Gasoline Engine - 6.2L/7.3L
........................................................................169
Starting a Diesel Engine - 6.7L Diesel
..........................................................................171
Switching Off the Engine - 6.7L Diesel
.........................................................................176
Engine Idle Shutdown ................................176
Engine Block Heater ...................................176
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions ......................................178
Fuel Quality - E85 ........................................179
Fuel Quality - Gasoline .............................180
Fuel Quality - Diesel ....................................181
Running Out of Fuel ...................................183
Refueling - Gasoline ...................................183
Refueling - Diesel ........................................184
Fuel Consumption .......................................187
Engine Emission Control
Emission Law ................................................188
Catalytic Converter .....................................189
Selective Catalytic Reductant System -
Diesel ............................................................191
Diesel Particulate Filter .............................196
Transmission
Automatic Transmission ..........................201
Power Take-Off ...........................................205
Four-Wheel Drive
Using Four-Wheel Drive ...........................207
Rear Axle
Limited Slip Differential ............................215
Electronic Locking Differential ................215
Brakes
General Information ....................................217
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
.........................................................................219
Parking Brake ................................................219
Hill Start Assist .............................................219
Traction Control
Principle of Operation ................................221
3
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
Using Traction Control ...............................221
Stability Control
Principle of Operation ...............................222
Using Stability Control ..............................223
Trail Control
What Is Trail Control ..................................225
Switching Trail Control On and Off ......225
Setting the Trail Control Speed .............225
Canceling the Set Speed .........................225
Trail Control Indicators ..............................225
Terrain Control
Principle of Operation ...............................226
Using Hill Descent Control ......................226
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation ...............................228
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................228
Rear View Camera ......................................229
360 Degree Camera ..................................232
Cruise Control
What Is Cruise Control ..............................236
Switching Cruise Control On and Off
........................................................................236
Setting the Cruise Control Speed .........236
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................237
Resuming the Set Speed ..........................237
Cruise Control Indicators ..........................237
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ...............237
Driving Aids
Driver Alert ....................................................244
Lane Keeping System ...............................245
Blind Spot Information System ............248
Cross Traffic Alert .......................................253
Steering ..........................................................256
Pre-Collision Assist ....................................258
Drive Control .................................................262
Load Carrying
Load Limit .....................................................265
Bed Ramps ...................................................269
Towing
Towing a Trailer ............................................272
Trailer Reversing Aids ................................274
Trailer Sway Control ..................................290
Recommended Towing Weights ..........290
Essential Towing Checks .........................295
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels .....304
Driving Hints
Economical Driving ....................................307
Off-Road Driving .........................................307
Breaking-In .....................................................310
Driving Through Water ..............................310
Snow Plowing ................................................311
Floor Mats .......................................................313
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance ..................................315
Hazard Flashers ...........................................316
Fire Extinguisher ...........................................316
Warning Triangle ..........................................316
Fuel Shutoff ...................................................316
Jump Starting the Vehicle .........................317
Post-Crash Alert System ..........................319
Transporting the Vehicle ...........................319
Towing Points ..............................................320
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need ..............322
In California (U.S. Only) ............................323
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) .....................324
4
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only) ......................325
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada .......................................................325
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
.........................................................................327
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
.........................................................................327
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
.........................................................................327
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart .........................329
Changing a Fuse ..........................................335
Maintenance
General Information ...................................337
Opening and Closing the Hood .............337
Under Hood Overview - 6.2L ..................338
Under Hood Overview - 6.7L Diesel ......339
Under Hood Overview - 7.3L ..................340
Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.2L ..........................341
Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.7L Diesel .............341
Engine Oil Dipstick - 7.3L ...........................341
Engine Oil Check - 6.2L .............................341
Engine Oil Check - 6.7L Diesel ...............343
Engine Oil Check - 7.3L .............................344
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
........................................................................345
Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................345
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.2L
........................................................................346
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.7L
Diesel ...........................................................347
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 7.3L ....349
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 6.7L
Diesel ..........................................................350
Engine Coolant Check - 6.2L ..................353
Engine Coolant Check - 6.7L Diesel ......357
Engine Coolant Check - 7.3L ..................360
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check
........................................................................365
Transfer Case Fluid Check ......................366
Brake Fluid Check .......................................366
Power Steering Fluid Check ....................367
Changing the 12V Battery ........................368
Adjusting the Headlamps ........................370
Washer Fluid Check .....................................371
Fuel Filter - 6.2L/7.3L ..................................371
Checking the Wiper Blades ......................371
Changing the Wiper Blades .....................371
Changing a Bulb ..........................................372
Changing the Engine-Mounted and
Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Fuel
Filters - 6.7L Diesel .................................375
Spring U-Bolt Check - F-600 .................378
Vehicle Care
General Information ..................................380
Cleaning Products .....................................380
Cleaning the Exterior ..................................381
Waxing ............................................................382
Cleaning the Engine ...................................382
Cleaning the Exhaust - 6.7L Diesel ......382
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
........................................................................383
Cleaning the Interior ..................................383
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens ......................385
Cleaning Leather Seats ............................385
Repairing Minor Paint Damage ..............387
Cleaning the Wheels .................................387
Vehicle Storage ............................................387
Wheels and Tires
General Information ..................................390
Tire Care .........................................................392
Using Snow Chains ...................................408
Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........409
Changing a Road Wheel ............................417
Technical Specifications ..........................428
5
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 6.2L ...................429
Engine Specifications - 6.7L Diesel ......429
Engine Specifications - 7.3L ...................430
Motorcraft Parts - 6.2L ..............................431
Motorcraft Parts - 6.7L Diesel ................433
Motorcraft Parts - 7.3L ..............................434
Vehicle Identification Number ...............435
Vehicle Certification Label ......................436
Transmission Code Designation ...........436
Capacities and Specifications - 6.2L
........................................................................437
Capacities and Specifications - 6.7L
Diesel ..........................................................446
Capacities and Specifications - 7.3L
........................................................................457
Bulb Specification Chart ..........................467
Network Connectivity
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network .....................................................470
Network Connectivity – Troubleshooting
.........................................................................471
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot .........473
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password .................................473
Audio System
General Information ..................................474
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
Touchscreen Display/SYNC 3 ............474
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC ........476
Digital Radio .................................................478
Satellite Radio ............................................480
USB Port ........................................................483
SYNC™
General Information ..................................484
Using Voice Recognition ..........................485
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ...........487
SYNC™ Applications and Services .....488
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player
.........................................................................491
SYNC™ Troubleshooting ........................492
SYNC™ 3
General Information ...................................501
Using Voice Recognition ..........................503
Entertainment .............................................509
Climate ............................................................519
Phone ...............................................................521
Navigation .....................................................523
Apps ................................................................528
Settings ...........................................................531
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting .....................533
Accessories
Accessories ...................................................546
Auxiliary Switches ......................................547
Ford Protect
Ford Protect ...................................................551
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information .......553
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........556
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance ............................................562
Scheduled Maintenance Record ............571
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility ..............581
End User License Agreement ................584
Declaration of Conformity ......................609
Declaration of Conformity - Vehicles
With: SYNC 3 ...........................................609
Type Approvals ............................................610
6
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options that are not on your
vehicle. It is possible that either Ford Motor
Company or an authorized Ford dealer may
have originally sold an incomplete vehicle
to a vehicle modifier who upfitted it. As a
result, some of the options and features on
this vehicle may differ from what we
describe in this manual.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so they may appear
differently to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of the
vehicle.
Note: Your vehicle’s powertrain control
systems can detect and store information
about vehicle modifications that increase
horsepower and torque output such as
whether or not performance-enhancing
powertrain components commonly referred
to as performance chips have been used.
This information will stay in the system’s
memory and cannot be erased even if the
modification is removed. Ford Motor
Company, Ford of Canada, Ford of Mexico
and service or repair facilities can retrieve
this information when servicing your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company may use this
information to determine if your warranty
covers any needed repairs.
Note: Some aftermarket products may
cause severe engine, transmission and
exhaust system damage. See your warranty
information for more details.
Your new diesel engine may feel, drive and
function somewhat differently than a
gasoline engine. Therefore, it is very
important that you read and thoroughly
familiarize yourself and others operating
the vehicle with this guide. There is a
special procedure for turning off the diesel
engine. See Starting a Diesel Engine
(page 171). It is important to read and
understand this material in order to
maintain the best service life for your
engine.
Ford may discontinue models or change
specifications without any notice and
without incurring obligations.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
7
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Introduction
E154903
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB
Note: Throughout this guide, you will find
warnings identified by the warning symbol.
Warnings remind you to be especially
careful to reduce the risk of personal injury.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
E162384
Air conditioning system
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system
E270480
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
8
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Introduction
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E231160
Flammable
E67017
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
Heated rear window
Windshield defrosting system
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
E270945
Horn control
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Service engine soon
E270849
Passenger airbag activated
9
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Introduction
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
E163957
Hill descent control
E272858
Trail control
E270969
Windshield wiping system
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
WARNING: Do not connect
wireless plug-in devices to the data link
connector. Unauthorized third parties
could gain access to vehicle data and
impair the performance of safety related
systems. Only allow repair facilities that
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data
link connector.
We respect your privacy and are
committed to protecting it. The
information contained in this publication
was correct at the time of going to print,
but as technology rapidly changes, we
recommend that you visit the regional Ford
website for the latest information.
Your vehicle has electronic control units
that have data recording functionality and
the ability to permanently or temporarily
store data. This data could include
information on the condition and status of
your vehicle, vehicle maintenance
requirements, events and malfunctions.
The types of data that can be recorded are
described in this section. Some of the data
recorded is stored in event logs or error
logs.
Note: Error logs are reset following a service
or repair.
Note: We may provide information in
response to requests from law enforcement,
other government authorities and third
parties acting with lawful authority or
through a legal process. Such information
could be used by them in legal proceedings.
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Operating states of system
components, for example, fuel level,
tire pressure and battery charge level.
• Vehicle and component status, for
example, wheel speed, deceleration,
lateral acceleration and seatbelt
status.
• Events or errors in essential systems,
for example, headlamps and brakes.
• System responses to driving situations,
for example, airbag deployment and
stability control.
• Environmental conditions, for example,
temperature.
Some of this data, when used in
combination with other information, for
example, an accident report, damage to a
vehicle or eyewitness statements, could
be associated with a specific person.
10
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Introduction
Service Data
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, for example, your contact information,
to offer you products or services that may
interest you. Data may be provided to our
service providers such as part suppliers
that may help diagnose malfunctions, and
who are similarly obligated to protect data.
We retain this data only as long as
necessary to perform these functions or to
comply with law. We may provide
information where required in response to
official requests to law enforcement or
other government authorities or third
parties acting with lawful authority or court
order, and such information may be used
in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if
equipped), if you choose to use connected
apps and services, you consent that certain
diagnostic information may also be
accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries.
Event Data
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
event data recorder is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger seatbelts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
11
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Introduction
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder.
Comfort, Convenience and
Entertainment Data
Your vehicle has electronic control units
that have the ability to store data based
on your personalized settings. The data is
stored locally in the vehicle or on devices
that you connect to it, for example, a USB
drive or digital music player. You can delete
some of this data and also choose whether
to share it through the services to which
you subscribe. See Settings (page 531).
Comfort and Convenience Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Seat and steering wheel position.
• Climate control settings.
• Radio presets.
Entertainment Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Music, videos or album art.
• Contacts and corresponding address
book entries.
• Navigation destinations.
Services That We Provide
If you use our services, we collect and use
data, for example, account information,
vehicle location and driving characteristics,
that could identify you. We transmit this
data through a dedicated, protected
connection. We only collect and use data
to enable your use of our services to which
you have subscribed, with your consent or
where permitted by law. For additional
information, see the terms and conditions
of the services to which you have
subscribed.
Services That Third Parties
Provide
We recommend that you review the terms
and conditions and data privacy
information for any services to which you
subscribe. We take no responsibility for
services that third parties provide.
Vehicles With a Modem (If Equipped)
The modem has a SIM. The
modem was enabled when your
vehicle was built and periodically
sends messages to stay connected to the
cell phone network, receive automatic
software updates and send vehicle-related
information to us, for example, diagnostic
information. These messages could
include information that identifies your
vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial
number of the modem. Cell phone network
12
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Introduction
service providers could have access to
additional information, for example, cell
phone network tower identification. For
additional information about our privacy
policy, visit www.FordConnected.com or
refer to your local Ford website.
Note: The modem continues to send this
information unless you disable the modem
or stop the modem from sharing vehicle
data by changing the modem settings. See
Network Connectivity (page 470).
Note: The service can be unavailable or
interrupted for a number of reasons, for
example, environmental or topographical
conditions and data plan coverage.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
modem, visit www.FordConnected.com.
Vehicles With SYNC
Mobile Device Data
If you connect a mobile device to your
vehicle, you can display data from your
device on the touchscreen for example,
music and album art. You can share your
vehicle data with mobile apps on your
device through the system. See Apps
(page 528).
The mobile apps function operates by your
connected device sending data to us in the
United States. The data is encrypted and
includes the vehicle identification number
of your vehicle, the SYNC module serial
number, odometer, enabled apps, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain it only as long as necessary to
provide the service, to troubleshoot, for
continuous improvement and to offer you
products and services that may be of
interest to you according to your
preferences and where allowed by law.
If you connect a cell phone to the system,
the system creates a profile that links to
that cell phone. The cell phone profile
enables more mobile features and efficient
operation. The profile contains, for
example, data from your phonebook, read
and unread text messages and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system.
If you connect a media device, the system
creates and retains a media device index
of supported media content. The system
also records a short diagnostic log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity.
The cell phone profile, media device index
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when you
connect your cell phone or media device.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you use the
master reset function to erase the stored
information. See Settings (page 531).
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's module.
For additional information about our
privacy policy, refer to your local Ford
website.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
connectivity technology, visit
www.FordConnected.com.
Vehicles With an Emergency Call
System
When the emergency call system is active,
it may disclose to emergency services that
your vehicle has been in a crash involving
the deployment of an airbag or activation
of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions
or updates to the emergency call system
may also be capable of electronically or
verbally disclosing to emergency services
operators your vehicle location or other
13
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Introduction
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
emergency services operators to provide
the most appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not activate the emergency
call system.
Note: You cannot deactivate emergency
call systems that are required by law.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for
more information about Ford Credit and
access to the online Account Manager tool,
visit www.ford.com/finance.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet
or exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents happen sometimes.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty.
14
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Introduction
The Ford Warranty may not cover damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts.
For additional information, refer to the
terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, see your warranty guide that is
available online. For more information,
refer to our website and download your
copy of the warranty guide
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle has
sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNING: You risk death or
serious injury to yourself and others if you
do not follow the instruction highlighted
by the warning symbol. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Never place front seat
mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
in front of an active passenger airbag.
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING: Do not connect
wireless plug-in devices to the data link
connector. Unauthorized third parties
could gain access to vehicle data and
impair the performance of safety related
systems. Only allow repair facilities that
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data
link connector.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in
devices unless approved by Ford. The
vehicle Warranty will not cover damage
caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.
Using your Vehicle With a
Snowplow
More information and guidelines for using
your vehicle with a snowplow are in this
Owner's Manual. See Snow Plowing
(page 311).
Using a Slide-In Camper
For information regarding the use of
slide-in campers, consult the Truck
Camper Loading document supplied with
your vehicle.
Using your Vehicle as an
Ambulance
If your light truck has the Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package, it may be utilized as
an ambulance. We urge ambulance
manufacturers to follow the
recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s
Layout Book and the Qualified Vehicle
Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as
15
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Introduction
pertinent supplements. For additional
information, please contact the Truck Body
Builders Advisory Service at
http://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/
and then by selecting Contact Us or by
phone at 1–877–840–4338.
Use of your Ford light truck as an
ambulance, without the Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package voids the Ford New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and may void
the emissions warranties. In addition,
ambulance usage without the preparation
package could cause high underbody
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a
risk of spraying fuel which could lead to
fires.
If your vehicle has the Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package, it will be indicated
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label is on the driver side door
pillar or on the rear edge of the driver door.
You can determine whether the
ambulance manufacturer followed Ford’s
recommendations by directly contacting
that manufacturer. The Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package is only available on
certain diesel engine equipped vehicles.
Using your Vehicle as a Stationary
Power Source
Information and guidelines for operating a
vehicle with an aftermarket power take-off
system are in this Owner's Manual. See
Power Take-Off (page 205).
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly
recommend that you use extreme
caution when using any device that may
take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
16
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For additional information about our
sustainability progress and initiatives, visit
www.sustainability.ford.com.
17
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Environment
INSTRUMENT PANEL
E299629
Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 89).A
Wiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 84).B
Information display controls. See Information Displays (page 109).C
Instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster (page 101).D
Navigation, media, phone.E
Entertainment display.F
Hazard flasher switch. See Hazard Flashers (page 316).G
Audio.H
Climate control. See Climate Control (page 139).I
Rear defrost.J
Trailer backup assist. See Trailer Reversing Aids (page 274).K
Start button. See Keyless Starting (page 169).L
Voice control. See Voice Control (page 81).M
18
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
At a Glance
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that
is appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their
recommendations for child restraints on
probable child height, age and weight
thresholds, or on the minimum
requirements of the law. We recommend
that you check with a NHTSA Certified
Child Passenger Safety Technician
(CPST) to make sure that you properly
install the child restraint in your vehicle
and that you consult your pediatrician to
make sure you have a child restraint
appropriate for your child. To locate a
child restraint fitting station and CPST,
contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca
to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your
area. Failure to properly restrain children
in child restraints made especially for
their height, age and weight, may result
in an increased risk of serious injury or
death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or
serious heat related injuries, including
brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
20
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended Restraint
Type
Child Size, Height, Weight, or AgeChild
Use a child restraint
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child restraint (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less
than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle seatbelt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat backrest
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended
by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
• You are required by law to properly use
child restraints for infants and toddlers
in the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb
(36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position.
• When installing a rear facing child
restraint, adjust the vehicle seats to
avoid interference between the child
restraint and the vehicle seat in front
of the child restraint.
21
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child restraint (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally
age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
(Except Front Center Position of
Super Cab and Crew Cab)
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Depending on where
you secure a child restraint, and
depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
When installing a child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the child
restraint, with the tongue between the
child restraint and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat in the upright
position before you install the child
restraint.
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. This vehicle does not
require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint
illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.
22
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
E142528
1. Position the child restraint in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Make sure you did not
twist the belt webbing.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure you securely latched the tongue
by pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the belt out.
23
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. You should
not be able to pull more belt out. If the
retractor did not lock, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once you add the extra
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle helps to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
attach it.
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no
more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for
proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
(Front Center Position of Super
Cab and Crew Cab)
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Always use both the
lap and shoulder portion of the seatbelt
in the center seating position.
24
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
The belt webbing below the tongue is the
lap portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt. The belt webbing above the
tongue is the shoulder belt portion of the
combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142528
1. Position the child restraint in the front
center seat.
E162708
2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.
E142530
3. While holding both shoulder and lap
portions next to the tongue, route the
tongue and webbing through the child
restraint according to the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions. Make sure
that you did not twist the belt webbing.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
25
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
E142533
5. While pushing down with your knee on
the child restraint, pull up on the
shoulder belt portion to tighten the lap
belt portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
6. Allow the seatbelt to retract and
remove any slack in the belt to securely
tighten the child restraint in the vehicle.
7. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
attach it.
E142534
8. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
9. Check from time to time to be sure that
there is no slack in the lap and shoulder
belt. The shoulder belt must be snug
to keep the lap belt tight during a crash.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Do not attach two child
safety restraints to the same anchor. In
a crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where
you secure a child restraint, and
depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points: two lower anchors where
the vehicle seat backrest and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor behind that seating position.
LATCH compatible child restraints have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child
restraint. However, you can still use the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint if the
26
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
lower anchors are not used. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must
also attach the top tether strap to the
proper top tether anchor if a top tether
strap has been provided with your child
restraint.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the following
seating positions (LATCH is not available
on Regular Cab):
Crew Cab
E308373
Super Cab
E308385
E312154
The lower LATCH anchors are at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat backrest. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions to
properly install a child restraint with LATCH
attachments.
Follow the instructions later in this chapter
on attaching child restraints with tether
straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child restraint only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors
from the Outboard Seating
Positions (Center Seating Use)
WARNING: The standardized
spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in
(280 mm) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
27
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 26 in
(652 mm) apart. The standardized spacing
for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)
center to center. You cannot install a child
restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at
the center seating position. You can only
use LATCH compatible child restraints
(with attachments on belt webbing) at
this seating position provided that the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions
permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child restraint to any lower
anchor if an adjacent child restraint is
attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the child restraint, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to the vehicle. The seat should
move less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you do
this for a proper installation.
If you did not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of a child being injured in
a crash greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Restraints
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child restraints
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child restraint and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your child
restraint does not reach the appropriate
top tether anchor in the vehicle.
The passenger seats of your vehicle may
have built-in tether strap anchors behind
the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be
loops of webbing above the seat backrest
or an anchor bracket behind the seat on
the rear edge of the seat cushion.
The rear seat in the Crew Cab and Super
Cab has three straps along the top of the
seat backrest that function as both routing
loops for the tether straps and anchor
loops.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
Regular Cab
E308389
28
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
E326036
Crew Cab
E308390
Super Cab
E308396
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The
tether strap may not work properly if
attached somewhere other than the
correct tether anchor.
If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child
restraint off the vehicle seat cushion when
the child is seated in it. Keep the tether
strap just snug without lifting the front of
the child restraint. Keeping the child
restraint just touching the vehicle seat
gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Once you install the child restraint using
either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of
the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
Front Seat Tether Strap
Attachment (Regular Cab)
Note: For vehicles with adjustable head
restraints, route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the head
restraint posts, otherwise route the tether
strap over the top of the seat backrest.
29
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
1. Route the child restraint tether strap
over the back of the seat and under the
head restraint.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position. You may
need to pull the seat backrest forward
to access the tether anchors. Make sure
the seat is locked in the upright position
before installing the child restraint.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor.
4. Tighten the child restraint tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
Regular Cab Passenger and Center
Seats (located on back panel)
E175295
If you clip the tether strap incorrectly, the
child restraint may not be retained properly
in the event of a crash.
If you did not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of a child being injured in
a crash greatly increases.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
Rear Seat Tether Strap
Attachment (Crew Cab and Super
Cab)
E167009
There are three loops of webbing just
above the back of the rear seat (along the
bottom edge of the rear window). Use
these loops as both routing loops and
anchor loops for up to three child restraint
tether straps.
For example, you can use the center loop
as a routing loop for a child restraint in the
center rear seat and as an anchoring loop
for child restraints installed in the outboard
rear seats.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if
the tether strap is hooked to the loop
directly behind the child restraint.
To provide a tight tether strap:
E162715
30
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
1. Route the vehicle tether loop between
the head restraint posts, then route the
child restraint tether strap through the
loop, forward of the head restraint.
2. Hook the strap to the vehicle tether
anchor loop in the adjacent seating
position. If using the driver side, pass
the strap behind the shoulder belt for
the center seat. Always put the tether
strap through the routing loop. The
head restraint support post holds the
child restraint tightly, but the head
restraint post is not strong enough to
hold the child restraint during a crash.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions.
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being injured in
a crash greatly increases.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety restraint
(generally children who are less than 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age 4 and
less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach
age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or
80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
31
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E142596
32
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seating position whenever possible. If
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
properly secure the largest child on the
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint
device is appropriate for your child's size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions and
warnings provided for installation and
use in conjunction with the instructions
and warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the
child may increase the risk of serious
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow a
passenger to hold a child on their lap
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows,
books or towels to boost your child's
height. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
33
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children
Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Combined
Weight of
Child and
Child
Restraint
Restraint
Type
Seatbelt
Only
Seatbelt
and LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)
Seatbelt
and Top
Tether
Anchor
LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
Only)
LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child
restraint
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child
restraint
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child
restraint
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child
restraint
34
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
147).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
35
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Children must always
be properly restrained.
WARNING: Do not allow a
passenger to hold a child on their lap
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a
seatbelt.
WARNING: Each seating position
in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
assembly made up of one buckle and
one tongue designed to be used as a pair.
Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder
belt under the arm. Never use a single
seatbelt for more than one person.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Seatbelts and seats
may be hot in a vehicle that is in the
sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may
burn a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder belts. All occupants of
the vehicle should always properly wear
their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelts with automatic
locking mode, (except the driver
seatbelt).
• Height adjusters at the front outermost
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioners at the front
outermost and rear outermost seating
positions.
E71880
• Seatbelt warning light and chime.
36
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In
frontal and near-frontal crashes, the
seatbelt pretensioners may be activated
alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity,
together with the front airbags. In side
crashes and rollovers, the seatbelt
pretensioners activate when the Safety
Canopy is activated.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
The front outermost and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Using the Seatbelt with Cinch
Tongue (Front Center Seat on
Super Cab and Crew Cab)
The cinch tongue slides up and down the
belt webbing when you stow the belt or
while putting seatbelts on. When you
buckle the lap and shoulder seatbelt, the
cinch tongue allows you to shorten the lap
portion, but pinches the webbing to keep
the lap portion from getting longer. The
cinch tongue is designed to slip during a
crash, so always wear the shoulder belt
properly and do not allow any slack in
either the lap or shoulder portions.
Before you can reach and latch a lap and
shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into
the buckle, you may have to lengthen the
lap belt portion of it.
37
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
E162708
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull some
webbing out of the shoulder belt
retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below the
tongue, grasp the tip (metal portion)
of the tongue so that it is parallel to the
webbing and slide the tongue upward.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that
the tongue can reach the buckle.
Fastening the Cinch Tongue
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
1. Pull the lap and shoulder belt from the
retractor so that the shoulder belt
portion of the seatbelt crosses your
shoulder and chest.
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the
belt is twisted, remove the twist.
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle for your seating position until
you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue to the buckle by pulling on the
tongue.
While you are fastened in the seatbelt, the
lap and shoulder belt with a cinch tongue
adjusts to your movement. However, if you
brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle
receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more, the seatbelt locks and helps reduce
your forward movement.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion
of the seatbelt snugly and low across
the hips. Position the shoulder portion of
the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See
the following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
38
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNING: If your vehicle is
involved in a crash, have the seatbelts
and associated components inspected
as soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking
mode. The front outermost passenger and
rear seat seatbelts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly,
turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a
small length of webbing back toward the
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
the rear seat backrest or push the seat
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
Feed a small length of webbing back
toward the stowed position.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
retracts to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
is not available on the driver seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode any time you install a child
restraint in a front outermost passenger
seating position in a Regular Cab,
SuperCab, SuperCrew or any rear seating
position of a SuperCab or SuperCrew. The
optional front center seatbelt has a cinch
mechanism. Properly restrain children 12
years old and under in a rear seat whenever
possible.
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
39
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the safety belt
height adjuster so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the safety belt properly
could reduce the effectiveness of the
safety belt and increase the risk of injury
in a crash.
E145664
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Pull the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
E71880
This lamp illuminates and an
indicator chime will sound if the
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
ThenIf
The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and
the indicator chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
chime turn off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the
warning lamp is illuminated and the indic-
ator chime is sounding...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on position...
40
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the seatbelt
warning function. It provides additional
reminders by intermittently sounding a
tone and illuminating the seatbelt warning
light when you are in the driver seat and a
seatbelt is unbuckled.
ThenIf
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.
You buckle your seatbelt before you switch
the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates - the
seatbelt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for six seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until you buckle your seatbelt.
You do not buckle your seatbelt before your
vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h)
and 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the
ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates - the
seatbelt warning light illuminates and the
warning tone sounds for six seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until you buckle your seatbelt.
The driver seatbelt is unbuckled for about
one minute while the vehicle is traveling at
least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature (Driver only)
WARNING: While the system
allows you to deactivate it, this system
is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an
accident. We recommend you leave the
system activated for yourself and others
who may use the vehicle.
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot
disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if the
Belt-Minder has been previously disabled,
it will be re-enabled during the use of
MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 60).
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• All vehicle doors are closed.
• The driver seatbelt is unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning light
turns off (about one minute). You must
complete Step 3 within 30 seconds
after the seatbelt warning light turns
off.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt
three times at a moderate speed,
ending with the seatbelt in the
unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
seatbelt warning light turns on.
41
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
4. While the seatbelt warning light is on,
buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off if it is
currently on.
• This will switch the feature on if it is
currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
restraint seatbelts to make sure there are
no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt
buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
backrest (if equipped), child safety seat
LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a
crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
crash be replaced. However, if the crash
was minor and an authorized dealer finds
that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
not in use during a crash should also be
inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 380).
SEATBELT EXTENSIONS
WARNING: Persons who fit into
the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of
a crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by our dealers.
The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle,
model year and seating position. The use
of an extension intended for another
vehicle, model year or seating position
may not offer you the full protection of
your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt
extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the way the seatbelt fits
across the torso, over the lap or to make
the seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
our dealers. Only use our seatbelt
extensions made by the original equipment
seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts.
Ask your authorized dealer if your extension
is compatible with your vehicle restraint
system.
42
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury
from a deploying airbag is the greatest
close to the trim covering the airbag
module.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seating position whenever possible. If
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
properly secure the largest child on the
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the
steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
reduce the risk of injury, do not touch
them after inflation.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
43
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the
steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 51).
Passenger Airbag On and Off
Switch (If Equipped)
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: The front passenger
airbag is not designed to offer protection
to an occupant in the center seating
position.
WARNING: Your vehicle may have
an airbag deactivation switch. Before
driving, always look at the switch to
make sure it is in the appropriate
position. Failure to put the switch in the
proper position can increase the risk of
serious injury or death in a crash.
E181984
The front passenger airbag on and off
switch has indicators that illuminate,
indicating that the front passenger frontal
airbag is either on or off. The indicators are
near the center of the instrument panel.
Note: The OFF and ON indicators illuminate
for a short period of time when you switch
the ignition on to confirm it is functional.
44
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag Status
Indicator
Switch Position
DisabledOFF: LitOff
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitOn
ON: Lit
Switching the Passenger Airbag Off
WARNING: If the light does not
illuminate when the passenger airbag
switch is off and you switch the ignition
on, have the passenger airbag switch
serviced immediately by a qualified
technician.
WARNING: To avoid switching on
the airbag, always remove the ignition
key with the switch in the off position.
WARNING: If your vehicle has rear
seats, always transport children who are
12 and younger in the rear seat. Always
use seatbelts and child restraints
properly. Do not place a child in a rear
facing infant seat in the front seat unless
your vehicle is equipped with an airbag
on and off switch and the passenger
airbag is turned off. This is because the
back of the infant seat is too close to the
inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal
injury to the infant when the airbag
inflates is substantial.
The passenger airbag on and off switch is
in the glovebox.
E181522
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the switch
to OFF and hold in OFF while removing
the key.
2. When you switch the ignition on, the
passenger airbag off light illuminates
briefly, momentarily shuts off and then
switches back on. This indicates that
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Switching the Passenger Airbag Back
On
WARNING: The seatbelts for the
driver and right front passenger seating
positions are specifically designed to
operate together with the airbags in
certain types of crashes. When you
switch off your airbag, you not only lose
45
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
the protection of the airbag, you also
may reduce the effectiveness of your
seatbelt system. If the passenger does
not meet the requirements stated in the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration or Transport Canada
deactivation criteria, switching off the
airbag can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: If your vehicle has rear
seats, always transport children who are
12 and younger in the rear seat. Always
use seatbelts and child restraints
properly. Do not place a child in a rear
facing infant seat in the front seat unless
your vehicle is equipped with an airbag
on and off switch and the passenger
airbag is turned off. This is because the
back of the infant seat is too close to the
inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal
injury to the infant when the airbag
inflates is substantial.
WARNING: If the passenger airbag
off light is illuminated when the
passenger airbag switch is on and the
ignition is on, have the passenger airbag
switch serviced immediately by a
qualified technician.
The passenger airbag remains off until you
switch it back on.
E181521
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the
switch to ON.
2. The passenger airbag off light will
briefly illuminate when you switch the
ignition on. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is operational.
The passenger side airbag should always
be on (the passenger airbag off light
should not be illuminated) unless the
passenger is a person who meets the
requirements stated either in Category 1, 2
or 3 of the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration or Transport Canada
deactivation criteria which follows.
The vast majority of drivers and passengers
are much safer with an airbag than
without. To do their job and reduce the risk
of life threatening injuries, airbags must
open with great force, and this force can
pose a potentially deadly risk in some
situations, particularly when a front seat
occupant is not properly buckled up. The
most effective way to reduce the risk of
unnecessary airbag injuries without
reducing the overall safety of the vehicle
is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the
front seat. This provides the protection of
seatbelts and permits the airbags to
provide the additional protection they were
46
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
designed to provide. If you choose to
deactivate your airbag, you are losing the
very significant risk reducing benefits of
the airbag and you are also reducing the
effectiveness of the seatbelts, because
seatbelts in modern vehicles are designed
to work as a safety system with the
airbags.
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Deactivation Criteria
(Excluding Canada)
WARNING: This vehicle has special
energy management seatbelts for the
driver and right front passenger. These
particular seatbelts are specifically
designed to work with airbags to help
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The
energy management seatbelt gives or
releases additional seatbelt webbing in
some accidents to reduce the
concentration of force on an occupant's
chest and to reduce the risk of certain
bone fractures and injuries to underlying
organs. In a crash, if the airbag is off, this
energy management seatbelt might
permit the passenger wearing the
seatbelt to move forward enough to
have a serious or fatal injury. The more
severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk. Make sure
the airbag is on for any passenger who
does not qualify under the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
deactivation criteria.
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
• The vehicle has no rear seat;
• The vehicle has a rear seat too small
to accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
• The infant has a medical condition
which, according to the infant's
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front so that the
driver can constantly monitor the
child's condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• The vehicle has no rear seat;
• Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in
the rear seat(s) whenever possible,
children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must
ride in the front because no space is
available in the rear seat(s) of the
vehicle; or
• The child has a medical condition
which, according to the child's
physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the
driver can constantly monitor the
child's condition.
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
• Causes the passenger airbag to pose
a special risk for the passenger;
• Makes the potential harm from the
passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning
off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the
dashboard or windshield in a crash.
47
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria
(Canada Only)
WARNING: This vehicle has special
energy management seatbelts for the
driver and right front passenger. These
particular seatbelts are specifically
designed to work with airbags to help
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The
energy management seatbelt gives or
releases additional seatbelt webbing in
some accidents to reduce the
concentration of force on an occupant's
chest and to reduce the risk of certain
bone fractures and injuries to underlying
organs. In a crash, if the airbag is off, this
energy management seatbelt might
permit the passenger wearing the
seatbelt to move forward enough to
have a serious or fatal injury. The more
severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk. Make sure
the airbag is on for any passenger who
does not qualify under the Transport
Canada deactivation criteria.
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
• My vehicle has no rear seat;
• The rear seat in my vehicle cannot
accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat;
• The infant has a medical condition
which, according to the infant's
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that
the driver can monitor the infant's
condition.
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or
under must ride in the front seat because:
• My vehicle has no rear seat;
• Although children age 12 and under ride
in the rear seat whenever possible,
children age 12 and under have no
option but to sometimes ride in the
front seat because rear seat space is
insufficient;
• The child has a medical condition that,
according to the child's physician,
makes it necessary for the child to ride
in the front seat so that the driver can
monitor the child's condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a
medical condition that, according to his or
her physician:
• Poses a special risk for the passenger
if the airbag deploys; and
• Makes the potential harm from the
passenger airbag deployment greater
than the potential harm from turning
off the airbag and experiencing a crash
without the protection offered by the
airbag
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
least 10 in (25 cm) between an
occupant's chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
48
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat back, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
greatly increases.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
If two adults and a child occupy a Regular
Cab, properly restrain the child in the
center front unless doing so would interfere
with driving your vehicle. This provides lap
and shoulder belt protection for all
occupants, and airbag protection for the
adults. A child or infant properly restrained
in the center front seat should not incur
risk of serious injury from the airbags.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
airbag cover, on the side of the front or
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Accessory seat covers
not released by Ford Motor Company
could prevent the deployment of the
airbags and increase the risk of injuries
in a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
49
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
The side airbags are on the outermost side
of the front seat backrests. In certain
sideways crashes or rollover events, the
side airbags will be inflated. The airbag
was designed to inflate between the door
panel and occupant to further enhance the
protection provided to occupants in side
impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that your vehicle has side
airbags.
• Side airbags inside the driver and front
passenger seat backrests.
E67017
Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 51).
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
headliner at the siderail that may come
into contact with a deploying curtain
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The curtain airbag could
injure you as it deploys from the
headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
50
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
The Safety Canopy deploys during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be
activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 51).
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of your
vehicle (including hood, bumper system,
frame, front end body structure, tow
hooks and hood pins) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not
modify or add equipment to the front
end of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors that provide information
to the restraints control module which
deploys (activates) the seatbelt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, seat mounted side airbags, and the
Safety Canopy. Based on the type of crash,
the restraints control module deploy the
appropriate safety devices.
51
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after you
switch the ignition on.
• The readiness light either flashes or
stays lit.
• You hear a series of five beeps. The
tone pattern repeats periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration).
• The design of the seatbelt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in
rollovers.
• The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes.
Side airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
52
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range.
One of the following could cause a
decrease in operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You activate the front exterior door
handle switch.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 53).
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The integrated keyhead
transmitter functions as a programmed
ignition key that operates all the locks and
starts your vehicle, as well as a remote
control.
53
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
E191532
Press the button to release the key blade.
Press and hold the button to fold the key
blade back in when not in use.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
E307113
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle.
54
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
E307112
Press the release button and pull the key
blade out.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
WARNING: Keep batteries away
from children to prevent ingestion.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death. If
ingested, immediately seek medical
attention.
WARNING: If the battery
compartment does not securely close,
stop using the remote control and
replace it as soon as possible. In the
meantime, keep the remote control away
from children. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key blade
before beginning the procedure.
E191533
1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
55
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151799
3. Carefully remove the cover.
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown to
release the battery.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.
6. Insert a new battery with the + facing
upward.
7. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter.
Intelligent Access Key
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2450 or
equivalent.
E307112
1. Press the release button and pull the
key blade out.
56
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
E303824
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
E218402
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter and install the key
blade.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control to recall
memory positions.
Press the unlock button on a linked remote
control to recall memory positions. If you
enable the easy entry and exit feature, the
seat moves to the easy entry position. The
seat moves to the driver memory position
when you switch the ignition on.
Linking a Preset Position to your
Remote Control
See Memory Function (page 153).
57
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. A tone sounds
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING: To avoid exhaust
fumes, do not use remote start if your
vehicle is parked indoors or in areas that
are not well ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from the outside. The transmitter
has an extended operating range.
You can configure vehicles with automatic
climate control to turn on the automatic
climate control when you remote start your
vehicle. See Automatic Climate Control
(page 140). A manual climate control
system runs at the setting you set it to
when you switched your vehicle off.
Many states and provinces restrict the use
of remote start. Check your local and state
or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems.
The remote start system does not work if
any of the following occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch off the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
Remote Control Feedback
An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
StatusLED
Remote start or
extension
successful
Solid green
Remote stop
successful; vehicle
off
Solid red
Remote start or
stop failed
Blinking red
Waiting for status
update
Blinking green
Remote Starting Your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other.
E138626
To remote start your vehicle:
58
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
1. Press the lock button.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs
the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch it on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 109).
Note: If you do not follow this sequence,
your vehicle does not start remotely, the
direction indicators do not flash twice and
the horn does not sound.
Note: If you remote start your vehicle with
an integrated keyhead transmitter, you must
switch on the ignition before driving your
vehicle. If you remote start your vehicle with
an intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the push button ignition switch on the
instrument panel once while applying the
brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and your
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running.
If the duration is set to 10 minutes, the
duration extends by another 10 minutes.
For example, if your vehicle had been
running from the first remote start for 5
minutes, your vehicle continues to run now
for a total of 20 minutes. You can extend
the remote start up to a maximum of 30
minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
You may have to be closer to the
vehicle than when starting due to ground
reflection and the added noise of the
running vehicle.
You can turn the remote start system on
or off using the information display. See
General Information (page 109).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement or additional keys or remote
controls can be purchased from your
authorized dealer. Your dealer can program
the transmitters to your vehicle.
59
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. You can program the
restrictions to all keys but one. Any keys
that you did not program are administrator
keys or admin keys.
You can use admin keys to:
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle
restrictions.
• Program certain MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey restrictions.
After you program a MyKey, you can view
the following information through the
information display:
• The total number of admin keys and
MyKeys for your vehicle.
• The total distance a MyKey driver
traveled with your vehicle.
Note: Every MyKey receives the same
restrictions and settings. You cannot
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.
Standard Settings
Not every vehicle includes the features
listed below. If your vehicle has this
equipment, then you cannot change the
following settings when using a MyKey:
• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™.
MyKey mutes the audio system until
drivers, and in some instances,
passengers, fasten their seatbelts.
• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
• Certain driver alerts, stability systems
or parking aids turn on automatically
when you use the MyKey system. For
example, Blind Spot Information
System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane
departure warning or forward collision
warning.
• Restricted touchscreen operation in
some markets. For example, MyKey
may prevent manual navigation
destination input while the vehicle is in
any gear other than park (P) or when
the vehicle reaches a certain rate of
speed.
• Satellite radio adult content
restrictions, if this feature is available
in your market.
Note: MyKey drivers may be able to switch
the lane departure warning feature off, but
this feature turns back on automatically
with every new key cycle.
Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM
radio or a very basic audio system, then the
radio may not mute.
Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature
settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward
with an admin key.
Note: Not every feature applies to every
vehicle in every market. When they are
available for your vehicle, then they appear
in your information display, providing
choices to switch them on or off, or to select
a more specific setting.
• Various vehicle speed limits so the
MyKey driver cannot exceed certain
speeds. The information display shows
warnings followed by an audible tone
when the MyKey driver reaches the set
speed. You cannot override the set
speed by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal.
60
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
MyKey™
WARNING: Do not set MyKey
maximum speed limit to a limit that will
prevent the driver from maintaining a
safe speed considering posted speed
limits and prevailing road conditions. The
driver is always responsible to drive in
accordance with local laws and
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so
could result in accident or injury.
• Various vehicle speed reminders so
MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
speed approaches the limits. Warnings
appear in your information display and
a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
exceed the set vehicle speed.
• The audio system's maximum volume
limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
concentrate on the road. A message
appears in the information display
when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed
the limited volume. MyKey also
disables the automatic volume control.
• Always on setting. This setting forces
certain features to remain on and
active for MyKey drivers. For example,
E911 or emergency assistance and the
do not disturb features stay on even if
a MyKey driver uses the feature's
control to switch it off.
Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM
radio or a very basic audio system, then the
radio may not mute.
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey.
Vehicles that have the following center
console:
E226701
1. Switch the ignition on using the key or
the transmitter you want to program.
If your vehicle has a push-button start,
place the transmitter into the backup
slot. See previous illustration.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to begin
programming your MyKey. See
Information Displays (page 109).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
61
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
MyKey™
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish programming
your MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off,
open and close driver door and restart
your vehicle with the programmed key
or transmitter.
Note: Make sure you label the programmed
MyKey so you can distinguish it from the
original admin keys.
You can also program the optional MyKey
settings.
Vehicles that have the following center
console:
E269950
1. Switch the ignition on using the key or
the transmitter you want to program.
If your vehicle has a push-button start,
place the transmitter into the backup
slot. See previous illustration.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to begin
programming your MyKey. See
Information Displays (page 109).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish programming
your MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off,
open and close driver door and restart
your vehicle with the programmed key
or transmitter.
Note: Make sure you label the programmed
MyKey so you can distinguish it from the
original admin keys.
You can also program the optional MyKey
settings.
Programming or Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to program or
change your optional MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using the key or
the transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to change the
settings of your MyKey. See
Information Displays (page 109).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish programming
your MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off,
open and close the driver door and
restart your vehicle with the
programmed key or transmitter.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. If you
switch the engine off, you must use an
admin key to change or clear your optional
MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status at once. To
clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use
the information display.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
62
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
MyKey™
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to begin clearing
your MyKey programming. See
Information Displays (page 109).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish clearing your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status. You
cannot remove the MyKey restrictions
individually.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 109).
MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
Number of MyKeys
Indicates the number of MyKeys
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to detect how many MyKeys you
have for your vehicle and determine when
all MyKeys have been deleted.
Number of Admin Keys
Indicates how many admin keys are
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to determine how many admin
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect
if an additional MyKey has been
programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential causesCondition
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
I cannot create a MyKey.
· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you
place the transmitter into the backup slot.
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key. There always
has to be at least one admin key.
63
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
MyKey™
Potential causesCondition
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
I cannot program the configurable settings.
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 61).
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 61).
· Purchase a new key or transmitter from
your authorized dealer.
I lost the only admin key.
· Program a spare key or transmitter. You
may need to see your authorized dealer.
I lost a key.
· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
64
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your doors and tailgate. See Tailgate
Lock (page 70).
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any time
your vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Vehicle (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door. Press the button
again within three seconds to
unlock all doors. The direction indicators
flash. The direction indicators flash twice
to confirm the change. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control,
keyless entry keypad and intelligent
access.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
seconds to disable or enable two-stage
unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking
allows your entire vehicle to unlock with
one press of the button.
Intelligent access at the driver door unlocks
your entire vehicle when you disable
two-stage unlocking.
Locking the Vehicle
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
flash.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors have
closed. The doors lock again, the horn
sounds and the direction indicators flash
if all the doors have closed.
Mislock
If any door is open, or if the hood is open
on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or
remote start, the horn sounds twice and
the direction indicators do not flash.
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
General Information
You can unlock and lock the vehicle
without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your intelligent access key
is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Intelligent access uses a sensor on the
back of the door handle for unlocking and
a separate sensor on the face of each door
handle for locking.
The system does not function if:
• Your vehicle battery has no charge.
• The key battery has no charge.
• The key frequencies have jammed.
65
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Doors and Locks
Note: The system may not function if the
key is close to metal objects or electronic
devices, for example keys or a cell phone.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 53).
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
E248555
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock
sensor on the back of the door handle for
a brief period and then pull on the door
handle to unlock, being careful to not
touch the lock sensor at the same time or
pulling the door handle too quickly. The
intelligent access system requires a brief
delay to authenticate your intelligent
access key fob.
Locking Using Intelligent Access
E248556
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
handle lock sensor for approximately one
second to lock, being careful to not touch
the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.
Note: Do not use the outside door handle
as a roof cargo strap.
At the Electronic Tailgate (If Equipped)
E187693
Press the exterior tailgate release button
inside of the tailgate handle. The tailgate
unlocks and opens. See Tailgate Lock
(page 70).
Smart Unlock (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
If you leave your key in the ignition, when
you open the driver door and lock your
vehicle with the power door lock control,
the doors lock then unlock.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by:
• Using the manual lock on the inside of
the door.
• Locking the driver door with a key.
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Using the lock button on the remote
control.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
66
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Doors and Locks
When you lock your vehicle using the
power door lock control (with the door
open, vehicle in park and ignition off), your
vehicle searches for an intelligent access
key in the passenger compartment after
you close the door. If your vehicle finds a
key, all the doors immediately unlock.
In order to override the smart unlock
feature and intentionally lock the
intelligent access key inside your vehicle,
you can lock your vehicle after all doors
are closed by using the keyless entry
keypad, pressing the lock button on
another intelligent access key or touching
the locking area on the handle with another
intelligent access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors lock then unlock if the
ignition is on.
Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when:
• All doors have closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the
accessory position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
You can enable or disable the autounlock
feature in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 109).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote entry system.
The illuminated entry system turns off the
lights if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• After 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp does not turn on if the
control is set to the off position.
The lights do not turn off if:
• You switch them on with the dimmer
control.
• Any door is open.
Battery Saver
The battery saver turns off the interior
lamps 10 minutes after you switch the
ignition off, or 10 minutes after you exit the
vehicle.
67
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Doors and Locks
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)
If you leave the ignition on after leaving
your vehicle, it turns off 30 minutes after
you close all the doors.
KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is near the driver window and
illuminates when you touch it.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
E190936
You can use the keypad to:
• Lock or unlock the doors and liftgate.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an
authorized dealer. You can also create up
to five of your own five-digit personal entry
codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code one.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To Program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code two.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code three.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code four.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code five.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
This must be done within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp will flash.
68
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Doors and Locks
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• Pressing the unlock button on the
remote control.
• Switching the ignition on.
• Unlocking the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you disable the
two-stage unlocking feature. See General
Information (page 109).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 control within five
seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time with the driver door closed. You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
To Release the Tailgate (If Equipped)
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 5·6 control within five
seconds.
69
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Doors and Locks
TAILGATE LOCK (IF EQUIPPED)
The tailgate lock can help prevent theft of
the tailgate.
E224958
Insert the ignition key into the tailgate lock.
Turn it to the left to lock the tailgate. Turn
it to the right to unlock the tailgate.
ELECTRONIC TAILGATE (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
safety belt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
The electronic tailgate release will not
operate when:
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
With the Remote Control
E191530
Press the remote control button
twice within three seconds.
With the Outside Control Button
1. Unlock the vehicle with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access transmitter is
within 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, the
tailgate will unlock when you press the
tailgate release button.
E187693
2. Press the button in the top of the
tailgate handle.
3. Push the tailgate up to close the
tailgate.
Note: The electronic tailgate is not a
powered tailgate. The use of a tonneau
cover or other aftermarket accessories,
freezing conditions or being parked downhill
may stop your tailgate from opening
automatically after it is unlatched. You may
need to pull the handle to open the tailgate
if the tailgate does not automatically lower
after being unlatched.
70
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Tailgate (If Equipped)
REMOVING THE TAILGATE
WARNING: Always properly secure
cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo
falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in compromised vehicle
stability and serious personal injury to
vehicle occupants or others.
You can remove the tailgate for more
loading room.
1. Obtain the tailgate removal kit from
the glove box.
E248384
2. Locate and disconnect the frame
connections. They are on the left-hand
side of the vehicle.
Note: Your vehicle may have up to three
frame connections.
3. Install the caps from the tailgate
removal kit on the in-line connectors
that remain on the vehicle.
Note: If you do not install the caps on the
connectors, some features may not operate
as intended.
4. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully
feed the tailgate harness up through
the bumper and place it out of the way.
5. Lower the tailgate.
E163092
6. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the
spring clip on each connector past the
head of the support screw. Disconnect
the cable.
7. Disconnect the other cable.
8. Lift the tailgate to a 45 degree angle
from horizontal.
9. Lift the right side off its hinge.
10. Lift the tailgate to an 80 degree angle
from horizontal.
11. Remove the tailgate from the left side
hinge by sliding it to the right.
Reverse the steps to reinstall the tailgate.
TAILGATE STEP (IF EQUIPPED)
Use the step to make entering the truck
bed easier.
To reduce the risk of falling:
• Only operate the step when your
vehicle is on a level surface.
• Only operate the step in areas with
sufficient lighting.
• Always open the step panel to widen
the step.
• Always use the grab handle when
climbing on the step.
• Do not use the step with bare feet.
71
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Tailgate (If Equipped)
• Make sure the step is clean before use.
• Keep the step load, you plus the load,
below 350 lb (159 kg).
Opening the Step
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the
step before moving your vehicle. Do not
drive with the step or grab handle open.
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Push the button in the center of the
step molding. The step pops out
slightly.
E187718
3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step
to its lowest position.
E189557
4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward
out of the tailgate until it fully extends.
5. Rotate the handle up from horizontal
to vertical until you hear a click. You
have locked the handle in place.
Note: Do not tow with the step or grab
handle.
Replace the slip resistance tape or grab
handle molding if it appears as worn or
damaged.
Closing the Step
1. Press the yellow button on the
telescoping handle to lower the handle,
then press the yellow lever at the
bottom of the handle to unlock the
handle. Rotate the handle down from
vertical to horizontal and push it into
the tailgate.
2. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal,
then push it back into the tailgate until
the step is secure.
BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Do not use the bed extender when
driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins
and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
Note: Do not exceed 150 pounds (68
kilograms) on the tailgate when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the
tailgate mode when you are not using it for
restraining cargo. Always keep the bed
extender in the grocery mode or the stowed
position with the tailgate closed.
72
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Tailgate (If Equipped)
Tailgate mode
E163095
1. Pull the locking pin toward the center
of your vehicle.
E163096
2. Open the latches to release the panels.
E163097
3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.
Repeat Steps 1-3 on the other side of
your vehicle.
E163098
4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both
knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to
secure the panels.
E163099
5. Make sure to insert the latch rod into
the tailgate hole. Make sure to engage
both sides of the locking pins into their
holes in the pick-up box.
Reverse the steps to store the bed
extender.
73
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Tailgate (If Equipped)
Grocery mode
E163100
Follow Steps 1-4 of the tailgate mode
instructions by rotating the panels away
from the tailgate. Close the tailgate.
74
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Tailgate (If Equipped)
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
The system prevents someone from
starting the engine with an incorrectly
coded key.
Note: The system is not compatible with
aftermarket remote start systems. Use of
these may result in engine starting problems
and a loss of security.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain could cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key when starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system helps prevent the engine from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from
starting.
A message could appear in the information
display.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with
a coded key, it is not operating correctly.
A message could appear in the information
display.
Automatic Arming
The system arms when you switch the
ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
The system disarms when you switch the
ignition on with a coded key.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The active anti-theft system is designed
to warn you in the event of unauthorized
vehicle entry and is also designed to help
prevent unwanted towing of your vehicle.
You can choose what is monitored by
arming the system in different ways. See
Information Displays (page 109).
The direction indicators flash and the horn
sounds if the system triggers while the
alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Using the System
You can select two levels of alarm security.
You can change the level of security when
the ignition is switched off through the
information display with the two options
below:
Perimeter Only (If Equipped)
Perimeter only monitors the following:
• Doors.
• Hood.
• Tailgate.
All Sensors (If Equipped)
All sensors monitors the following:
• Doors.
• Hood.
• Tailgate.
• Movement inside your vehicle.
• Change in vehicle inclination, for
example, unwanted towing.
75
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Security
Note: Do not choose all sensors monitor
mode when the vehicle is in transport or if
movement within the vehicle is likely to
occur.
Note: For correct operation of the interior
motion detection system, make sure you
close all the windows prior to arming the
system. This helps prevent accidental alarm
activation due to external influences.
Additionally, the interior motion sensing
system does not arm if any door is ajar.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in the ignition. Lock your vehicle
using the remote control or keyless entry
keypad. You can also lock your vehicle
using the lock sensor on the exterior door
handle if your vehicle is equipped with
intelligent access. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 65).
The direction indicators flash once after
you lock your vehicle. This indicates the
alarm is in the pre-armed mode. It fully
arms after 20 seconds.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Press the power door unlock button
within the 20-second pre-armed mode.
• Unlock the doors with the remote
control or keyless entry keypad. If
equipped with intelligent access, you
can use the unlock sensor on the
exterior door handle. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 65).
• Switch the ignition on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door lock
cylinder to unlock your vehicle, then
switch the ignition on within 12
seconds.
76
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Security
USING POWER RUNNING
BOARDS
WARNING: In extreme climates,
excessive ice buildup may occur, causing
the running boards not to deploy. Make
sure that the running boards have
deployed, and have finished moving
before attempting to step on them. The
running boards will resume normal
function once the blockage is cleared.
WARNING: Switch off the running
boards before jacking or placing any
object under your vehicle. Never place
your hand between the extended running
board and your vehicle. A moving running
board may cause injury.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front
and rear hinge assemblies, running board
motors, or the running board underbody
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking.
Always use proper jacking points.
Note: The running boards may operate
more slowly in cool temperatures.
Note: The running board mechanism may
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this
happens, manually set the running boards
to the deployed position. Then, wash the
system, in particular the front and rear hinge
arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand.
Automatic Power Deploy
E166682
The running boards extend down and out
when you open the door. This can help you
enter and exit your vehicle.
Automatic Power Stow
When you close the doors, the running
boards return to the stowed position after
a two-second delay.
Manual Power Deploy
You can manually operate the running
boards in the information display.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Advanced Settings.
3. Select Vehicle.
4. Select Power Running Boards.
5. Select your desired power running
board setting.
Set the running boards in the deployed
position to access the roof.
The running boards return to the stowed
position and enter automatic mode when
the vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h).
Enabling and Disabling
You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the information
display.
77
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
• When disabled, the running boards
move to the stowed position regardless
of the door position.
• When enabled, the running boards
move back to the correct positions
based on the door position.
Bounce-back
The running board will reverse direction
and move to the end of travel if it
encounters an object while moving.
78
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 147).
E261502
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
position you prefer.
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 147).
E261582
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of
the control.
79
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Steering Wheel
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position sets if
the steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again.
Note: The steering column may begin to
move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position sets. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it stops just short of the end of the
column position.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory
function. See Memory Function (page
153).
Pressing the adjustment control during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column moves up when you switch
the ignition off. Switch the ignition on to
return the system to its previous settings.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 109).
Note: If you press any adjustment or
memory button when in easy exit mode, the
system cancels the operation.
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the
column may move up and in.
AUDIO CONTROL
E291380
E291395
You can operate the following
functions with the control:
E265304
Press - to decrease volume level.
Press + to increase volume level.
E265045
Press to access the previous
media selection.
E265044
Press to access the next media
selection.
80
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Steering Wheel
E289636
Press repeatedly to scroll
through available audio sources.
Press to access phone mode or
to answer a phone call.
E265040
Press to end a phone call.
E268549
Press to silence the current
media
VOICE CONTROL
The controls are on the steering wheel.
E142599
Press and release to activate
voice recognition.
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: CRUISE CONTROL
E191329
See What Is Cruise Control (page 236).
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL
E191337
See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 237).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E191336
See Information Displays (page 109).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (IF
EQUIPPED)
Switch the heated steering wheel on and
off using the touchscreen.
81
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Steering Wheel
Touch the button to switch the
heated steering wheel on and
off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.
HORN
E270945
Press on the center of the
steering wheel near the horn icon
to activate the horn.
82
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING: Never use the pedal
adjustment controls when your feet are
on the accelerator or brake pedal when
the vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in park (P).
Depending on your vehicle and equipment
level, the shape and location of your
power-adjustable pedal control can vary.
• If your control is vertical, then it is to
the left of the steering column and on
the instrument panel.
• If your control is horizontal, then it is on
the left side of the steering column and
on the instrument panel.
Vertical Control
E176213
Farther away from you.A.
Closer to you.B.
Horizontal Control
A B
E162916
Farther away from you.A.
Closer to you.B.
Both horizontal and vertical controls
operate the same way:
1. Press and hold A to move the pedals
farther away from you.
2. Press and hold B to move the pedals
closer to you.
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Seats
(page 147).
83
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Adjustable Pedals (If Equipped)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E172816
• Rotate away from you for a long wipe
interval.
• Rotate toward you for a short wipe
interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: The courtesy wipe feature turns on
after using the windshield washers to
remove any excess washer fluid and debris.
You can adjust the courtesy wipe settings
in the instrument display.
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
E172817
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a large amount
of water on the windshield. When you
select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
of water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
84
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wipers and Washers
In these conditions, you can do the
following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E172818
• A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
• A brief press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold turns on the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 109).
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This could
cause the washer pump to overheat.
85
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
Lamps off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
rear lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
Headlamp High Beam
E308790
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
86
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Lighting
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam
E311233
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog.
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low
light situations or when the wipers operate.
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
The instrument lighting dimmer buttons
are on the lighting control.
E291299
E291298
Repeatedly press one of the
buttons to adjust the brightness.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -
VEHICLES WITH:
CONFIGURABLE DAYTIME
RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
87
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Lighting
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display. See
General Information (page 109).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The lamps are on in the information
display.
2. You switch the ignition on.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or you release the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.
If the daytime running lamps are off in the
information display, the lamps stay off in
all switch positions.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -
VEHICLES WITH: DAYTIME
RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
The system turns the lamps on in daylight
conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the
lighting control to any position except
headlamps.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On
or Off
Only switch the front fog lamps on during
reduced visibility.
You can switch the front fog lamps on if
any of the following occur:
• You set the lighting control to the
parking lamps position.
• You set the lighting control to the
headlamps position.
• You set the lighting control to the
autolamps position and the headlamps
are on.
The front fog lamp button is on the lighting
control.
Press the button to switch the
front fog lamps on or off.
Note: The brightness of the daytime running
lamps may decrease when the front fog
lamps are switched on.
Front Fog Lamp Indicator
It illuminates when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
88
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Lighting
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E311431
Push the lever up or down to use
the direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.
SPOT LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
The spot lamps are on the forward-facing
side of the exterior mirrors. Switch on the
spot lamps by pressing the buttons above
the lighting control with the parking lamps
on.
E176842
When switching on the spot lamps, the
area in front of and to the side of your
vehicle illuminates.
Adjust the aim of the spot lamps by
moving the position of the exterior mirrors.
For manual folding mirrors, adjust the aim
of the lamps by folding the exterior mirrors
into or away from the windows. For
power-folding mirrors, use the switch on
the driver-side door.
Note: The spot lamps turn off when you
reach a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You press the all lamps on button on
the overhead console.
Front Interior Lamp
E262162
The front interior lamp switches are on the
overhead console.
Note: The position of each button on the
overhead console depends on your vehicle.
All Lamps On
Press to switch all interior lamps
on.
89
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Lighting
All Lamps Off
E262185
Press to switch all interior lamps
off.
Individual Map Lamps
E262193
Press to switch the left-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
Press to switch the right-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
Interior Lamp Function
Press to switch the interior lamp
function on and off.
When the interior lamp function is off and
you open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps stay off.
When the interior lamp function is on and
you open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps turn on.
Note: The indicator lamp lights amber
when the door function is off.
Rear Interior Lamps
The rear interior lamps may be above the
rear seat or above the rear windows.
Press to switch the lamps on or
off.
E262193
Press to switch the left-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
Press to switch the right-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)
Use the touchscreen to select the
following:
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
Select Vehicle.
Select Ambient Light.
E306304
Switching Ambient Lighting On
Drag the slider above zero brightness.
Adjusting the Brightness
Drag the slider left or right.
Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Drag the slider left to zero brightness.
CARGO LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
E189587
Press the button in the lighting
control panel or in the rear cargo
box to switch on the lamps.
90
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Lighting
E190880
The cargo lamps are in the following areas:
• Either side of the cargo box.
• Next to the tailgate handle.
Note: The cargo lamps turn off when you
reach a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h). They also
turn off after 10 minutes, fading gradually
to off.
91
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Lighting
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC HIGH
BEAM CONTROL
The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting
ahead, the system turns the high beams
off. Low beams remain on.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
the high beams on and off.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGH
BEAM CONTROL ON AND OFF
Switch the system on or off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 109).
Activating the Automatic High
Beam Control
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position to activate.
See Autolamps (page 87).
Note: Automatic high beams are not
available when autolamps are not turned
on.
When active, the high beams turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (52 km/h).
When active, the high beams turn off if:
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The camera is blocked.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
Note: The deactivation speed is lower on
curves.
Note: High beam reactivation may be
delayed in certain curvy road situations.
Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL INDICATORS
The indicator illuminates to
confirm when the system is
ready to assist.
OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC
HIGH BEAM CONTROL
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the high beams on or off.
92
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Automatic High Beam Control (If Equipped)
WARNING: You may need to
override the system when approaching
other road users.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system during inclement
weather.
E308790
Push the lever away from you to switch
between high beam and low beam.
93
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Automatic High Beam Control (If Equipped)
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the power windows.
They may seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the
power windows, you should verify they
are free of obstructions and make sure
that children and pets are not in the
proximity of the window openings.
E176215
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
One-Touch Up or Down (If Equipped)
Press or lift the switch fully and release it.
Press or lift it again to stop the window.
Note: The window may disable for up to
five minutes if you cycle it up and down
repeatedly. This helps prevent damage to
the motor. Normal operation will resume
once the motor cools.
Restoring the One-Touch Up Function
You may lose the one-touch function if the
vehicle battery is low.
To reset the function after the battery
recharges:
1. Pull the switch all the way up.
2. Hold the switch until the glass stops
and continue to hold for two seconds.
3. Press the switch down and operate the
window to the full down position.
One-touch up will now be functional.
Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration
with the door closed. Calibrating with the
door open will cause the window to
continuously bounce back.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: When you override the
bounce-back feature the window will
not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take
care when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your
vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
two seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window will
travel up with no bounce-back protection.
The window will stop if you release the
switch before the window closes fully.
94
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock (If Equipped)
E176216
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls.
Accessory Delay (If Equipped)
The window switches remain operational
for several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
GLOBAL OPENING (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the remote control to open
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your
vehicle, press and hold the remote control
unlock button to open the windows.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
E144073
Left-hand mirror.A
Adjustment control.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle
on, with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running, and then:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control lights.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors (If
Equipped)
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
95
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Windows and Mirrors
Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped)
This feature lets you extend the mirror
about 3 in (75 mm). It is useful when
towing a trailer. You can manually pull out
or push in the mirrors to the desired
position.
E234001
PowerScope™ Power Telescoping
Mirrors (If Equipped)
Note: Do not stop the mirrors midway
through their movement. Wait until the
mirrors stop moving and press the control
again.
Note: The left-hand and right-hand mirrors
move at different rates. For example, one
mirror may stop when the other one
continues to move. This is normal.
Auto-Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors automatically fold in
toward the glass after you place the
transmission into park (P), switch off the
vehicle, open and close the driver-side door
and lock the vehicle. The exterior mirrors
automatically unfold and return to their
driving position after you unlock the
vehicle. You can switch this feature on and
off through the information display. See
General Information (page 109).
Power-Folding Mirrors
You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the power-folding mirror control
on the door. Press the control again to
unfold the mirrors.
E234002
Note: If you use the power-folding control
to fold the mirrors on demand and the auto
fold feature is switched on through the
information display, you must use the
power-folding control again to unfold them.
Power Telescoping Mirrors
This feature lets you position both mirrors
at the same time.
96
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Windows and Mirrors
E218902
Extend.A
Retract.B
To adjust your mirrors, press the
adjustment control to position the mirrors.
Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times
within one minute, or repeated folding,
unfolding and telescoping of the mirrors
when holding the control down during full
travel, may disable the system to protect
the motors from overheating. Wait
approximately three minutes with the
vehicle running, and up to 10 minutes with
the vehicle off, for the system to reset and
for function to return to normal.
Loose Mirror
If your power-folding mirrors are manually
folded, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time the mirrors
are manually folded.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 144).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 153).
Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
When the vehicle is running, the
forward-facing portion of the appropriate
mirror housing blinks when you switch on
the direction indicator.
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
Clearance Lamps (If Equipped)
The lower, outer part of the mirror housings
light when you switch the headlamps or
parking lamps on.
Spot Lamps (If Equipped)
The area lights are on the forward-facing
portion of the mirror housing. You can
switch them on and off by using the
controls located on the instrument panel.
See Lighting (page 86).
Trailer Towing Camera System (If
Equipped)
See 360 Degree Camera (page 232).
97
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Windows and Mirrors
Blind Spot Information System (If
Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 248).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror hear up or down and from side to
side.
Manual Dimming Mirror
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. A rear center
passenger or raised rear center head
restraint may also block light from reaching
the sensor.
The mirror dims to reduce glare when
bright lights are detected from behind your
vehicle. It automatically returns to normal
reflection when you shift the transmission
into reverse (R) to make sure you have a
clear view when backing up.
SLIDING WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
Power Sliding Back Window (If
Equipped)
WARNING: When operating the
power sliding back window, you must
make sure all rear seat occupants and
cargo are not in the proximity of the back
window.
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the power sliding back
window. They may seriously injure
themselves.
E176217
The control is on the overhead console.
Press and hold the control to open the
window. Pull and hold the control to close
the window.
98
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Windows and Mirrors
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the moonroof. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the
moonroof, verify that it is free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
roof opening.
The moonroof controls are on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop its
movement during one-touch operation,
press the control a second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E191272
Moonroof open.A
Moonroof vent.B
Sunshade open.C
Sunshade close.D
Moonroof close.E
Moonroof Open
Press and release the button to open the
moonroof.
Note: The moonroof stops short of the fully
opened position to reduce wind noise or
rumbling that may happen with the
moonroof fully open. Press and release the
button again to open the moonroof fully.
99
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Windows and Mirrors
Moonroof Vent
Press and release the button to vent the
moonroof.
Sunshade Open
Press and release the button to open the
sunshade. The sunshade opens with the
moonroof. You can also open the
sunshade with the moonroof closed.
Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully
opened position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To open the sunshade fully,
press the button again.
Sunshade Close
Press and release the button to close the
sunshade.
Moonroof Close
Press and release the button to close the
moonroof from either the open or vent
positions.
Note: The sunshade stops short of the fully
closed position. Press and release the
button a second time to fully close the
shade. The sunshade completely closes only
when the moonroof is closed. The moonroof
closes with a single press of the close
button.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof reverses some distance if it
detects an obstacle when closing.
To override this feature, press and hold the
moonroof close button within two seconds
after the roof comes to a stop following a
bounce-back reversal.
100
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
Type 1 and 2
E219638
Engine oil pressure gauge.A
Engine coolant temperature gauge.B
Fuel gauge.C
Transmission fluid temperature gauge.D
Speedometer.E
Information display. See General Information (page 109).F
Tachometer.G
101
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
Type 3
E219651
Engine oil pressure gauge.A
Engine coolant temperature gauge.B
Fuel gauge.C
Configurable. Transmission fluid temperature, Turbo boost or DEF gauge (diesel
engines only).
D
Speedometer.E
Information display. See General Information (page 109).F
Tachometer.G
102
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle
should stay in the normal operating range
(between L and H). If the needle falls
below the normal range, stop your vehicle,
turn off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is
correct, have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge
Indicates transmission fluid temperature.
At normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
transmission fluid temperature exceeds
the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon
as safely possible and verify the airflow is
not restricted such as snow or debris
blocking airflow through the grill. Also,
higher than normal operating temperature
can be caused by special operation
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing or
off-road use). Operating the transmission
for extended periods with the gauge in the
higher than normal area may cause
internal transmission damage. You need
to alter the severity of your driving
conditions to lower the transmission
temperature into the normal range. If the
gauge continues to show high
temperatures, see an authorized dealer.
Turbo Boost Gauge (If Equipped)
Indicates the amount of manifold air
pressure in the engine.
DEF Gauge (If Equipped)
Indicates the current DEF level.
103
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system
is in. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 237).
On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is turned
on. Turns off when the speed control
system is turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
the adaptive cruise control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control
system is disengaged.
Adaptive Steering (If Equipped)
E223375
The adaptive steering system
indicator illuminates if the
system detects a fault during the
continuous diagnostic checks.
Adaptive Steering Initialization (yellow,
flashing): The adaptive steering system
has detected a difference between
steering wheel angle and the desired road
wheel angle. The steering wheel adjusts
itself to correct this difference. This
adjustment is part of normal system
operation.
Adaptive Steering Off (yellow, solid): The
adaptive steering system is off. It is
possible that the steering wheel may not
be straight when your vehicle is driving
straight ahead. If this message persists,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Adaptive Steering Loss (red, solid): The
adaptive steering system integrity cannot
be verified. Do not drive your vehicle and
have the system checked immediately.
See Steering (page 256).
Anti-Lock Braking System
Illuminates momentarily when
you switch on the ignition to
confirm that the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch on the ignition or begins to flash
at anytime, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
If it illuminates when you are driving, this
indicates a malfunction. You will continue
to have the normal braking system
(without ABS) unless the brake system
warning lamp also illuminates. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Automatic High Beam (If Equipped)
Illuminates when this feature is
on. See What Is Automatic
High Beam Control (page 92).
104
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
immediately.
Brake System Warning Lamp
WARNING: Driving your vehicle
with the warning lamp on is dangerous.
A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
This lamp is a dual function lamp and
illuminates when:
• You apply the parking brake with the
ignition on.
• Your vehicle has a brake fault or low
brake fluid level, regardless of parking
brake position.
E270480
If the lamp illuminates while you
are moving, you may have the
parking brake applied. Be sure
that the parking brake is off.
Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible if the lamp
continues to illuminate.
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
E151262
Illuminates when you switch this
feature off or in conjunction with
a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 248).
Check Fuel Cap (If Equipped)
Illuminates when the fuel cap
may not be properly installed.
Continued driving with this light
on may cause the service engine soon
warning indicator to come on.
Check 4X4 (If Equipped)
Illuminates with a message
when a four-wheel drive fault is
present. See Using Four-Wheel
Drive (page 207).
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
Illuminates when you switch this
feature on. See What Is Cruise
Control (page 236).
Diesel Engine Brake (If Equipped)
E171217
Illuminates when you switch the
manual engine brake on. See
General Information (page
217).
E234452
Illuminates when you switch the
automatic engine brake on. See
General Information (page
217).
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (If Equipped)
E163176
With the key in the on position,
illuminates when the DEF is
contaminated, low or someone
has tampered with the DEF system. See
Selective Catalytic Reductant System
(page 191).
105
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you switch on
the left or right direction
indicator or the hazard warning
flasher. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb.
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Electronic Locking Differential (If
Equipped)
E163170
Illuminates when using the
electronic locking differential.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop your vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let it
cool.
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level.
See Engine Oil Check (page 341).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked immediately.
Fasten Seatbelt
E71880
Illuminates and a tone sounds
to remind you to fasten your
seatbelt.
Front Airbag
E67017
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Illuminates when you switch the
front fog lamps on.
High Beam
Illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on. It
flashes when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hill Descent (If Equipped)
E163171
Illuminates when hill descent is
switched on.
Low Fuel Level
Illuminates when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
Illuminates when the tire
pressure in one or more tires is
below the correct tire pressure.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
as soon as possible.
106
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control
Illuminates when a powertrain
or a 4WD fault has been
detected. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
Illuminates when you switch the
ignition on prior to engine start
to check the bulb and to indicate
whether your vehicle is ready for Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Emission Law (page 188).
If it illuminates when the engine is running
this indicates a malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.
If it flashes, engine misfire may be
occurring. Increased exhaust gas
temperatures could damage the catalytic
converter or other vehicle components.
Drive in a moderate fashion, avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration, and have
your vehicle checked immediately.
Stability Control
E138639
Illuminates when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction, the
system switches off. Have the system
checked immediately. See Using
Stability Control (page 223).
Stability Control Off
E130458
Illuminates when you switch the
system off. It goes out when you
switch the system back on or
when you switch the ignition off.
See Using Stability Control (page 223).
Tailgate Ajar
E324523
Illuminates when the tailgate is
not completely closed or when
opened and then closed when
the transmission is in any gear other than
park (P).
Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
E246592
Illuminates when the tow/haul
feature is activated. If the light
flashes steadily, have the system
checked immediately as damage to the
transmission could occur.
Wait To Start (If Equipped)
Illuminates when you switch the
ignition on as part of the
pre-start system. Wait until the
wait to start indicator turns off before
attempting to start your vehicle. See
Starting a Diesel Engine (page 171).
Water In Fuel (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not drain the
water-in-fuel separator while the engine
is running. Failure to follow this warning
may result in fire, serious injury, death or
property damage.
107
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
During refueling, it is possible for
you to pump
water-contaminated diesel fuel
into your fuel tank. Your vehicle’s fuel
system is equipped with a fuel filter and
water separator to remove water from the
fuel. The water in fuel indicator illuminates
when the fuel and water separator has a
significant quantity of water in it and
requires immediate draining.
If the water in fuel indicator illuminates
when the engine is running, stop your
vehicle as soon as safely possible, shut off
the engine, then drain the fuel and water
separator. See Fuel Quality (page 179).
Allowing water to stay in the fuel system,
after the water in fuel indicator illuminates,
could result in extensive damage or failure
of the fuel injection system.
Note: Do not drain the fuel and water
separator while the engine is running. Air will
enter into the fuel system causing the engine
not to operate properly.
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (If
Equipped)
4X2 HIGH
E181778
Illuminates momentarily when
two-wheel drive high is engaged.
4X4 HIGH
E181779
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive high is engaged.
4X4 LOW
E181780
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive low is engaged.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
the last door is closed and your keyless
vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
108
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information displays on the
instrument cluster information display.
Note: Some options could appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Note: Trailer options are not available if
your vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Note: Some MyKey menu options only
appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
MyKey is programmed.
Information Display Controls
E184451
• Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.
E204495
This icon shows the features on
or off status. A check in the box
indicates the feature is on, and
unchecked indicates the feature is off.
2 Inch Display Menu (If Equipped)
Main Menu
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Driver Assist
Settings
109
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Trip 1
Digital Speed
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
DTE
Average Fuel
Outside Temp
• Digital Speed - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
• Trip Odometer - Registers the mileage of individual trips.
• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual trips.
• DTE - Indicates the approximate distance your vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining
in the tank. Changes in driving pattern can cause the value to not only decrease but
also increase or stay constant for periods of time.
• Average Fuel - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
• Outside Air - Shows the outside air temperature.
Note: Press and hold the OK button to reset values.
Note: Trip 2 information is the same as Trip 1.
Fuel Economy
Distance to E
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
• Distance to E - Indicates the approximate distance your vehicle can travel on the fuel
remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern can cause the value to not only
decrease but also increase or stay constant for periods of time.
• Instant Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage.
• Average Fuel Economy - Shows the average fuel usage based on time.
Note: Press and hold the OK button to reset values.
110
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Select Your SettingEngine Hours
Select Your SettingDual Fuel Tank
Hill Strt Asst.
Hold to resetAir Fil. Mon.Maint. Monitor
Shows air filter status
Water in Fuel
Oil Level Low
Hold to resetOil Life
XXX%
Hold to Reset
DEF Range
Exhaust Filter
Tire Pressure
Oil TempOil Temp
Trans. Temp.
Rear Park Aid
Select Your SettingTr Brake Type
Tr Brake Effort
Trailer Sway
Settings
A. Engine OffVehicle
Auto Regen
Select Your SettingLighting
Select Your SettingLocks
Select Your SettingAlarm
Ask on Exit
111
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Settings
Select Your SettingRemote Start
Select Your SettingWindows
Select Your SettingWiper
Controls
Shows information related to the configured MyKey(s).MyKey StatusMyKey
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKey
Select Your Setting911 Assist
Do Not
Disturb
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Vol. Limiter
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Select Your SettingDisplay
Settings
Display Setup
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
4 Inch Display Menu
Main Menu
Display Mode
Trip/Fuel
Towing
Off Road
Settings
112
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Display Mode
Distance to Empty
Dual Fuel Tanks
DEF Status
Digital Speedometer
Engine Information
Maintenance Monitor
Transmission Temp.
Lane Keeping System
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1
Trip 2
ECO Coach
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Select Your SettingCompass
Average Speed
Trip 1 or 2
• Shows the time, mileage and average fuel economy of an individual journey. Also
shows DTE.
ECO Coach
• ECO Coach - Provides suggestions on how to drive more economically.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph, average mpg
and DTE.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving. Also shows
DTE.
Note: Press and hold the OK button to reset values.
113
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Towing
Provides trailer status information
for the active trailer: Trailer light
status, Blind Spot, Reverse Guid-
ance, Pro Trailer Backup, trailer
name, accumulated trailer miles,
trailer brake gain and output.
Trailer Status
Displays the trailer tire pressure and options to customize the display.Trailer Tire
Pressure
Trailer Sway ControlTrailer
Options
Select Your SettingSelect Trailer
Follow onscreen direc-
tions to confirm or
modify your settings.
Change Trailer Settings
Follow onscreen direc-
tions to confirm or
modify your settings.
ConventionalConnection
Checklist
Fifth Wheel
Gooseneck
Note: Trailer options are only available at
speeds less than 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains
active until you set it as no longer active. An
active trailer still accumulates miles even
after you physically disconnect it from your
vehicle.
Off Road
Off Road Status
Displays pitch, steering angle and roll.
Settings
Auto Regen
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
Select Your SettingDTE Calcula-
tion
114
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Settings
Rear Park Aid
Select Your
Setting
Pre-Collision
Select Your
Setting
Cruise Control
Select Your
Setting
Lane Keeping
System
30 min. Max IdleVehicleAdvanced
Settings
Easy Entry/Exit
Select Your SettingLighting
Locks
Mirrors
Neutral Tow
Alarm
Remote Start
Windows
Wiper
Controls
MyKey StatusMyKey
Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
modify your settings.
Create MyKey
Select Your Setting911 Assist
Do Not
Disturb
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter
Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
modify your settings.
Clear MyKeys
115
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Settings
Select Your SettingDistance UnitDisplay
Setup
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
8 Inch Display Menu (If Equipped)
Main Menu
MyView
Trip/Fuel
Truck Info
Towing
Off Road
Settings
MyView
Tire Pressure
Off Road Status
Select Your SettingConfigure MyView
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1
Trip 2
ECO Coach
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
116
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Trip/Fuel
Maintenance Monitor
Navigation/Compass
Trip 1 or 2
• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.
• DTE - Indicates the approximate distance your vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining
in the tank. Changes in driving pattern can cause the value to not only decrease but
also increase or stay constant for periods of time.
• Odo - Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
• Avg mpg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
ECO Coach
• ECO Coach - Provides suggestions on how to drive more economically.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average
mpg.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
Maintenance Monitor
• Maintenance Monitor - Shows the maintenance status of various vehicle systems.
Navigation/Compass
• Navigation - Shows navigation turn by turn (Compass displayed when a route in
Navigation is not set).
Note: Press and hold the OK button to reset values.
Truck Info
Shows various powertrain gauges like trans temp
and DEF fluid.
Gauge View
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer
Dual Fuel Tanks
Engine Information
Shows the maintenance status of various vehicle
systems.
Maintenance Monitor
Transmission Temperature
117
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.
Towing
% Grade, steering angle, gain and output displayTowing
Status
Trailer Name, Accumulated Miles, Trailer Reverse Guidance Status, Trailer
BLIS Status and Trailer Disconnected
Towing
Informa-
tion
Provides status of the brake, park and direction indicator light for the active
trailer.
Trailer
Light
Check
Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings.Trailer Tire
Pressure
Trailer Sway ControlTrailer
Setup
Select Your SettingSelect trailer
Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
modify your settings.
Change Trailer Settings
Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
modify your settings.
ConventionalConnec-
tion Check-
list
Fifth Wheel
Gooseneck
Off Road
Off Road Status
Displays pitch, steering angle, roll, Elocker and 4X4.
Settings
Auto Regen
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
Driver Alert
Rear Park Aid
118
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Settings
Select Your SettingPre-Collision
Cruise
Control
Gauge Selec-
tion
Lane
Keeping
System
Auto Engine OffVehicleAdvanced
Settings
Easy Entry/Exit
Select Your SettingLighting
Locks
Neutral Tow
Alarm
Power Running
Boards
Remote Start
Windows
Wiper Controls
Shows information related to the
configured MyKey(s)
MyKey StatusMyKey
Follow onscreen directions to confirm
or modify your settings.
Create MyKey
Select Your Setting911 Assist
Do Not Disturb
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter
119
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Settings
Follow onscreen directions to confirm
or modify your settings.
Clear MyKeys
Select Your
Setting
Distance UnitDisplay
Setup
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages display or are available. The
information display could abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.
E184451
Press the OK button on the steering wheel
to remove the warning. The information
display removes other messages after a
short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
ActionMessage
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Active Park Fault
120
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
237).
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot func-
tion properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
237).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
237).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
You select normal cruise control. The system does not brake
or react to traffic.
Normal Cruise Active
Adaptive Braking Off
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging.
Front Sensor Not Aligned
The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap
distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower
gear.
Adaptive Cruise Shift
Down
121
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Adaptive Steering
ActionMessage
The adaptive steering system detects a difference between
steering wheel angle and the desired road wheel angle. The
steering wheel adjusts itself to correct this difference. This
adjustment is part of normal system operation.
Adaptive Steering Initial-
ization
The adaptive steering system is off. It is possible that the
steering wheel could not be straight when the vehicle is driving
straight ahead. If this message persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Adaptive Steering Fault
Service Required
The adaptive steering system integrity cannot be verified. Do
not drive the vehicle and contact an authorized dealer
immediately.
Adaptive Steering Loss
Do Not Drive
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control
ActionMessage
The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
off.
AdvanceTrac Off
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
on.
AdvanceTrac On
The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switched
it on.
AdvanceTrac SPORT
MODE
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off. See Using Traction Control (page 221).
Traction Control Off
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on. See Using Traction Control (page 221).
Traction Control On
122
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Airbag
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a
blocked sensor.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Alarm and Security
ActionMessage
Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 75).
Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
The engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off In
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off For Fuel
Economy
The engine is getting ready to shut off. Follow the prompt
from the message to override the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to
Override
123
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system detects an extended low-
voltage condition. Your vehicle disables various features to
help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled features operate
again as normal.
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off
The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message clears once you
restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads allows
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save
Battery
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 248).
Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 248).
Vehicle Coming From X
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 248).
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
124
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The system automatically turns off and displays this message
when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 248).
Cross Traffic Alert Deac-
tivated Trailer Attached
The system automatically turns off and displays this message
when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 248).
Blind Spot Alert Deactiv-
ated Trailer Attached
Displays when the trailer connected is a fifth wheel or goose-
neck, or when the trailer width is wider than 10 ft (2.7 m) or
longer than 33 ft (10 m).
Trailer Blind Spot Not
available Due to Invalid
Trailer
Diesel Messages
WARNING: When the Exhaust
Filter Cleaning message appears in the
information display, do not park near
flammable materials, vapors or
structures until filter cleaning is
complete.
ActionMessage
Your vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine
actions raises the exhaust temperature in the Diesel Particu-
late Filter system to burn off the particles (exhaust soot).
After the vehicle burns the particles off, the exhaust temper-
ature returns to normal levels. This message is NORMAL.
Exhaust Filter Cleaning
The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot)
and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows
normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h)
until the message turns off.
Exhaust Filter Over-
loaded Drive to Clean
Exhaust Filter Over-
loaded Clean Now
The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot)
and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows
normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h)
until the message turns off.
Exhaust Filter at Limit
Clean Now
Exhaust Filter at Limit
Drive to Clean Now
125
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Your vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeded the
intended operating range. If this warning occurs, a tone
sounds, followed by reduced engine power. The engine shuts
down when your vehicle speed is below 3 mph (5 km/h) . Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely possible. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Exhaust System Over-
heated Stop Safely
NOW
In extremely cold weather, typically below -15°F (-26°C) and
if the engine block heater is not utilized, your engine will not
respond to accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds. This
restriction allows your engine to properly circulate the oil to
avoid engine damage.
Engine Warming Please
Wait {seconds:00} sec
Your diesel particulate filter is clean.Exhaust Filter Drive
Complete
Your diesel particulate filter is clean (OCR Only).Exhaust Filter Cleaned
The manual regeneration process has stopped (OCR Only).Exhaust Filter Cleaning
Stopped
The distance you can travel before depleting the remaining
diesel exhaust fluid.
DEF Level Range: XX mi/
km Refill Now
Your diesel exhaust fluid is nearing empty. Your vehicle’s top
speed will become limited in the displayed distance. You must
replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation
of your vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System
(page 191).
DEF Level Empty Speed
Limited to XX MPH / km/
h in XX mi/km
Your remaining diesel exhaust fluid has depleted. Upon restart,
your vehicle speed is now limited. You must replenish the
diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your
vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page
191).
DEF Level Empty Speed
Limited to XX MPH/km/
h Upon Restart
The diesel exhaust fluid is empty. You must replenish the
diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your
vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page
191).
DEF Level Empty Speed
Limited to XX MPH/km/
h
The selective catalytic reduction system detects low exhaust
fluid. The engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode.
You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal
operation of your vehicle. See Selective Catalytic
Reductant System (page 191).
DEF Level Empty Engine
Idled Soon
126
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
ActionMessage
A problem exists with the selective catalytic reduction system
causing your vehicle into an idle-only mode. If the exhaust
fluid is empty, you must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to
resume normal operation of your vehicle. See Selective
Catalytic Reductant System (page 191).
DEF Level Empty Engine
Idled See Manual
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
system displays your vehicle’s top speed limit and distance
before limitation. Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
DEF Fault Speed Limited
to XX MPH/km/h in XX
mi/km
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. Upon
restart, your vehicle speed is now limited. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
DEF Fault Speed Limited
to XX MPH/km/h Upon
Restart
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
system displays your vehicle’s top speed limit. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
DEF Fault Speed Limited
to XX MPH/km/h
You must have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
Ignoring the warning message could lead to reduced drivability
and customer expense, including damage to the diesel
particulate filter. Your new vehicle warranty could not cover
this damage.
Exhaust Filter Over Limit
Service Now
The water separator has reached a predetermined capacity
and needs draining. See Draining the Fuel Filter Water
Trap (page 350).
Water in Fuel Drain Filter
A low fuel pressure condition has occurred due to cold, low
fuel level or fuel filters need to be changed. See Fuel Quality
(page 181).
Fuel Pressure Low
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door(s) listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
127
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Now
Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Suggested
Drivetrain
ActionMessage
The electronic locking differential requests that you slow to
a certain speed to engage.
To Engage Locking
Differential Slow to XX
mph/km/h
The electronic locking differential requests that you release
the accelerator in order to engage.
To Engage Locking
Differential Release
Accelerator Pedal
An electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault is
present. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Locking Differen-
tial
The transfer case is in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is safe to tow with all four wheels
on the ground.
Neutral Tow Enabled
Leave Transmission in
Neutral
The transfer case is NOT in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is NOT safe to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Disabled
Engine
ActionMessage
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high
engine temperature.
Power Reduced to Lower Engine
Temp
128
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet could not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Keys and Remote Controls
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.To START Press Brake
The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless
Starting (page 169).
No Key Detected
You pressed the StartStop button to switch off the engine
and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key
inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.Full Accessory Power
Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key
to the system.
Key Program Successful
You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the
system.
Key Program Failure
You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
system.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
You have not programmed enough keys to the system.Not Enough Keys
Learned
Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine
is on.
Engine ON
129
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required
The system detects a condition that has caused the system
to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Tempor-
arily Not Available
The system detects a condition that requires you to clean the
windshield in order for it to operate properly.
Front Camera Low Visib-
ility Clean Screen
The system malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc-
tion Service Required
The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering
wheel.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left is at 0%.Oil Change Required
The brake fluid level is low, inspect the brake system immedi-
ately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 366).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This could
not allow some features to operate properly. See an author-
ized dealer.
Transport / Factory
Mode Contact Dealer
The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
130
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
You did not program a MyKey.MyKey not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive
Safely
When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
that the MyKey speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
speed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed of
MyKey Setting
You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.Check Speed Drive
Safely
Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On -
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On -
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannot
be Deactivated
With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.Lane Keeping Alert On
MyKey Setting
Off Road
ActionMessage
Hill descent control mode is active.Hill Descent Control Active
Hill descent control mode is inactive.Hill Descent Control OFF
Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode
entry has not been met.
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed
XX MPH/km/h or Less
You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent
mode.
For Hill Descent Select Gear
131
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must
resume control.
Hill Descent Driver Resume
Control
A hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent Control Fault
The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.Hill Descent Control Off System
Cooling
The hill descent control system is ready.Hill Descent Control Ready
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page 228).
Check Front Park Aid
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page 228).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Park Brake
ActionMessage
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is
attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.
To Release: Press Brake
and Switch
The electric park brake is set and an automatic release is
attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual
release.
Park Brake Use Switch
to Release
The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds
3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving.
Release Park Brake
The electric park brake is not fully applied.Park Brake Not Applied
The electric park brake is not fully released.Park Brake Not Released
132
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The electric park brake system has been put into a special
mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Maintenance
Mode
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. Some functionality could still be available.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited
Function Service
Required
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction
Service Now
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system detects a condition that requires
service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop
Safely
The power steering system detects a condition within the
power steering system or passive entry or passive start system
requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
The steering lock system detects a condition that requires
service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Lock Malfunc-
tion Service Now
Pre-Collision Assist
ActionMessage
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve.
Pre-Collision Assist Not
Available Sensor
Blocked
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not
Available
133
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Remote Start
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button
to drive your vehicle after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake
and Gear Shift Button
Seats
ActionMessage
A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall Not
Permitted While Driving
Shows where you have saved your memory setting.Memory {0} Saved
Starting System
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .To START Press Brake
The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to
start your vehicle.
Cranking Time Exceeded
The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.Engine Start Pending
Please Wait
The system has cancelled the pending start.Pending Start Cancelled
Tailgate
ActionMessage
The tailgate is not completely closed.Tailgate Ajar
134
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 409).
Tire Pressure Low
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 409).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in
use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 409). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Trail Control (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
You must reduce your vehicle speed to use trail control.Reduce Speed To Enter Trail
Control
You must release the park brake to use trail control.Trail Control Not Available with
Park Brake Applied
You successfully enabled trail control and must press
SET to activate.
Trail Control Enabled Use SET
Button to Set Speed
A trail control system fault has occurred, the driver
must resume control.
Trail Control Off Driver Resume
Control
The system has switched off.Trail Control Off
A system fault is present.Trail Control Fault See Manual
You must switch the cruise control off to use trail
control.
Trail Control Not Available with
Cruise Control Active
You must close the door to use trail control.Trail Control Not Available with
Driver Door Open
You switched descent control off, causing the system
to turn trail control propulsion off. The vehicle still
brakes if descending a hill. You must press the trail
control switch to reset the system and switch it off.
You can press the switch again to switch this system
on.
Descent Control Now Active
Press Trail Control Switch To
Exit
135
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when you must switch off the trailer backup
assist to use trail control.
Trail Control Not Available
While Pro Trailer Backup
Assist™ Active
Displays when the system detects that you could be
stuck in sand and turns trail control on to the lowest
set speed.
Set Trail Control to 1 MPH to Aid
in Getting Unstuck in Sand
Set Trail Control to 2 km/h to
Aid in Getting Unstuck in Sand
Trailer
ActionMessage
The current gain setting for the trailer brake.Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain
value:#0.0}
The current gain setting for the trailer brake when you
do not have a trailer connected.
Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain
value:#0.0} No Trailer
Faults sensed in the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
Module followed by a single chime. See Towing a
Trailer (page 272).
Trailer Brake Module Fault
The system detects a correct trailer connection during
a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Connected
The system senses a trailer connection becomes
disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally,
during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected
The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer
wiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 272).
Trailer Wiring Fault
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing
a Trailer (page 272).
Trailer Battery Not Charging See
Manual
There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module.
See Towing a Trailer (page 272).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault
See Manual
136
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified
tire pressure.
Trailer Tire Low Specified:
A trailer tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is
malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact an authorized dealer.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Capability Not Detected
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 409).
Trailer Tire Pressure Indication
Not Setup See Manual
4WD
ActionMessage
A 4X4 system fault is present. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Check 4x4
The 4X4 system is making a shift.4x4 Shift in Progress
Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and
you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).
For 4x4 LOW Shift to N
Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and
your vehicle's speed is too fast.
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 5 km/h
Displays when you attempt to switch out of 4X4 LOW
and you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N)
To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N
Displays when you attempt to switch out of 4X4 LOW
and your vehicle's speed is too fast.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 5
km/h
Could display when there is a Transfer case gear tooth
blockage while shifting to or from 4L or to the neutral
state.
Shift Delayed Pull Forward
Displays when the system requires an additional
transmission shift to neutral (N) to complete a transfer
case shift.
Shift to Neutral
137
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when you command a 4x4 shift during
conditions which are potentially harmful to the drive-
line components.
To Engage 4x4 Slow to 3 MPH
To Engage 4x4 Slow to 5 km/h
Displays when the 4x4 system requests you release
the accelerator pedal to complete a 4x4 shift. See
Using Four-Wheel Drive (page 207).
To Engage 4x4 Release Acceler-
ator Pedal
Displays when you command a drive mode change to
Deep Snow/Sand and the vehicle is in 2H.
For Improved Performance 4x4
Recommended
Displays when you attempt to switch out of 4x4 LOW
and Rock Crawl mode is engaged.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Exit Rock
Crawl Mode
Displays when you attempt to select Rock Crawl mode
and 4x4 LOW is not engaged.
To Enter Rock Crawl Mode 4x4
LOW is Required
138
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
E291393
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Directing the Airflow
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the windshield
air vents and de-mister.
E244097
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the instrument
panel air vents.
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the footwell air
vents.
You can direct air through any combination
of these air vents.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
E265389
Turn the control to adjust the volume of
air circulated in the vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
E244106
Turn the control to set the temperature.
Switching the Air Conditioning On
and Off
Press and release the button.
139
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
Use air conditioning with recirculated air
to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions, for example,
maximum defrost, the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On
and Off
Press and release the button.
Switching Maximum Air
Conditioning On and Off
Turn the temperature control
counterclockwise to the lowest
setting for maximum cooling.
Switching Maximum Defrost On
and Off
Turn the temperature control
clockwise to the highest setting
for maximum defrosting.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off
Press and release the button to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may
reduce the time needed to cool the interior,
when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or
prevent you from switching it on, in all air
flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the
risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn
on and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather in order
to improve cooling efficiency.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
E291388
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Directing the Airflow
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the windshield
air vents and de-mister.
E244097
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the instrument
panel air vents.
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the footwell air
vents.
You can direct air through any combination
of these air vents.
140
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Press and release + or - to adjust
the volume of air circulated in
the vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
E265862
Turn the control on the left-hand side of
the climate control to set the left-hand
temperature.
Note: This control also sets the right-hand
side temperature when you switch off dual
zone mode.
Turn the control on the right-hand side of
the climate control to set the right-hand
temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press and release the button to
switch on automatic operation,
then set the temperature.
The system adjusts the blower motor
speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and outside or recirculated air
to reach and maintain the temperature you
have set.
Switching the Air Conditioning On
and Off
Press and release the button.
Use air conditioning with recirculated air
to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions, for example,
maximum defrost, the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On
and Off
Press and release the button.
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and
Off
E265280
Press and release the button to
switch on temperature control
for the right-hand side of the
vehicle.
Switching Maximum Air
Conditioning On and Off
Press and release the button for
maximum cooling.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set
to LO, recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning
turns on and the blower motor adjusts to
the highest speed.
Switching Maximum Defrost On
and Off
Press and release the button for
maximum defrosting.
141
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
The left-hand and right-hand settings set
to HI, air flows through the windshield air
vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window also turns
on when you select maximum defrost.
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off
Press and release the button to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may
reduce the time needed to cool the interior,
when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or
prevent you from switching it on, in all air
flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the
risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn
on and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather in order
to improve cooling efficiency.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE -
VEHICLES WITH: AUTOMATIC
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. Automatic mode is best
recommended to maintain set temperature.
Note: The system adjusts to heat or cool
the interior to the temperature you select
as quickly as possible.
Note: For the system to function efficiently,
the instrument panel and side air vents
should be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold
outside temperatures, the system directs
air flow to the windshield and side window
air vents. In addition, the blower motor may
run at a slower speed until the engine warms
up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system uses recirculated air to
maximize interior cooling. Blower motor
speed may also reduce until the air cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer.
142
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for
Heating
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Press and release MAX A/C.
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
Defogging the Side Windows in
Cold Weather
1. Press and release defrost or maximum
defrost.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE -
VEHICLES WITH: MANUAL
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
highest speed setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
highest setting.
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
Recommended Settings for
Heating
1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
center setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Select MAX A/C.
2. Drive with the windows open for a short
period of time.
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
center setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
143
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
3. Direct air to the instrument panel air
vents.
Vehicle Stationary for Extended
Periods During Extreme High
Ambient Temperatures
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Place your vehicle in park (P) or
neutral.
3. Select MAX A/C.
4. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
lowest speed setting.
Defogging the Side Windows in
Cold Weather
1. Direct air to the instrument panel and
windshield air vents.
2. Press and release A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to the
setting you prefer.
4. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
highest setting.
5. Direct air toward the side windows.
6. Close the instrument panel air vents.
HEATED WINDSHIELD (IF
EQUIPPED)
Windshield Wiper De-Icer
E184884
When you switch the heated rear
window on, the windshield wiper
de-icer turns on.
HEATED REAR WINDOW (IF
EQUIPPED)
E184884
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window. The vehicle warranty may not
cover damage to the heated rear window
grid lines.
HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS
(IF EQUIPPED)
Press the button to clear the
exterior mirrors of thin ice and
fog. Press the button again to
switch them off. They switch off after a
short period of time.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place. These actions
could cause damage to the glass and
mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
REMOTE START (IF EQUIPPED)
You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings in the information
display.
The system adjusts the interior
temperature depending on your chosen
settings during remote start.
You cannot adjust the climate control
setting during remote start operation. The
information display and the indicators do
not turn on during remote start. When you
switch the ignition on, the climate control
system returns to the previous settings.
You can now make adjustments.
You need to switch on certain
vehicle-dependent features, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
144
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high,
if available, and AUTO is on in the
information display.
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools, based on pre-selected
settings. The rear defroster, heated mirrors
and heated or cooled seats do not turn on.
In cold weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high,
if available, and AUTO is on in the
information display. The heated rear
window and heated mirrors turn on.
145
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
WHAT IS THE CABIN AIR
FILTER
The cabin air filter improves the quality of
air in your vehicle by trapping dust, pollen
and other particles.
LOCATING THE CABIN AIR
FILTER
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
REPLACING THE CABIN AIR
FILTER
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 553).
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Note: Using an aftermarket cabin air filter
could reduce cabin air filtration and climate
control performance.
146
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Interior Air Quality
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat
backrest too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in personal injury in the event
of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the top of the seat backrest.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death in the
event of a sudden stop or crash.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest so that
your torso is more than 30 degrees
from the upright position.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do
not adjust the head restraint when your
vehicle is moving.
147
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seats
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it
should be installed and properly
adjusted when the seat is occupied.
Failure to adjust the head restraint
properly could reduce its effectiveness
during certain impacts.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front Seat Head Restraint
E138642
Rear Seat Outermost Head Restraints
E153105
The head restraints may consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold buttons C and D.
2. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Front Row Center and Rear Seat Center
(Crew Cab) Head Restraints
Your vehicle may have head restraints that
are non-adjustable. The non-adjustable
head restraints consist of:
148
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seats
E162872
A
C
B
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold buttons C.
2. Pull up the head restraint.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Front Seat Center Head Restraint
Your vehicle may have a front row center
head restraint that you cannot adjust or
remove.
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort.
E144727
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head
restraint backward after you tilt it. Instead,
continue tilting it forward until the head
restraint releases to the upright position.
MANUAL SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not adjust the
driver's seat or seatback when your
vehicle is moving.
149
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seats
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
E175314
Recline Adjustment
E175315
Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)
E166702
The lumbar support control is located on
the outboard side of the seat. Turn the
control to adjust your support.
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
150
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seats
E176038
Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If
Equipped)
E176039
Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front
Seats With Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. When the seat backrest and
cushion are both active, the massage
alternates between zones.
151
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seats
E156301
Lumbar and Bolster ModeMassage Mode
Upper lumbarBack massage intensity
adjustment
A
Lumbar decreaseMassage intensity decrease
and off
*
B
Lower lumbar
**
Cushion massage intensity
adjustment
C
Lumbar increaseMassage intensity increaseD
-On and offE
*
The massage feature defaults to an
alternating massage mode with back
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar
and bolster feature defaults to the middle
lumbar mode.
**
Press C a second time to adjust the back
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the
cushion bolster.
You can also adjust this feature through
the touchscreen. When switched on, the
system displays directions for you to adjust
the lumbar settings in your seat or to set
the massage function.
To access and make adjustments to the
lumbar setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
> Multi-Contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity.
To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
>Multi-Contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press Off, Low or High.
152
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seats
MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Before activating the
memory seat, make sure that the area
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants
are clear of moving parts.
WARNING: Do not use the memory
function when your vehicle is moving.
This feature recalls the position of the
following:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Optional power steering column.
• Optional power adjustable pedals.
The memory control is on the driver door.
E307868
Saving a Preset Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the features to the positions you
prefer.
3. Press and hold the preset button until
you hear a single tone.
Note: A confirmation that you saved a
memory preset appears in the information
display.
Note: You can save up to three preset
memory positions.
Note: You can save a memory preset at any
time.
Recalling a Preset Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press and release the preset button
associated with your preferred driving
position. The seat and mirrors move to
the position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall preset memory
positions when you switch the ignition off,
or when the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N) if you switch the ignition on.
You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
remote control if it is linked to a preset
position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked keyfob is present.
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat and steering column to the
easy entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
control - power seat, mirror (or any memory
button) during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the positions you prefer.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
will sound, and the instrument panel
prompts you to press the lock button
on your key fob.
153
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seats
3. Within ten seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking. The instrument panel indicates
a successful link.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If
Equipped)
If you enable the easy entry and exit
feature, it moves the driver seat rearward
up to 2 in (5 cm) when you put the
transmission in park (P) and remove the
key from the ignition.
The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you put the key in the
ignition.
You can enable or disable this feature
through the information display. See
Information Displays (page 109).
REAR SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion
If your vehicle has a 60/40 rear seat, you
can flip each cushion up into a vertical
storage position.
E310192
E310192
Rotate the seat cushion up until it locks
into the vertical storage position.
Cushion Lock (If Equipped)
The locking key is in the remote control.
See Remote Control (page 53).
E224956
Turn the key to lock or unlock.
154
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seats
Returning the Seat to the Seating
Position
WARNING: Check under the seat
cushion to make sure no cargo or objects
are under the seat cushion before
returning the seat cushion to its original
position, and that the seat cushion locks
into place. Failure to do so may prevent
the seat from operating properly in the
event of a crash, which could increase
the risk of serious injury.
E308139
Pull the strap to release the seat cushion
from the storage position.
Rear Under Seat Storage (If Equipped)
The rear seat has storage space under the
seat cushion.
E162739
A
Lift the lever and flip up the seat cushion
to access the storage space and the power
point (A).
E162740
To remove the storage space divider,
squeeze the sides and lift it from the
storage tub.
E162741
155
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seats
Use your vehicle key to lock the storage
space. See Keys and Remote Controls
(page 53).
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: People who are unable
to feel pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when
using the heated seat. The heated seat
may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything
on the seat that insulates against heat,
such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the heated seat to overheat. Do
not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may
damage the heating element which may
cause the heated seat to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Note: The heated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The heated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.
Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING: People who are unable
to feel pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when
using the heated seat. The heated seat
may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything
on the seat that insulates against heat,
such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the heated seat to overheat. Do
not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may
damage the heating element which may
cause the heated seat to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.
The rear seat heat controls are on the rear
of the center console.
156
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seats
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is in
the on position, press the heated seat
switch to enable heating mode. When
activated, they turn off automatically when
you switch off the engine.
VENTILATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The ventilated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The ventilated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.
Do not do the following:
• Spill liquid on the front seats. This may
cause the air vent holes to become
blocked and not work properly.
• Place cargo or objects under the seats.
They may block the air intake causing
the air vents to not work properly.
The engine must be running to use this
feature.
E224689
Press this symbol to cycle through the
various ventilation settings and off. More
indicator lights indicate higher fan speeds.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the ventilated seats are on, the feature
turns itself off. You need to reactivate it.
Note: To improve comfort, use the
ventilated seats along with the vehicle’s air
conditioning system.
157
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Seats
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNING: Do not use the system
with any garage door opener that does
not have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal
Safety Standards (this includes any
garage door opener manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door
opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door opener
without these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
E188211
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. You can program garage doors as
well as entry gate operators, security
systems, entry door locks and home or
office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your in-vehicle
HomeLink function button with your
hand-held transmitter.
Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This allows for quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
158
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E188212
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, switch your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release the function button
that you would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1– 3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
4. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button you want to
program while watching the indicator
light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. Your device
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed and released.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press
and hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence up to
three times to complete the programming
process. If your device still does not
operate, you must program your garage
door. See Programming Your Garage
Door Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
159
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E188212
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and release, every two seconds,
your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink indicator light changes to a
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E188213
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the
indicator light above the buttons
flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator light flashes,
release the buttons. You erased the
codes for all buttons.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
160
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
The term “IC:” before the
certification/registration number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
161
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
12 V DC Power Point
WARNING: Do not plug optional
electrical accessories into the cigar
lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty, and can result
in fire or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 V appliances
with a maximum current rating of 20 A20
amps.
Note: Do not plug in any device that
supplies power to the vehicle through the
power points, this may result in damage to
vehicle systems.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 V DC 240 W or a fuse
may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow
the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the engine is off.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
110 V 400 Watt AC Power Point (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt
AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design. Doing so may
cause the power point to overload due
to powering multiple devices that can
reach beyond the 400 watt load limit
and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: This feature works only when you
have the ignition switched on.
Note: This feature has a maximum output
of 400 watts when the vehicle is in park (P).
Note: While in drive (D), the maximum
outlet output is 300 watts.
Note: When powering electric devices that
require more than 10 watts in vehicles
equipped with keyless start, the engine must
remain running. If the engine is turned off or
you switch the ignition to accessory mode,
plugged in devices will not be charged.
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 400 watts. It is
on the instrument panel, and the rear of
the center console.
E191617
162
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 400 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
You can use the 400 watt power outlet for
these types of electric devices:
• Electric hand drills.
• Rechargeable power tools.
• Video games.
• Laptops.
• Televisions.
Note: Max 400W - when the vehicle is
parked and 300W - when the vehicle is
driving.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
Locations
Note: Timed power points remain on for 30
minutes if the vehicle is in accessory mode.
If you switch the vehicle off, the timed
power points remain on for 75 minutes.
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the seat bin.
WIRELESS ACCESSORY
CHARGER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Wireless charging
devices can affect the operation of
implanted medical devices, including
cardiac pacemakers. If you have any
implanted medical devices, we
recommend that you consult with your
physician.
Tests on this equipment show that it
complies with part 18 of the FCC Rules.
• This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and
may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. There is no
guarantee that the interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television
reception, please consult the dealer.
• This product is not end-user
serviceable.
163
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Auxiliary Power Points
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to:
• This device may not cause interference.
• This device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Note: The charging performance may be
affected if your device is in a case. It may be
necessary to remove the case to wirelessly
charge your device.
The system supports one Qi wireless
charging compatible device on the
charging area.
Keep the charging area clean and remove
foreign objects prior to charging a device.
Do not place items with a magnetic strip,
for example passports, parking tickets or
credit cards, near the charging area when
charging a device. Damage may occur to
the magnetic strip.
Do not place metal objects, for example
remote controls, coins and candy
wrappers, on or near the charging area
when charging a device. Metal objects may
heat up and degrade the charging
performance.
Note: The rate of charge, or charging power,
is controlled by the device. During charging,
the device and the charger may heat up, this
is normal. If the battery gets hotter than
usual, the charger may stop charging.
E297549
The charging area is on the
center console or lower
instrument panel. See Center
Console (page 165).
You can charge a device if the vehicle is
on, when in accessory mode, or anytime
SYNC is on.
To begin charging, place the device on the
center of the charging surface with the
charging side down. The charging stops
after your device reaches a full charge.
Note: If the system detects a foreign object
or if the device is misaligned on the charging
area, a message appears in the display.
Note: Software and firmware updates may
affect device compatibility, including the
use of unofficial software or firmware. You
should verify charging functionality with your
specific devices when in your vehicle.
DescriptionBehaviorMessage
This message appears when
wireless charging begins.
Message on screen display
or pop-up window.
Wireless Charger Active
The system stops charging
your device if the system
detects the phone is
misaligned, or a foreign
metal object is on the char-
ging surface.
Pop-up window.
Phone misaligned or object
between phone and charger
detected. Correct the condi-
tion to resume charging.
164
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E250516
Storage compartment.A
Front storage compartment with
USB ports.
B
Sliding cup holder.C
Center storage compartment
with auxiliary power point.
D
Rear cup holders.E
Auxiliary power point.F
Heated rear seats.G
AC power point.H
USB charging ports.I
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF
EQUIPPED)
E224959
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
UNDER SEAT STORAGE (IF
EQUIPPED)
Front Under Seat Storage
Compartment - Vehicles Without
Locking Storage
E306120
Lift the latch to open the lid and access to
the storage compartment under the center
seat cushion.
165
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Storage Compartments
Front Under Seat Storage
Compartment - Vehicles With
Locking Storage
E224738
1. Use the key in the remote control to
unlock. See Remote Control (page
53).
E223578
2. Press the latch to release the cushion.
3. Lift the cushion to access the storage
compartment.
Rear Under Seat Storage (If Equipped)
E229819
1. Lift the rear seat to access the under
seat storage bin.
E235007
166
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Storage Compartments
2. Lift the front and side panels to expand
and lock them in place.
E235008
3. Lock the panels in an open position.
E235009
4. To collapse, release the lever, push
down to the stowed position and fold
in the side and front panels.
Note: Make sure the storage divider is not
locked into place when collapsing. Push the
button to release the divider door and swing
it to the stowed position on the front wall.
167
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic.
Always open the garage door before you
start the engine.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5.0 mi
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow
storm or blowing snow conditions, the
engine air induction may become partially
clogged with snow and ice. If this occurs,
the engine may experience a significant
reduction in power output. At the earliest
opportunity, clear all the snow and ice
away from the air induction inlet.
IGNITION SWITCH
E252522
0
/
/
/
/
/
/
0 (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
168
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
III (start) - Cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
E144447
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the clutch pedal for
manual transmissions, or brake pedal
for automatic transmissions, press and
release the button once when the
ignition is in the on mode, or when the
engine is running but the vehicle is not
moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
• Without applying the clutch pedal for
manual transmissions, or brake pedal
for automatic transmissions, press and
release the button once.
Start: Starts the vehicle.
• Press the clutch pedal for manual
transmissions, or brake pedal for
automatic transmissions, and then
press the button for any length of time.
An indicator light on the button
illuminates when then ignition is on and
when the engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE - 6.2L/7.3L
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine.
If the engine idle speed does not slow
down, see an authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants fasten their
seat belt.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
• Turn the ignition key to the on position.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start your vehicle.
3. When the engine starts, release the key
and then gradually release the brake
pedal as the engine speed increases.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
169
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
2. Turn the key to position III to start the
engine.
3. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10
seconds as starter damage may occur. If
the engine does not start, switch the
ignition off and wait 30 seconds before
trying again.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: If you press the push button ignition
switch again prior to the engine starting, the
ignition switches to accessory mode and
will not start.
Note: If you release the brake pedal before
the engine starts, follow the engine start
sequence again.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the center of the push button
ignition switch.
3. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
2. Apply the parking brake.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the
engine when your vehicle is still moving
results in a significant decrease in
braking assistance. Higher effort is
required to apply the brakes and to stop
your vehicle. A significant decrease in
steering assistance could also occur. The
steering does not lock, but higher effort
could be required to steer your vehicle.
When you switch the ignition off, some
electrical circuits, for example airbags,
also turn off. If you unintentionally switch
the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and
restart the engine.
1. Put the transmission into neutral (N)
and use the brakes to bring your vehicle
to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
If your vehicle has a keyless ignition, it has
a feature that shuts down the engine if it
has been idling for an extended period of
time. The ignition also turns off in order to
save battery power. Before the engine
shuts down, a message appears in the
information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, the engine
shuts down. Another message appears in
the information display to inform you that
the engine has shut down in order to save
fuel. Start your vehicle as you normally do.
170
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Cold Weather Starting (Flexible
Fuel Vehicles Only)
The starting characteristics of all grades
of E85 ethanol make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below
0°F (-18°C). Consult your fuel distributor
for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches
freezing, ethanol fuel distributors should
supply winter grade ethanol, the same as
with unleaded gasoline.
If summer grade ethanol is used in cold
weather conditions, 0°F (-18°C), you may
experience increased cranking times, rough
idle or hesitation until the engine has
warmed up.
You may experience a decrease in
performance when the engine is cold when
operating on E85 ethanol.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in
the air intake system. Such fluid could
cause immediate explosive damage to the
engine and possible personal injury.
If you should experience cold weather
starting problems on E85 ethanol, and
neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol
nor an engine block heater is available, the
addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank
improves cold starting performance. Your
vehicle is designed to operate on E85
ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or
any mixture of the two.
If the Engine Fails to Start Using the
Preceding Instructions (Flexible Fuel
Vehicles Only)
1. Press the accelerator pedal down
one-third to one-half of its travel, and
then crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the
key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speed
increases. If the engine still does not
start, repeat Step 1.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods of time, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in
(2.5 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE -
6.7L DIESEL
Read all starting instructions carefully
before you start your vehicle.
For temperatures below 32°F (0°C), the
use of the correct grade engine oil is
essential for proper operation. Refer to
engine oil specifications for more
information. See Engine Block Heater
(page 176).
Your vehicle may have a cold weather
starting strategy that prevents severe
engine damage by assisting in engine
lubrication warm-up. In extremely cold
ambient temperatures, this strategy
activates and prevents the accelerator
pedal from being used for 30 seconds after
you start your vehicle. A message appears
in the information display as your vehicle
warms up. By not allowing the accelerator
pedal to be used, the engine oil is allowed
to properly lubricate the bearings
171
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
preventing engine damage due to lack of
proper lubrication. After the 30 second
warm-up period, the accelerator pedal
becomes operational again and a message
appears informing you the vehicle is ok to
drive.
When you start the engine in extremely
cold temperatures -15°F (-26°C), we
recommend that you allow the engine to
idle for several minutes before you drive
the vehicle.
Before starting the engine check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants fasten their
seatbelt.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
Note: Do not press the accelerator during
starting.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to position II
Note: A message appears: Engine Start
Pending, Please Wait.
3. Wait until the engine glow-plug
indicator turns off.
4. Turn the key to position III to start the
engine.
5. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10
seconds as starter damage may occur. If
the engine does not start, switch the
ignition off and wait 30 seconds before
trying again.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: If the push button ignition switch is
pressed again prior to the engine starting,
the ignition switches to accessory mode and
does not start.
Note: If you release the brake pedal before
the engine starts, follow the engine start
sequence again.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the center of the push button
ignition switch.
Note: A message appears: Engine Start
Pending, Please Wait.
3. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal.
Diesel Engine Fast Start Glow Plug
System
The diesel engine glow system consists of:
• Eight glow plugs, one per cylinder.
• Glow Plug Control Module.
• Engine Coolant Temperature sensor.
• Barometric pressure sensor.
• Environmental temperature sensor.
The powertrain and glow plug control
modules electronically control the glow
plug system. After you switch the ignition
on, the glow plug control module
immediately energizes the glow plugs. The
glow plug control module uses the engine
coolant temperature, barometric pressure
sensor and environmental temperature
sensor to determine how long the glow
plugs stay energized. The required time for
the glow plugs to be energized decreases
as the coolant temperature, barometric
pressure and environmental temperature
increase.
172
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Automatic Engine Shutdown
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling
for an extended period. The ignition also
turns off in order to save battery power.
Before the engine shuts down, a message
appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down from 30 seconds.
If you do not intervene within 30 seconds,
the engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that the engine has shut down
in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as
you normally do.
Cold Weather Starting
WARNING: Do not use starting
fluid, for example ether, in the air intake
system. Such fluid could cause
immediate explosive damage to the
engine and possible personal injury.
WARNING: Do not mix diesel with
gasoline, gasohol or alcohol. This could
cause an explosion.
We recommend that the engine block
heater be used for starting when the
temperature is -9°F (-23°C) or colder. See
Engine Block Heater (page 176).
When operating in cold weather, you may
use Motorcraft® cetane improvers or
non-alcohol-based cetane improvers from
a reputable manufacturer as needed.
Switch the ignition on. Do not
start the engine until the
glow-plug indicator turns off.
When the glow plug pre-heat indicator
turns off, turn the key to start. After you
start the engine, the glow plugs may
remain on for a period. If you do not start
the engine before the glow plug activation
time ends, you need to reset the glow plugs
by switching the ignition off. After the
engine starts, allow it to idle for about 15
seconds. This protects the engine. Do not
increase engine speed until the oil pressure
gauge indicates normal pressure.
Cold Weather Operation
Note: Idling in cold weather does not heat
the engine to its normal operating
temperature. Long periods of idling,
especially in cold weather, can cause a
buildup of deposits which can cause engine
damage.
Change to a lighter grade engine oil to
make starting easier under these
conditions. Refer to engine oil
specifications. See Engine Block Heater
(page 176).
Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold
temperatures. Diesel fuel which has not
been properly formulated for the ambient
conditions may gel which can clog the fuel
filters. One indication that the fuel filter(s)
may be clogged is if the engine starts, stalls
after a short time, and then does not
restart. If you have been using biodiesel,
you may need to use a fuel with lower
biodiesel content, try another brand, or
discontinue using biodiesel. Do not use
alcohol based additives to correct fuel
gelling. This may result in damage to the
fuel injectors and system. Use the proper
anti-gel and performance improvement
product. See Engine Block Heater (page
176).
173
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Your vehicle has a fuel and water separator
that recirculates fuel from the engine to
help prevent fuel filter clogging. To avoid
engine fuel starvation during cold weather
operation of 32°F (0°C) or below, we
recommend that the fuel level in your tank
should not drop below ¼ full. This helps
prevent air from entering the fuel system
and stalling the engine.
Your vehicle has a selective catalytic
reduction system that uses Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) to operate properly. You need
to replenish your vehicle’s DEF at certain
intervals. When filling your vehicle’s DEF
tank in cold weather, take special care to
prevent damage to the tank. See
Selective Catalytic Reductant System
(page 191).
In cold weather below 32°F (0°C), the
engine may slowly increase to a higher idle
speed if you leave it idling in park (P). As
the engine warms-up, the engine sound
level decreases due to the activation of
PCM-controlled sound reduction features.
If you operate your vehicle in a heavy
snowstorm or blowing snow conditions,
snow and ice can clog the engine air
induction. If this occurs, the engine may
experience a significant reduction in power
output. At the earliest opportunity, clear
all the snow and ice away from inside the
air filter assembly. Remove the air cleaner
cover and the air filter and remove any
snow or ice. Remove any debris, snow or
ice, on the foam filter by brushing the
surface with a soft brush. Once you have
cleared all of the debris, reinstall the air
filter and cover.
Do not use water, solvents, or a hard brush
for cleaning the foam filter.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
In order to operate the engine in
temperatures of 32°F (0°C) or lower, read
the following instructions:
• Make sure that the batteries are of
sufficient size and are fully charged.
Check other electrical components to
make sure they are in optimum
condition.
• Use the proper coolant solution at the
concentration recommended
protecting the engine against damage
from freezing.
• Try to keep the fuel tank full as much
as possible at the end of operation to
prevent condensation in the fuel
system.
• Make sure you use proper cold weather
engine oil and that it is at its proper
level. Also, if necessary, make sure to
follow the engine oil and filter change
schedule found under the Special
operating conditions section listed in
the scheduled maintenance
information.
• At temperatures of -9°F (-23°C) or
below, it is recommended that you use
an engine block heater to improve cold
engine starting.
• If operating in arctic temperatures of
-20°F (-29°C) or lower, consult your
truck dealer for information about
special cold weather equipment and
precautions.
174
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
We recommend the following cold
weather idling guidelines:
• You can use Motorcraft® cetane
improvers or non-alcohol-based
cetane improvers from a reputable
manufacturer as needed.
• Maintain the engine cooling system
properly.
• Avoid shutting the engine down after
an extensive idling period. Drive your
vehicle for several miles with the
engine at normal operating
temperatures under a moderate load.
• Consider using an engine block heater.
• For extended idle times use an
approved idle speed increase device.
Winter Operating Tips for Arctic
Operation -20°F (-29°C) and Below
The following information is a guideline
only and is not to be the only source of
possible solutions in resolving extreme
cold temperature issues.
Starting Aids
WARNING: Do not use starting
fluid, for example ether, in the air intake
system. Such fluid could cause
immediate explosive damage to the
engine and possible personal injury.
The use of the factory engine block heater
assists in engine starting in extreme cold
ambient temperatures See Engine Block
Heater (page 176).
Idle Control
Your vehicle may have a factory option for
a stationary elevated idle control through
the upfitter switches in the overhead
console. This allows the operator to
elevate the idle RPM for extended idle
periods, as well as aftermarket equipment
such as PTO operation. You must configure
this feature even if ordered from the
factory. See your authorized dealer for
required upfitting.
Operation in Snow and Rain
Vehicle operation in heavy snowfall or
extreme rain conditions may feed
excessive amounts of snow or water into
the air intake system. This could plug the
air filter with snow and may cause the
engine to lose power and possibly shut
down.
We recommend the following actions after
operating your vehicle up to 200 mi
(320 km) in snowfall or extreme rain:
• Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open
the hood and clear all the snow and ice
from the air filter housing inlet (do not
remove the foam filter) and reset the
air filter restriction gauge.
Note: Removal of the foam filter degrades
your vehicle performance during snow and
hot weather conditions.
• Extreme rain: The air filter dries after
about 15–30 minutes at highway
speeds. At the earliest opportunity,
open the hood and reset the air filter
restriction gauge.
Refer to Air filter and restriction gauge in
the Maintenance chapter for more
information. See Changing the Engine
Air Filter (page 347).
175
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Operation in Standing Water
Ingestion of water into the diesel engine
can result in immediate and severe
damage to the engine. If driving through
water, slow down to avoid splashing water
into the intake. If the engine stalls, and you
suspect ingestion of water into the engine,
do not try to restart the engine. Consult
your dealer for service immediately.
Your fuel tank vents to the atmosphere by
valves on top of the tank and through the
fuel cap. If water reaches the top of the
tank, the valves may pull water into the
fuel tank. Water in the fuel can cause
performance issues and damage the fuel
injection system.
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE
- 6.7L DIESEL
Switch the ignition off.
To help prolong engine life, we
recommended you allow the engine to idle
for three to five minutes, especially after
any of the following:
• Continuous engine speed.
• High ambient temperature.
• High GVW or GCW operation, for
example heavy loads or trailers.
This allows the turbo charged engine to
cool down.
ENGINE IDLE SHUTDOWN
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
engine idle shutdown system. This system
automatically shuts down your engine
when it has been idling in P (Park) or N
(Neutral) for five minutes (parking brake
set) or 15 minutes (parking brake not set).
When the engine idle shutdown process
has started:
• A chime sounds and the information
display will show ENGINE TURNS OFF
IN 30 (seconds) and start counting
down
• You can restart the five or 15-minute
timer by changing the position of the
accelerator pedal, brake pedal or the
park brake within the final 30 seconds
• When the timer reaches zero, the
engine shuts down and this message
will appear in your information display
ENGINE TURNED OFF
• One minute after the engine has shut
down, the electrical system simulates
key off, even though the ignition is still
in the on position, initiating normal
accessory delay period
• You must move the ignition to the off
position to reset the system before
restarting your vehicle.
The engine idle shutdown idle timer does
not start if:
• The engine is operating in power
take-off mode.
• The engine coolant temperature is
below 60°F (16°C).
• The exhaust emission control device is
regenerating.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
176
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
For cold climates that are below 0°F
(-18°C) needing a temporary battery
installation. Order the cold climate pack.
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
E308417
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Locate the block heater cord near the
center of the lower front fascia.
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
177
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can
cause serious injury or death if misused
or mishandled.
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
WARNING: Fuel may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing
agent.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors could cause
an adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, wash the affected areas
immediately with plenty of soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately
if you experience any adverse reactions.
178
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY - E85
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles
Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following
identifiers:
• Yellow fuel filler cap.
• Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet.
• Yellow fuel filler housing.
• Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler
door.
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or
regular unleaded gasoline blended with a
maximum of 85% ethanol (E85).
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 272).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
179
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline
We do not recommend repeatedly
alternating between E85 and gasoline. If
you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or
from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as
possible, at least half a tank. Drive your
vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi
(8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change
in ethanol concentration. If you use E85
exclusively, we recommend that you fill
the fuel tank with regular unleaded
gasoline at each scheduled oil change.
FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 272).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
180
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated
Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
Is Required (United
States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S.
Virgin Islands And Other Locales)
Note: Your warranty will not cover damage
caused by using an improper type of fuel or
fuel additive.
Note: Do not blend used engine oil with
diesel fuel under any circumstances.
Blending used oil with the fuel will
significantly increase your vehicle’ s exhaust
emissions and reduce engine life due to
increased internal wear.
We recommend Top Tier diesel fuel where
available to help minimize engine deposits
and maintain optimal vehicle and engine
performance. For additional information,
refer to www.toptiergas.com.
You should use Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel
fuel (also known as ULSD) designated as
number 1-D or 2-D with a maximum of
15-ppm sulfur in your diesel vehicle. You
may operate your vehicle on diesel fuels
containing up to 20% biodiesel, also
known as B20. These fuels should meet
the ASTM D975 diesel or the ASTM D7467
B6-B20 biodiesel industry specifications.
Outside of North America, use fuels
meeting EN590 or equivalent local market
standard.
Using low sulfur diesel fuel
(16-500 ppm) or high sulfur
diesel fuel (greater than 500
ppm) in your diesel engine will cause
certain emission components to
malfunction which may also cause the
service engine soon light to illuminate
indicating an emissions-related concern.
Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold
temperature. For best results at
temperatures below 19°F (-7°C), we
recommended using a diesel fuel which
has been seasonally adjusted for the
ambient conditions.
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated
Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
Is Not Required
For the engine to operate reliably on
low-sulfur or high-sulfur diesel fuel, the
engine must be a factory built high-sulfur
engine (available as a dealer order option
for select markets) or an ultra low sulfur
diesel fuel configured engine that has been
retrofitted for high-sulfur diesel fuel using
Ford Motor Company dealer service parts.
Failure to use retrofit components other
than those available through your
authorized dealer will result in coolant
system damage, engine overheating,
selective catalyst reduction system or
diesel particulate filter damage and
possible base engine damage.
Use only a diesel engine configured for use
with high sulfur diesel fuel in markets with
diesel fuel that has sulfur content greater
than 15 ppm. Using low sulfur diesel fuel
(16–500 ppm) or high sulfur diesel fuel
(greater than 500 ppm) in a diesel engine
designed to use only Ultra Low Sulfur
Diesel fuel may result in damage to engine
emission control devices and the
aftertreatment system, potentially
rendering the vehicle inoperable.
Vehicles with engines configured for use
with high sulfur diesel fuel are only
available for sale in countries where ultra
low sulfur diesel fuel is generally not
available or mandated by the government.
Vehicles originally sold in a ultra low sulfur
diesel fuel market that are subsequently
181
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
exported to non- ultra low sulfur diesel fuel
markets will need to be retrofitted at the
customer’ s expense using Ford authorized
dealer service parts in order to be reliably
operated on non- ultra low sulfur diesel
fuel.
Biodiesel
WARNING: Do not mix diesel with
gasoline, gasohol or alcohol. This could
cause an explosion.
Note: Do not use home heating oil,
agricultural fuel, raw fats and oils, waste
cooking greases, biodiesel greater than 20%
or any diesel not intended for highway use.
Damage to the fuel injection system, engine
and exhaust catalyst, and diesel particulate
filter can occur if you use an improper fuel.
Red dye is used to identify fuels intended
for agricultural and non-highway use.
You may operate your vehicle on diesel
fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also
known as B20.
Biodiesel fuel is a chemically converted
product from renewable fuel sources, such
as vegetable oils, animal fats and waste
cooking greases.
To help achieve acceptable engine
performance and durability when using
biodiesel in your vehicle:
• Confirm the biodiesel content of the
fuel to be B20 (20% biodiesel) or less
• Only use biodiesel fuel of good quality
that complies with industry standards
• Follow the recommended service
maintenance intervals See Normal
Scheduled Maintenance (page 556).
• Do not store biodiesel fuel in the fuel
tank for more than 1 month
• Consider changing brands or reducing
biodiesel content if you have cold
temperature fuel gelling issues or a
frequent LOW FUEL PRESSURE
message appearing
Use of biodiesel in concentrations greater
than 20% may cause damage to your
vehicle, including engine and/or exhaust
after-treatment hardware (exhaust
catalyst and particulate filter) failures.
Concentrations greater than 20% can also
cause fuel filter restrictions that may result
in a lack of power or damage to fuel
system components, including fuel pump
and fuel injector failures.
We recommend SAE 5W-40 oil for fuels
with greater than 5% biodiesel (B5). For
more information about oil change
intervals and other maintenance when
operating on biodiesel See Special
Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance (page 562).
Look for a label on the fuel pump to
confirm the amount of biodiesel contained
in a diesel fuel. Biodiesel content is often
indicated with the letter B followed by the
percent of biodiesel in the fuel. For
example, B20 indicates a fuel containing
20% biodiesel. Ask the service station
attendant to confirm the biodiesel content
of a diesel fuel if you do not see a label on
the fuel pump.
Biodiesel fuels degrade more easily than
diesel fuels not containing biodiesel and
should not be stored in the fuel tank for
more than 1 month. If you plan to park or
store your vehicle for more than 1 month,
then you should empty your vehicle fuel
tank of biodiesel fuel. You should fill the
tank with a pure petroleum-based diesel
fuel and run your vehicle for a minimum of
30 minutes.
182
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
Note: Degraded or oxidized biodiesel can
damage fuel system seals and plastics and
corrode steel parts.
During cold weather, if you have problems
operating on biodiesel, you may need to
use a diesel fuel with lower biodiesel
content, try another brand, or discontinue
the use of biodiesel.
Diesel Fuel Additives
It should not be necessary to add any
aftermarket additives to your fuel if you
use a high quality diesel fuel that conforms
to ASTM industry specifications.
Aftermarket additives can damage the fuel
injector system or engine.
Use Motorcraft® cetane booster or an
equivalent cetane booster additive if you
suspect fuel has low cetane. Use
Motorcraft® anti-gel & performance
improver or an equivalent additive if there
is fuel gelling.
Do not use alcohol-based additives to
improve cetane quality, to prevent fuel
gelling or any other use. The use of alcohol
additives may result in damage to the fuel
injectors and system. See Engine
Specifications (page 429).
Your warranty may not cover repairs
needed to correct the effects of using an
aftermarket product that does not meet
Ford specifications in your fuel.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
Avoid running out of fuel because this
situation may have an adverse effect on
engine components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling
to allow the fuel system to pump the
fuel from the tank to the engine. On
restarting, cranking time will take a few
seconds longer than normal. With
keyless ignition, just start the engine.
Crank time will be longer than usual.
• Normally, adding 1 gal (4 L) of fuel is
enough to restart the engine. If the
vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep
grade, more than 1 gal (4 L) may be
required.
REFUELING - GASOLINE
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns
violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries.
WARNING: Read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island.
WARNING: Stay outside your
vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle.
WARNING: Keep children away
from the fuel pump. Never let children
pump fuel.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
183
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
WARNING: Stop refueling after the
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts
off for the second time. Failure to follow
this will fill the expansion space in the
fuel tank and could lead to fuel
overflowing.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted
position when refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
the vehicle - including the cargo area.
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
• Do not use a device that would hold
the fuel pump handle in the fill position.
Fuel Filler Cap
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap,
replace it with a fuel filler cap designed for
your vehicle. The vehicle warranty may be
void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel
system if you do not use the correct genuine
Ford or Motorcraft® fuel filler cap.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Put your vehicle in park (P).
2. Switch the engine off.
3. Carefully turn the filler cap
counterclockwise until it spins off.
4. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel
filler pipe.
5. To install the cap, align the tabs on the
cap with the notches on the filler pipe.
6. Turn the filler cap clockwise until it
clicks at least once.
If the Check Fuel Cap light or a Check Fuel
Cap message appears in the instrument
cluster and stays on after you start the
engine, you may not have installed the fuel
filler properly.
If the fuel cap light remains on, at the next
opportunity, safely pull off of the road,
remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap
properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
light or Check fuel cap message may not
reset immediately. It may take several
driving cycles for the indicators to turn off.
A driving cycle consists of an engine
start-up, after four or more hours with the
engine off, followed by normal city and
highway driving.
REFUELING - DIESEL
WARNING: Read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island.
WARNING: Stay outside your
vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle.
WARNING: Keep children away
from the fuel pump. Never let children
pump fuel.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
184
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted
position when refueling.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: Stop refueling after the
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts
off for the second time. Failure to follow
this will fill the expansion space in the
fuel tank and could lead to fuel
overflowing.
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap,
replace it with a fuel filler cap designed for
your vehicle. The vehicle warranty may be
void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel
system if you do not use the correct genuine
Ford or Motorcraft® fuel filler cap.
Fueling Tips
If air is allowed to enter the fuel system the
engine automatically purges any trapped
air. To purge the air sooner: prior to engine
start, prime the system by turning the key
to on for 30 seconds then to off. Repeat
this several times. The engine may run
rough and produce white smoke while air
is in the system. This is normal.
Use only clean, approved containers that
prevent the entry of dirt or water whenever
you store diesel fuel.
Diesel fuel must not be stored in a
galvanized container. The fuel can dissolve
the zinc in the galvanized container. The
zinc then remains in the fuel. If you run the
contaminated fuel through the engine, the
zinc can deposit in the fuel injectors
causing expensive-to-repair damage.
Diesel fuel dispensing nozzle fill rate
Your vehicle has a fuel fill pipe that is able
to accept fuel up to 20 gal (76 L) per
minute from a 1.2 in (30 mm)
fuel-dispensing nozzle. Pumping fuel at
greater flow rates may result in premature
nozzle shut-off or spit back.
Truck stops have pumps and nozzles
designed for larger, heavy-duty trucks.
When refueling at truck stops: if the nozzle
shuts off repeatedly when refueling, wait
5–10 seconds; then use a slower rate of
flow, do not depress the nozzle trigger as
far.
Refueling
When fueling your vehicle do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door and
remove the fuel tank filler cap.
Carefully turn the filler cap
counterclockwise until it spins off.
185
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
E139202
2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank
filler pipe opening.
E139203
A
B
3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in the lower
position B when refueling. Holding the
fuel pump nozzle in the higher position
A may affect the flow of fuel and shut
off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel
tank is full.
E119081
4. When the pump shuts off, wait 5
seconds, then raise the fuel pump
nozzle and slowly remove it.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and
close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
that the vehicle warranty may not cover.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Dual Fuel Tanks (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a dual fuel tank
delivery system which operates
independently and automatically. The fuel
pump in the front fuel tank delivers fuel to
the engine. When the fuel level in the front
fuel tank drops below three quarter full,
fuel automatically transfers from the rear
fuel tank to the front fuel tank. Whenever
there is fuel in the rear fuel tank, the front
fuel tank level remains between half and
three quarter full.
Note: If your vehicle runs out of fuel, you
must add fuel to the front fuel tank to
restart the engine.
186
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank after running out of fuel. Included in
the advertised capacity is an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See General Information
(page 109).
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Impacting Fuel Economy
• Incorrect tire inflation pressures.
• Fully loading your vehicle.
• Carrying unnecessary weight.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol. See
Fuel Quality (page 179).
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You may get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
187
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
EMISSION LAW
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the
vehicle from the engine and exhaust
system heat and noise. On vehicles with
no original equipment floor covering
insulation, do not carry passengers in a
manner that permits prolonged skin
contact with the metal floor. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in
fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
vehicle modification without first
determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions
control systems including
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by
any person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
188
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements
concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING: Do not park, idle or
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is
very high. Never work around or attempt
to repair any part of the exhaust system
until it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short
period of engine operation and stays hot
after the engine is switched off.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
WARNING: Do not allow people or
animals in truck beds that have
modifications, such as bed covers or
slide-in campers, when the engine is
running. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 317).
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Note: Your vehicle warranty does not cover
resulting component damage.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
189
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
If you use anything other than our parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such aftermarket parts should be
equivalent to our genuine parts in
performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’ s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Running Out of Fuel
(page 183).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. You do not require
additional vehicle service.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.
190
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly, for example, the bulb
does not work, or if the OBD-II system has
determined that some of the emission
control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing.
If you have just serviced the vehicle’s
engine or transmission or the battery has
recently run down or you have replaced it,
the OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
REDUCTANT SYSTEM - DIESEL
Your vehicle may have a selective catalytic
reduction system. The system helps reduce
emission levels of oxides of nitrogen from
the exhaust system. The system
automatically injects diesel exhaust fluid
into the exhaust system to enable correct
selective catalytic reduction system
function.
Note: Selective catalytic reduction systems
are not fitted to vehicles in markets where
only high-sulfur diesel fuel is available.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level
In order for the system to operate correctly
you must maintain the diesel exhaust fluid
level.
A warning message appears in the
information display when the diesel
exhaust fluid level is low. If a warning
message appears, refill the diesel exhaust
fluid tank as soon as possible. See
Information Messages (page 120).
191
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Tank
WARNING: Keep diesel exhaust
fluid out of reach of children. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. In
case of contact with your eyes, flush
immediately with water and get prompt
medical attention. In case of contact
with your skin, clean immediately with
soap and water. If you swallow any
diesel exhaust fluid, drink plenty of
water, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Only refill the diesel
exhaust fluid tank in a well ventilated
area. When you remove the diesel
exhaust fluid tank filler cap or a diesel
exhaust fluid container cap, ammonia
vapors may escape. Ammonia vapors
can be irritating to skin, eyes and mucous
membranes. Inhaling ammonia vapors
can cause burning to the eyes, throat and
nose and cause coughing and watery
eyes.
E308416
The diesel exhaust fluid tank has a blue
filler cap. The tank is behind the left-hand
front wheel. Fill the tank using a fluid pump
at a diesel exhaust fluid filling station or a
diesel exhaust fluid container. We
recommend Motorcraft® diesel exhaust
fluid. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 446).
E163354
192
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
Only use diesel exhaust fluid that is
certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). Non-certified diesel exhaust
fluid use can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
fuel tank. This can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
You can purchase diesel exhaust fluid at
an authorized dealer, most highway truck
stops or you can contact roadside
assistance for help in finding a retailer that
sells diesel exhaust fluid. In addition, there
is a government website to help you find
the nearest location to purchase diesel
exhaust fluid:
http://www.discoverdef.com.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Using a Fuel Station Pump
Filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank using
a nozzle is similar to fuel fill. The nozzle
shuts off automatically when the tank is
full. Do not continue to fill the tank as this
could cause spilling or overflow, potentially
damaging the tank.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Using a Container
The following procedure applies to
Motorcraft diesel exhaust fluid or similar
fluid containers. Always follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid
container cap. Place the spout on to
the container and tighten it until you
feel a strong resistance.
2. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank
filler cap.
3. Insert the spout in to the filler neck until
the seal on the spout seats on to the
filler neck. Pour the fluid in to the tank.
When the tank is full the fluid stops
flowing automatically.
4. Return the container to the vertical
position slightly below the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck. Allow any fluid
remaining in the spout to drain back in
to the container.
5. Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck. Replace the
diesel exhaust fluid tank cap.
6. Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid container and replace the
cap.
Note: If there is diesel exhaust fluid left in
the container retain it for later use. The
spout is re-useable. Wash the spout with
clean water prior to storage. Do not use the
diesel exhaust fluid spout with any other
fluid.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank in
Cold Climates
Diesel exhaust fluid may freeze if the
ambient temperature is below 12°F (-11°C).
Your vehicle has a preheating system
which allows diesel exhaust fluid to
operate below 12°F (-11°C). If you do not
use your vehicle for an extended period
when the ambient temperature is below
12°F (-11°C), the fluid in the tank may
freeze. If the tank is overfilled and the fluid
freezes it may damage the tank. This is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning
Messages and Vehicle Operations
WARNING: Diesel exhaust fluid
must be refilled when low or replaced
when contaminated or your vehicle
speed becomes limited to 50 mph
(80 km/h). In these conditions, drive with
caution and refill diesel exhaust fluid
immediately. If the diesel exhaust fluid
becomes empty or contaminated and
fluid is not replaced, your vehicle
193
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
becomes limited to engine idle only once
stopped. In these conditions, be cautious
where you stop your vehicle because you
may not be able to drive long distances
or maintain highway speeds until you
refill or replace the diesel exhaust fluid.
WARNING: Tampering with or
disabling the selective catalytic
reduction system results in severe
vehicle performance limitation including
eventual speed limiting to 5 mph
(8 km/h).
The information display shows a series of
messages about the amount of diesel
exhaust fluid available. A systems check
displays messages indicating the amount
of diesel exhaust fluid available or displays
a warning message indicating the
approximate distance remaining as the
fluid in the diesel exhaust fluid tank nears
empty. See Information Messages
(page 120).
E163176
As the diesel exhaust fluid level
nears empty, the warning
symbol displays and a series of
tones and messages starting at 500 mi
(800 km) remaining before diesel exhaust
fluid is depleted. The warning symbol and
messages continue until you refill the
diesel exhaust fluid tank.
Continued driving without refilling results
in the following actions as required by the
California Air Resources Board (CARB) and
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA):
• Within a preset distance to empty,
speed is limited upon vehicle restart.
Prior to this occurring a message
appears in the information display.
• Further vehicle operation without
refilling the diesel exhaust fluid tank
causes the engine to enter an idle-only
condition. This only occurs upon vehicle
refueling or at an extended idle. A
message indicates the required actions
to resume normal operation. It is
required to add a minimum of 1.0 gal
(3.8 L) of diesel exhaust fluid to the
tank to exit the idle-only condition, but
your vehicle is still in the speed-limiting
mode until you refill the tank
completely.
Note: For either vehicle speed limiting or
idle-only condition, normal vehicle operation
resumes when you refill the diesel exhaust
fluid tank.
Note: When filling the diesel exhaust fluid
tank from empty, there may be a short delay
before detecting the increased level of fluid.
The increased level detection must occur
before your vehicle returns to full power.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines
and Information
• Use only diesel exhaust fluid that
carries the American Petroleum
Institute (API) certified diesel exhaust
fluid trademark or ISO 22241.
• Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
diesel fuel tank.
• Do not overfill the diesel exhaust fluid
tank.
• Diesel exhaust fluid is corrosive.
• Do not re-use the diesel exhaust fluid
container once it is emptied.
194
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
• Avoid spilling diesel exhaust fluid on
painted surfaces, carpeting or plastic
components. Immediately wipe away
any diesel exhaust fluid that has spilled
with a damp cloth and water. If it has
already crystallized, use warm water
and a sponge.
• Store diesel exhaust fluid out of direct
sunlight and in temperatures between
23°F (-5°C) and 68°F (20°C).
• Diesel exhaust fluid freezes below 12°F
(-11°C).
• Do not store the diesel exhaust fluid
bottle in your vehicle. If it leaks it could
cause damage to interior components
or release an ammonia odor inside your
vehicle.
• Diesel exhaust fluid is non-flammable,
non-toxic, colorless and water-soluble
liquid.
• The system has a diesel exhaust fluid
quality sensor. Dilution of diesel
exhaust fluid or use of any other liquid
in the SCR system leads to a diesel
exhaust fluid system fault, eventually
leading to the vehicle only operating in
idle-only mode.
• Do not dilute diesel exhaust fluid with
water or any other liquid.
• An ammonia odor may be smelled
when the cap is removed or during
refill. Refill diesel exhaust fluid in a well
ventilated area.
Typical Diesel Exhaust Fluid Usage
When Using the Power Take Off (PTO)
Continuous PTO use—Minimal PTO use
0–7,800 mi (0–12,550 km)
Contaminated Diesel Exhaust
Fluid or Inoperative Selective
Catalytic Reduction System
Selective catalytic reduction systems are
sensitive to contamination of the diesel
exhaust fluid. Maintaining the purity of the
fluid is important to avoid system
malfunctions. If you remove or drain the
diesel exhaust fluid tank, do not use the
same fluid to refill the tank. The system
has a sensor to monitor fluid quality.
E163176
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message appears in the
information display if the system
becomes contaminated or inoperative.
Continued driving without replacing diesel
exhaust fluid or having the selective
catalytic reduction system repaired results
in the following actions as required by the
California Air Resources Board (CARB) and
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA):
• Within a preset distance to empty,
speed is limited upon vehicle restart.
Prior to this occurring a message
appears in the information display.
• Further vehicle operation without
replacing contaminated diesel exhaust
fluid causes the engine to enter an
idle-only condition. This only occurs
upon vehicle refueling, vehicle idling in
park for 1 hour, or engine shutdown for
10 minutes or more and is indicated by
a message in the information display
indicating required actions to resume
normal operation.
195
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
Note: For vehicle speed limiting or idle-only
condition, normal vehicle operation resumes
when you repair the contaminated system.
To service a contaminated or inoperative
system, see an authorized dealer.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
The filter forms part of the emissions
reduction system on your vehicle. It filters
harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the
exhaust gas.
Regeneration
WARNING: Do not park or idle your
vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The regeneration
process creates very high exhaust gas
temperatures and the exhaust will
radiate a considerable amount of heat
during and after regeneration and after
you have switched the engine off. This is
a potential fire hazard.
Note: Avoid running out of fuel.
Note: During regeneration at low speed or
engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic
odor and could notice a clicking metallic
sound. This is due to high temperatures
reached during regeneration and is normal.
Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust
sound may be heard during the regeneration
process.
The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle
requires periodic regeneration to maintain
its correct function. Your vehicle will carry
out this process automatically.
If your journeys meet one of the following
conditions:
• You drive only short distances.
• You frequently switch the ignition on
and off.
• Your journeys contain a high level of
acceleration and deceleration.
You must carry out occasional trips with
the following conditions to assist the
regeneration process:
• Drive your vehicle in more favorable
conditions, which you will find at higher
vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a
main road or freeway for a minimum
of 20 minutes. This drive may include
short stops that will not affect the
regeneration process.
• Avoid prolonged idling and always
observe speed limits and road
conditions.
• Do not switch the ignition off.
• Select a suitable gear to ideally
maintain engine speed between 1500
and 3000 RPM.
Oxidation Catalytic Converter and
Diesel Particulate Filter System (If
Equipped)
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is
very high. Never work around or attempt
to repair any part of the exhaust system
until it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the diesel oxidation
catalytic converter or the diesel
particulate filter. The diesel oxidation
catalytic converter and the diesel
particulate filter heat up to very high
temperatures after only a short period
of engine operation and remain hot after
you switch the engine off.
196
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
Your vehicle has a diesel particulate filter.
The diesel particulate filter is an inline filter
in the exhaust system that reduces carbon
emissions by trapping exhaust particles
before they reach the tailpipe. The diesel
particulate filter looks similar to a
traditional exhaust catalyst and is part of
the exhaust system under your vehicle. The
filter couples to a diesel oxidation catalyst
that reduces the amount of harmful
exhaust emitted from the tailpipe. As soot
gathers in the system, it begins to restrict
the filter. The system must periodically
clean the soot that gathers inside the filter.
This is carried out in two ways, passive
regeneration and active regeneration. Both
methods occur automatically and require
no actions from the driver. During either
one of these regeneration methods, you
may notice a change in exhaust tone. At
certain times, the information display
shows various messages related to the
diesel particulate filter. See Information
Messages (page 120).
Diesel Particulate Filter Maintenance
You must properly maintain your vehicle's
diesel particulate filter in order for it to
function properly.
Do not disregard maintenance messages
that appear in the information display.
Failure to follow the instructions of an
information message may degrade vehicle
performance and could lead to engine
damage that may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Failure to perform active or operator
commanded regeneration when instructed
could result in a clogged diesel particulate
filter. If the diesel particulate filter fills
beyond the regeneration threshold, your
vehicle disables the ability for active and
operator commanded regeneration. This
could result in irreversible damage to the
diesel particulate filter requiring
replacement that may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Passive Regeneration
In passive regeneration, the exhaust
system temperature and constituents
automatically clean the filter by oxidizing
the soot. Cleaning automatically occurs
during normal vehicle operating conditions
due to driving patterns.
Active Regeneration
Once the diesel particulate filter is full of
exhaust particles, the engine control
module commands the exhaust system to
clean the filter through active regeneration.
Active regeneration requires the engine
computer to raise the exhaust temperature
to eliminate the particles. During cleaning,
the particles convert to harmless gasses.
Once cleaned the diesel particulate filter
continues trapping exhaust particles.
The regeneration process operates more
efficiently when you drive your vehicle at
a constant speed above 30 mph
(48 km/h) and at a steady engine speed
for approximately 20 minutes. The
frequency and duration of regeneration
fluctuates by how you drive your vehicle,
outside air temperature and altitude. For
most driving, regeneration frequency varies
from 100–500 mi (160–805 km) between
occurrences and each occurrence lasts
9–35 minutes. You can usually reduce the
duration of regeneration if you maintain a
constant speed above 30 mph (48 km/h).
When the engine control module detects
that the diesel particulate filter is nearly
full of particulates and you are not
operating your vehicle in a manner to allow
effective automatic regeneration,
messages appear in the information
display as a reminder for you to drive your
vehicle in order to clean the diesel
particulate filter. If you drive your vehicle
in a manner to allow effective automatic
regeneration, the information display
197
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
shows a cleaning exhaust filter message,
which is the normal regeneration process.
You can also choose operator commanded
regeneration to clean the exhaust system
at this point. See Information Messages
(page 120).
If you are not able to drive in a manner that
allows effective automatic active
regeneration or you choose to perform
regeneration of the diesel particulate filter
while at idle, then operator commanded
regeneration would need to be performed.
Operator Commanded Regeneration
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is operated with significant
stationary operation, low speed drive
cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short
drive cycles, a drive time is less than 10 -
15 minutes or the vehicle does not fully
warm up, passive and active regeneration
may not sufficiently clean the diesel
particulate filter system. Operator
commanded regeneration allows you to
manually start regeneration of the diesel
particulate filter at idle to clean the filter.
If you are not sure whether your vehicle has
this feature, contact an authorized dealer.
When to Carry Out Operator Commanded
Regeneration
You can use the operator commanded
regeneration feature when a message
appears in the information display and you
are not able to drive in a manner that
allows effective automatic active
regeneration or if you choose to manually
start the regeneration of the diesel
particulate filter manually while the vehicle
is idle. See Information Messages (page
120).
Operator Commanded Regeneration
Precautions and Safe Exhaust Position
WARNING: Do not park or idle your
vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The regeneration
process creates very high exhaust gas
temperatures and the exhaust will
radiate a considerable amount of heat
during and after regeneration and after
you have switched the engine off. This is
a potential fire hazard.
WARNING: Stay clear of the
exhaust tailpipe during regeneration. Hot
exhaust gases can burn you badly.
Make sure that the louvers located at the
tip of the exhaust are clear of any
obstructions as they are used to introduce
fresh air into the tailpipe to cool the
exhaust gases as they leave the exhaust
system.
Before you start operator commanded
regeneration, do the following:
• Shift into park (P) and apply the
parking brake, on stable, level ground.
• Park your vehicle outside of any
structure.
• Park your vehicle 10–15 ft (3–5 m)
away from any obstructions and away
from materials that can easily combust
or melt, for example paper, leaves,
petroleum products, fuels, plastics and
other dry organic material.
• Make sure there is a minimum of 1/8
tank of fuel.
• Make sure all fluids are at proper levels.
198
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
How to Start Operator Commanded
Regeneration
WARNING: Stay clear of the
exhaust tailpipe during regeneration. Hot
exhaust gases can burn you badly.
Note: You cannot use the operator
commanded regeneration until the diesel
particulate filter load percentage has
reached 100%. The diesel particulate filter
load percentage fluctuates up and down
when driving your vehicle due to active and
passive regenerations.
Note: During the use of operator
commanded regeneration, you may observe
a light amount of white smoke. This is
normal.
You may not be able to use
operator commanded
regeneration if the service engine
soon warning lamp appears in the
information display
Information Display Procedure
Start with your vehicle engine and when it
has reached the normal operating
temperature, press the information display
control button on the steering wheel. See
Information Display Control (page 81).
If a message advising that the exhaust
filter is full appears in the information
display, press the OK button as instructed.
Answer yes to this prompt and then follow
the next prompts regarding the exhaust
position required to initiate operator
commanded regeneration. Be sure to
understand each prompt. If you are not
sure what is being asked by each prompt,
contact an authorized dealer. The display
confirms the operation has started and
when it has finished.
If the diesel particulate filter is near or at
saturation, a message requesting
permission to initiate filter cleaning
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 120).
Answer yes to this prompt and then follow
the next prompts regarding exhaust
position required to initiate operator
commanded regeneration. Be sure to
understand each prompt. If you are not
sure what is being asked by each prompt,
contact an authorized dealer. The display
confirms the operation has started and
when it has finished. You can also drive to
clean the filter.
When the system is at the point
of oversaturation, the service
engine warning lamp illuminates
and a message appears in the information
display. You cannot initiate filter cleaning.
You must have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Once operator commanded regeneration
starts, engine speed increases to
approximately 1600 rpm and the cooling
fan speed increases. You will hear a
change in audible sound due to engine
speed and cooling fan speed increases.
It is not necessary to open the hood on the
engine compartment. Once operator
commanded regeneration completes, the
engine speed returns to normal idling. The
exhaust system remains very hot for
several minutes even after regeneration is
complete. Do not reposition the vehicle
over materials that could burn until the
exhaust system has had sufficient time to
cool. Depending on the amount of soot
collected by the diesel particulate filter,
ambient temperature and altitude,
operator commanded regeneration lasts
approximately 30 minutes.
199
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
Operator Commanded Regeneration
with Automatic Regeneration Control
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is operated with significant
stationary operation, low speed drive
cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short
drive cycles, drive time less than 15 minutes
or the vehicle does not fully warm up,
passive and active regeneration may not
sufficiently clean the diesel particulate
filter system. You can switch off automatic
regeneration until better driving conditions
are available, for example steady high
speed driving. You can then switch
automatic regeneration back on to clean
the diesel particulate filter.
Switching Automatic Regeneration
Control On and Off
To switch operator commanded
regeneration on and off, use the
information display control on the steering
wheel. See Information Display Control
(page 81). Scroll to the exhaust cleaning
message, a check in the box indicates the
feature is enabled, and unchecked
indicates the feature is disabled.
How to Interrupt or Cancel Operator
Commanded Regeneration
If you need to cancel the operator
commanded regeneration, pressing the
brake, accelerator or switching the engine
off stops the procedure. Depending on the
amount of time you allowed the operator
commanded regeneration to operate, soot
may not have had sufficient time to be fully
eliminated, but the exhaust system and
exhaust gas may still be hot. If you shut
your vehicle off during operator
commanded regeneration, you may notice
turbo flutter. This is a normal consequence
caused by shutting off a diesel engine
during boosted operation and is considered
normal.
Filter Service and Maintenance
Over time, a slight amount of ash builds
up in the diesel particulate filter, which is
not removed during the regeneration
process. The filter may need to be replaced
with a new or remanufactured part at
approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km).
Actual mileage varies depending on engine
and vehicle operating conditions.
If filter service is required, the
engine control system warning
lamp illuminates in the
information display.
If there are any issues with the
diesel particulate filter system,
the engine control system
warning lamp and a service
engine soon warning lamp
illuminate to inform you that
your vehicle requires service. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Resonator and Tailpipe Assembly
Maintenance
Aftermarket devices or modifications to
the exhaust system may reduce the
effectiveness of the exhaust system as
well as cause damage to the exhaust
system or engine. This may also degrade
vehicle performance and could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
200
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Apply the parking
brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: When your vehicle is
stationary, keep the brake pedal fully
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury, death or property
damage.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
Understanding the Shift Positions
of Your Automatic Transmission
(If Equipped)
6-Speed Transmissions
E163183
10-Speed Transmissions
E308145
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
preferred gear.
3. When you have finished driving, come
to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
The instrument cluster displays the current
gear.
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the rear wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), you
can start your vehicle and it is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down when in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The drive function
allows automatic upshifts and downshifts
through the full range of gears.
Manual (M)
With the gearshift lever in manual (M), the
driver can change gears up or down as
preferred. By moving the gearshift lever
from drive position drive (D) to manual
(M), you now have control of selecting the
gear you prefer using buttons on the shift
lever.
201
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Transmission
To return to the normal drive (D) position,
move the shift lever from manual (M) to
drive (D).
The transmission operates through the full
range of gears.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul
feature on or off.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an
appropriate gear.
Understanding Your SelectShift
Automatic™ Transmission
E249567
Note: When pressing the button on the
gearshift lever, you can cycle through the
available drive modes. See Drive Control
(page 262).
Your vehicle has a SelectShift Automatic™
transmission gearshift lever. The
SelectShift Automatic transmission gives
you the ability to change gears up or down
without a clutch.
To prevent the engine from running at too
low of an RPM, which could cause it to
stall, SelectShift will downshift if it
determines that you have not downshifted
in time.
SelectShift does not upshift, even if the
engine is approaching the RPM limit. Shift
it manually by pressing the + button.
Note: Engine damage could occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
feature has two modes:
• Progressive Range Selection.
• Manual (M).
Progressive Range Selection - PRS
E312894
Progressive Range Selection gives you the
ability to lock out gears from the automatic
shifting range. This could provide you with
an improved driving experience, for
example, in slippery conditions or when
experiencing a steep slope.
With the gearshift lever in drive (D), press
the – button to active PRS. The instrument
cluster indicates the available and selected
gears.
202
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Transmission
All available gears display with the current
gear indicated. Press the – button again to
lock out gears beginning with the highest
gear, for example, press the – button twice
to lock out 6th and 5th gears. Only the
available gears display, and the
transmission shifts between the available
gears. Press the + button to unlock gears
to allow the transmission to shift to higher
gears. The transmission shifts within the
gear range you select.
Manual (M)
Moving the gearshift lever to the manual
(M) position allows you to manually select
the gear you prefer. Only the current gear
displays. Use the buttons on the gearshift
lever to manually select gears. Press the
+ button to upshift or the – button to
downshift. Return the transmission to a
different gearshift position to deactivate
manual control.
Recommended shift speeds
Upshift according to the following chart:
6-Speed TransmissionsUpshifts when Accelerating (Recom-
mended for Best Fuel Economy)
Gasoline EnginesShift from:
8 mph (13 km/h)1 - 2
16 mph (26 km/h)2 - 3
22 mph (35 km/h)3 - 4
35 mph (56 km/h)4 - 5
44 mph (71 km/h)5 - 6
Upshifts when Accelerating (Recommended for Best Fuel Economy) 10-Speed
Diesel enginesGasoline enginesShift from:
10 mph (16 km/h)7 mph (11 km/h)1 - 2
15 mph (24 km/h)10 mph (16 km/h)2 - 3
19 mph (31 km/h)17 mph (27 km/h)3 - 4
22 mph (35 km/h)20 mph (32 km/h)4 - 5
25 mph (40 km/h)23 mph (37 km/h)5 - 6
31 mph (50 km/h)29 mph (47 km/h)6 - 7
203
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Transmission
Upshifts when Accelerating (Recommended for Best Fuel Economy) 10-Speed
36 mph (58 km/h)34 mph (55 km/h)7 - 8
45 mph (72 km/h)44 mph (71 km/h)8 - 9
49 mph (79 km/h)47 mph (76 km/h)9 - 10
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature's design is to increase
durability and provide consistent shift feel
over the life of your vehicle. A new vehicle
or transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is normal and
does not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive
learning process fully updates transmission
operation. Additionally, whenever you
disconnect the battery or install a new
battery, the system must relearn the
strategy.
For F350, F450, F550 and F600
Chassis Cab Vehicles
Your transmission could reduce the load
on the engine when the vehicle stops, and
the gear selector is in drive (D) to reduce
fuel consumption and emissions. The
transmission resumes operation when you
release the brake. This feature activates
when the transmission is sufficiently
warmed, and the vehicle is on a level slope.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which
means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement,
always fully apply the parking brake prior
to doing this procedure. Use wheels
chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are working.
Your vehicle comes with brake-shift
interlock that prevents the gearshift lever
from moving from park (P) when you
switch the ignition on but have not pressed
the brake pedal.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of the park (P) position when the ignition
is on and the brake pedal pressed, a
malfunction could have occurred. It is
possible that a fuse has blown, or your
vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating
properly. See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 329).
If you do not have a blown fuse and the
brake lamps are working properly, the
following procedure allows you to move
the gearshift lever from park (P):
1. Apply the parking brake. Switch the
ignition key to 1 - 0, then remove the
key. See Starting and Stopping the
Engine (page 168).
2. Move the steering column to the full
down and full rearward position,
toward the driver seat.
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
204
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Transmission
4. Place your fingers into the hole where
you removed the gearshift lever boot
and pull the top half of the shroud up
and forward to separate it from the
lower half of the shroud. There is a
hinge at the forward edge of the top
shroud. Roll the top half of the shroud
upward on the hinge point, then pull
straight rearward toward the driver
seat to remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
6. Remove the three fasteners under the
column that secure the lower shroud
half to the column.
E163185
7. Pull the lock lever into the full unlocked
position and remove the lower shroud
cover by pulling the lever handle
through the slot in the cover.
8. Apply the brake. Gently lift the override
disk and move the gearshift lever into
neutral (N).
E163186
9. Start your vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order,
making sure to engage the hinge pivots
between the upper and lower halves of the
shroud. Keep slight pressure in the forward
direction as you rotate the halves together.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud
or Snow
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, you
can rock it out by shifting between forward
and reverse gears, stopping between shifts
in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission could occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires could occur, or the
engine could overheat.
POWER TAKE-OFF (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Use of auxiliary equipment that
exceeds the maximum Power Take-Off
(PTO) load specified in our Truck Body
Builders Layout Book can adversely affect
the performance of the powertrain system.
Refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for
instructions about the appropriate
installation of additional equipment.
205
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Transmission
Auxiliary equipment called power take-off,
or PTO, is often added to the engine or
transmission to operate utility equipment.
Examples include a wheel-lift for tow
trucks, cranes, tools for construction or tire
service, and pumping fluids. PTO
applications draw auxiliary horsepower
from the powertrain, often while the
vehicle is stationary. In this condition, there
is limited cooling air flow through the
radiator and around the vehicle that
normally occurs when a vehicle is moving.
The aftermarket PTO system installer,
having the most knowledge of the final
application, is responsible for determining
whether additional chassis heat protection
or powertrain cooling is required, and
alerting the user to the safe and proper
operation.
Split Shaft Capability (If Equipped)
Our Super Duty vehicles are approved for
use as a stationary, including split shaft
capability with 6.7L diesel only, or mobile
power source, within limits and operating
guidelines detailed in our Truck Body
Builders Layout Book. For additional
information, visit www.fordbbas.com.
206
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Transmission
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
Note: For important information regarding
the safe operation of this type of vehicle,
see General Information in the Wheels and
Tires chapter.
Note: Do not use 4H or 4L mode on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
damage drive components. 4X4 mode is
only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces. Use of 4L mode on these
surfaces may produce some noise, such as
occasional clunks, but will not damage drive
components.
Note: If 4X4 low is selected while the
vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h),
the 4WD system will not perform a shift.
This is normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4
Low) for proper operation.
Note: You can switch on and switch off the
electronic locking differential by pulling the
4WD control (4WD vehicles) or turning the
electronic locking differential control (2WD
vehicles). See Electronic Locking
Differential (page 215).
Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly
(ESOF) 4WD system (If Equipped)
Note: If 4X4 Low is selected while the
vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h),
the 4WD system will not perform a shift.
This is normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4
Low) for proper system operation.
Note: Auto-manual hub locks can be
manually locked by rotating the hub lock
control from AUTO to LOCK.
L
O
C
K
O
T
U
A
E339076
For proper operation, make sure that each
hub is fully engaged and that both hub
locks are set to the same position (both
set to LOCK or both set to AUTO). To
engage LOCK, turn the hub locks
completely clockwise; to engage AUTO,
turn the hub locks completely
counterclockwise.
The ESOF 4WD system:
• Provides 4x4 High engagement and
disengagement while the vehicle is
moving.
• Is operated by a rotary control located
on the instrument panel that allows
you select 4x2, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low
operation.
• Uses auto-manual hub locks that can
be engaged and disengaged
automatically based on the 4x4 mode
selected.
• Will increase fuel economy when used
in the hub lock's recommended AUTO
mode.
4WD Indicator Lights
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system will typically remain in whichever
4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It will not default to 4X2
in all circumstances. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an
authorized dealer.
207
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
4X2
E181778
Momentarily illuminates when
2H is selected.
4X4 HIGH
E181779
Continuously illuminates when
4H is selected.
4X4 LOW
E181780
Continuously illuminates when
4L is selected.
CHECK 4X4
Displays when a 4X4 fault is
present.
Using the Electronic Shift on the
Fly 4WD system (If Equipped)
E191851
2H (4X2)
For general on-road driving. Sends power
to the rear wheels only and should be used
for street and highway driving. Provides
optimal smoothness and fuel economy at
high speeds.
4H (4X4 HIGH)
Provides mechanically locked four-wheel
drive power to both the front and rear
wheels for use in off-road or winter
conditions such as deep snow, sand or
mud. This mode is not for use on dry
pavement.
4L (4X4 LOW)
Provides mechanically locked four-wheel
drive power to both the front and rear
wheels for use on low traction surfaces,
but does so with additional gearing for
increased torque multiplication. Intended
only for off-road applications such as deep
sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy
objects. 4L (4X4 low) will not engage while
your vehicle is moving above 3 mph
(5 km/h); this is normal and should be no
reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or
from 4L (4X4 low) for proper operation.
Shifting Between System Modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal when a shift in progress message
displays improves engagement or
disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping or when applying
the accelerator pedal.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for
use on dry pavement.
You can move the control from 2H or 4H
at a stop or while driving. The information
display may display a message indicating
a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift is
complete the message center will then
display the system mode selected.
Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low)
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
208
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: 4x4 low mode is not intended for use
on dry pavement.
1. Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in neutral (N).
3. Move the 4WD control to the preferred
position.
The information display will display a
message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
progress. The information display will then
display the system mode selected. If any
of the above shift conditions are not met,
the shift will not occur and the information
display will display information guiding the
driver through the proper shifting
procedures.
If a message in the information display
shows a Shift Delayed Pull Forward
message, a transfer case gear tooth
blockage is present. To alleviate this
condition, place the transmission in a
forward gear, move the vehicle forward
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the
transmission back to neutral to allow the
transfer case to complete the range shift.
Entering and Exiting Rock Crawl
Mode with Tremor Package (If
Equipped)
E225315
• To enter rock crawl, your vehicle must
be in 4x4 low.
• Press the drive mode button on the
shifter column to bring up the
information display and select rock
crawl mode.
• With the switch in 4x4 low position,
press rock crawl mode again to
deactivate it.
• You can now perform a shift out of 4x4
low.
• Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4x4
low) as described previously for proper
operation of 4x4 low in this procedure.
Operating 4WD Vehicles with
Spare or Mismatched Tires
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of
the spare tire can affect the 4X4 system.
If there is a significant difference between
the size of the spare tire and the remaining
tires, you may have limited four-wheel
drive functionality.
When driving with the full-size, dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, we
recommend that you do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with a 4WD
mode turned on.
• Turn on a 4WD mode unless the
vehicle is stationary.
• Use a 4WD mode on dry pavement.
When driving with the full-size, dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, you may
have limited 4WD functionality, especially
when driving in a mechanically locked 4WD
mode. You may experience the following:
• Additional noise from the transfer case
or other drive components.
• Difficulty shifting out of a mechanically
locked 4WD mode.
Use of a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly may lead to impairment of the
following:
• Comfort and noise.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet driving capability.
• Four-wheel drive capability.
209
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
How Your Vehicle Differs from
Other Vehicles
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be
higher to allow it to travel over rough
terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all
times, especially in rough terrain. Since
sudden changes in terrain can result in
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure
you grip the steering wheel from the
outside. Do not grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.
You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the
area. To maintain steering and braking
control of your vehicle, you must have all
four wheels on the ground and they must
be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and
Utility Vehicles
Note: On some models, the initial shift from
two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while
the vehicle is moving can cause some
momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs
engaging and is not cause for concern.
Note: Your vehicle may come with a front
air dam that can become damaged (due to
reduced ground clearance) when taking your
vehicle off-road. This air dam can be taken
off by removing 15 bolts.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud
and rough terrain and have operating
characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both
on and off the road.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case. On four-wheel
drive vehicles, the transfer case allows you
to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures can be found in this
chapter. Information on transfer case
maintenance can be found in the
Maintenance chapter. You should become
thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD
mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot.
210
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Basic Operating Principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
• Do not use 4H or 4L on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and
may damage drive components. 4H or
4L modes are only intended for
consistently slippery or loose surfaces.
If Your Vehicle Leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed has been
reduced, ease your vehicle back onto the
road. Do not turn the steering wheel
sharply while returning your vehicle to the
road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the road which
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways
out of control or roll over. Remember, your
safety and the safety of others should be
your primary concern.
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
required. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration and braking. This could result
in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
gravel) there will be a change in the way
your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.
steering, acceleration or braking).
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid excessive wheel slip.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Low gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck
to the point that assistance may be
required from another vehicle. Remember,
you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of your vehicle.
211
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, the axle
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
should be checked and changed if
necessary.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or
hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
around because this could cause vehicle
roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
overdrive or move the transmission
selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control. The front
wheels have to be turning in order to steer
your vehicle.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply
the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in
slippery conditions that require tire
chains or cables, then it is critical that
you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down,
allow for longer stopping distances and
avoid aggressive steering to reduce the
212
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death.
If the rear end of your vehicle slides while
cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of your
vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not
become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Do not pump the brake
pedal. See Hints on Driving With
Anti-Lock Brakes (page 219).
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or
Snow
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute, damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Parking
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Apply the parking
brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, when
the transfer case is in the neutral (N)
position, the engine and transmission are
disconnected from the rest of the driveline.
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if
the automatic transmission is in park (P)
or the manual transmission is in gear. Do
not leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the neutral (N) position.
Always set the parking brake fully and turn
off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
213
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer
bars) or by using replacement parts not
equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.
214
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
(IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on
slippery surfaces, particularly when one
wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under
normal conditions, the limited-slip axle
functions like a standard rear axle. The axle
may exhibit a slight noise or vibration
during tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the
axle is working.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The electronic locking differential is
for off-road use only and is not for use on
dry pavement. Using the electronic locking
differential on dry pavement will result in
increased tire wear, noise and vibration.
The electronic locking differential is a
device housed in the rear axle that allows
both rear wheels to turn at the same
speed. The electronic locking differential
can provide additional traction should your
vehicle become stuck. You can activate
the differential electronically and shift it
on the fly within the differential operating
speed range. The differential is for use in
mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition
where you need maximum traction. It is
not for use on dry pavement.
The following conditions will affect the
electronic locking differential:
• The electronic locking differential will
not engage if your vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h) in 4x2, or 4x4
High modes.
• The electronic locking differential will
not engage if your vehicle speed is
above or 56 mph (90 km/h) in 4X4
Low.
• The electronic locking differential may
not engage if you press your
accelerator pedal during an
engagement attempt. A message may
display in the instrument display
guiding you to release the accelerator
pedal.
• In 4x2, and 4x4 High modes, the
electronic locking differential will
automatically disengage at speeds
above 25 mph (41 km/h) and will
automatically reengage at speeds
below 20 mph (32 km/h).
• In 4L (4X4 low), the electronic locking
differential will automatically
disengage at speeds above 62 mph
(100 km/h) and will automatically
reengage at speeds below 56 mph
(90 km/h).
• The AdvanceTrac system has the
ability to take over control of the
electronic locking differential and
disable it during driving maneuvers
when necessary.
When you switch the system on, if you do
not meet the required conditions for
electronic locking differential activation,
the instrument cluster will display the
appropriate information guiding you
through the proper activation process.
Activating the Electronic Locking
Differential
Note: Do not use electronic locking
differential on dry, hard surfaced roads.
Doing so will produce excessive noise,
vibration and increase tire wear.
Note: If the electronic locking differential
has difficulty disengaging, release the
accelerator pedal and turn the steering
wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
215
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Rear Axle
For 4WD vehicles
E227398
Pull the 4WD control knob toward you.
For 2WD vehicles
E183740
Turn the control to ON.
E163170
Once the indicator light
illuminates in the information
display, both rear wheel axle
shafts will be locked together providing
added traction.
If the indicator does not come on, or the
indicator turns off while driving, one of the
following has occurred:
• The vehicle speed is too high.
• The left and right rear wheel speed
difference is too high during an
engagement attempt.
• The system has malfunctioned and is
accompanied by a message in the
information display. See your
authorized Ford dealer for assistance.
• The vehicle is experiencing an anti-lock
brake activation.
Operating ELD With a Spare or
Mismatched Tires
On vehicles with an ELD, the size of the
spare tire can affect performance of the
system. If there is a significant difference
between the two rear tires, you may have
limited ELD functionality. If the electronic
locking differential has difficulty
disengaging, release the accelerator pedal
and turn the steering wheel in the opposite
direction when rolling. We recommend
engaging and disengaging the ELD at a
stop when you mount a spare on the rear
axle.
216
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Rear Axle
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Shift the transmission to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you switch the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is
disabled, normal braking is still effective.
See Warning Lamps and Indicators
(page 104).
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
E270480
If the lamp remains illuminated
after you release the parking
brake, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
It also illuminates momentarily
when you switch the ignition on
to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does
not illuminate when you switch the ignition
on, or begins to flash at any time, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Diesel Engine Exhaust Braking (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Do not use tow/haul
when the road surface is slippery. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use diesel
engine exhaust braking when the road
surface is slippery. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle.
217
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Brakes
This feature increases engine braking at
higher engine speeds to provide better
grade descent control with less brake and
transmission wear and tear.
Note: Use this when driving downhill and
carrying heavy loads or trailering.
Benefits of engine braking are:
• Lower brake temperature.
• Reduced brake fade.
• Longer brake life.
• Improved driving and trailering control.
E171217
Press the button on the switch
bank next to the audio unit to
switch the system on or off.
There are two engine brake modes, manual
and automatic.
Manual Engine Braking
1. Press the button to switch on manual
engine braking.
2. Release the accelerator pedal to
maximize engine braking.
3. Apply the brakes. The transmission
downshifts to lower gears.
Note: The engine braking feature only
functions when you release the accelerator.
Note: You can shift the transmission to
lower gears with progressive range selection
(PRS) or manual shifting independent of
pressing the brakes.
Note: You can also use manual engine
braking with cruise control to improve grade
descent control.
Note: If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise
Control, the speed control system uses the
selected engine brake mode, transmission
gears, and brakes to maintain the set speed
and distance to the vehicle being followed.
Automatic Engine Braking
1. Press the button twice to switch on
automatic engine braking.
2. Release the accelerator or brake pedal.
The system remembers your vehicle
speed.
Note: This feature offers smoother, less
aggressive engine braking during downhill
descents. It may not apply braking if the
vehicle speed is not increasing, although it
will apply full engine braking force when
needed to prevent acceleration. The system
automatically activates the engine brake
and, if necessary, downshifts the
transmission to lower gears to not exceed
your vehicle's set speed when the brake or
accelerator were last released.
Warning Lamp Conditions
• Illuminates when this feature is
switched on and the system is
operating properly. See Warning
Lamps and Indicators (page 104).
• Flashes when the engine brake is
disabled due to a fault or the engine
does not meet the required braking
conditions.
• Does not illuminate when the switch
or indicator is faulty.
You can switch the system on at anytime.
The system becomes active once the
braking conditions are met.
Braking Conditions
• Your vehicle is in a forward gear.
• The engine speed is above about 1500
RPM.
• Your foot is off the accelerator.
218
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Brakes
You can use this feature with tow/haul or
progressive range selection to provide
further increased engine braking. The
transmission automatically upshifts to
prevent the engine from entering the red
zone on the tachometer. See Automatic
Transmission (page 201).
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always set the parking
brake fully and make sure the
transmission is placed in park (P). Failure
to set the parking brake and engage park
could result in vehicle roll-away, property
damage or bodily injury. Turn the ignition
to the lock position and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
Apply the parking brake whenever your
vehicle is parked. Press the pedal
downward to set the parking brake. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster will illuminate and remains
illuminated until the parking brake is
released.
To release, pull the brake release lever
located at the lower left side of the
instrument panel.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade
or with a trailer, press and hold the brake
pedal down, then set the parking brake.
There may be a little vehicle movement as
the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's
weight. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then
try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake.
WARNING: You must remain in
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system will turn
off if a malfunction is apparent or if you
rev the engine excessively. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
219
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Brakes
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.
The system activates on any slope that
causes your vehicle to roll.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed and shift into
first gear when facing uphill or reverse
(R) when facing downhill.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
You cannot turn the system on or off.
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
220
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING: The stability and
traction control light illuminates steadily
if the system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Note: For additional information on the
traction and stability control systems. See
Using Stability Control (page 223).
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
Use the traction and stability control
switch on the instrument panel to switch
the system off or on.
The switch illuminates when traction
control is off.
When you place your vehicle into
four-wheel drive low mode the traction
control disables. Traction control resumes
full operation when you put your vehicle
back into two-wheel drive mode.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E225465
The stability and traction control
light:
• Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
• Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
• Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
E225466
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
system off.
221
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket
roof racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic
stability control system. In addition,
installing any stereo loudspeakers may
interfere with and adversely affect the
electronic stability control system. Install
any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as
far as possible from the front center
console, the tunnel, and the front seats
in order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the electronic stability control
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of
the electronic stability control system
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the
laws of physics. It’s always possible to
lose control of a vehicle due to
inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk
of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the electronic stability
control system is an indication that at
least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your
electronic stability control system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If a fault occurs in either the stability
control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
• The stability control and traction
control systems do not enhance your
vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
the wheels.
• The Adaptive Steering system (if
equipped) automatically changes the
steering function to a fixed steering
ratio. See Steering (page 256).
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the system applies
higher brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
222
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Stability Control
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 221).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC®)
The system turns on each time you switch
the ignition on.
You can switch the electronic stability
control and roll stability control portions
of the system off.
When you shift the transmission into
reverse (R) the systems disable.
E130458
Use the traction and stability
control switch on the instrument
panel to switch the systems off
or on.
You can independently switch off the
traction control portion of the system.
223
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Stability Control
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
Traction
control system
Electronic
stability
control
Roll stability
control
Stability
control light
Button func-
tions
EnabledEnabledEnabledIlluminated
during bulb
check
Default at start-
up
Disabled
Enabled
1
EnabledIlluminatedButton pressed
momentarily
DisabledDisabledDisabled
illuminated
3
Button pressed
and held for
more than 5
seconds
Enabled
2
Enabled
1
EnabledIlluminatedDouble Press
(Pickup Only)
EnabledEnabledEnabledNot illuminatedButton pressed
again after
deactivation
DisabledDisabledDisabledIlluminatedTransfer case
switched to
4WD Low
4
1
Electronic stability control has reduced sensitivity compared to a fully active system.
2
Traction control has reduced sensitivity compared to a fully active system.
3
Lamp light starts blinking for four seconds after entering the press and hold state.
4
Engaging 4WD Low disables roll stability control, electronic stability control and the
traction control systems.
224
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Stability Control
WHAT IS TRAIL CONTROL
WARNING: The system does not
control speed in low traction conditions
or extremely steep slopes. The system
is designed to be an aid and does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission
into park (P) for automatic transmission
or first gear for manual transmission.
Trail control lets you focus on steering
during low-speed and off-road use by
controlling your vehicle's acceleration and
braking.
You can use trail control under the
following speeds:
• 20 mph (31 km/h) in two-wheel or
four-wheel drive high range.
• 10 mph (15 km/h) in four-wheel drive
low range.
• 5 mph (8 km/h) in reverse (R).
You may hear a noise from the anti-lock
brake system pump motor when you use
the system. This is normal.
SWITCHING TRAIL CONTROL
ON AND OFF
E272858
Press the button.
The system switches off if you press the
button again or exceed 42 mph (68 km/h).
SETTING THE TRAIL CONTROL
SPEED
Note: The buttons are located on the
steering wheel.
Drive to your preferred speed.
Press button to increase the set
current speed.
Press button to decrease the set
current speed.
Note: The indicator changes color.
You can adjust the set speed in small or
large increments. Press the toggle button
upward or downward once to adjust the
set speed in small increments. Press and
hold the toggle button upward or
downward to adjust the set speed in large
increments.
You can also adjust the set speed by
braking.
Note: Pressing the brake pedal does not
switch off the system.
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E265298
Press the button.
TRAIL CONTROL INDICATORS
E272858
225
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Trail Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Hill descent control
cannot control descent in all surface
conditions and circumstances, such as
ice or extremely steep grades. Hill
descent control is a driver assist system
and cannot substitute for good judgment
by the driver. Failure to do so may result
in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious
injury.
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission
into park (P) for automatic transmission
or first gear for manual transmission.
Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while
descending steep grades in various surface
conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 2 mph
(3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above
20 mph (32 km/h), the system remains
armed, but descent speed cannot be set
or maintained.
Hill descent control requires a cooling
down interval after a period of sustained
use. The amount of time that the feature
can remain active before cooling varies
with conditions. The system will provide
a warning in the message center and a
chime will sound when the system is about
to disengage for cooling. At this time,
manually apply the brakes as needed to
maintain descent speed.
USING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL
E163957
Press and release the hill
descent button on the
instrument panel. A light in the
cluster illuminates and a tone sounds
when this feature is activated.
To increase descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until the desired speed
is reached. To decrease descent speed,
press the brake pedal until the desired
speed is reached.
Whether accelerating or decelerating, once
the desired descent speed is reached,
remove your feet from the pedals and the
chosen vehicle speed is maintained.
Note: Noise from the ABS pump motor may
be observed during hill descent control
operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and should be no reason for
concern.
Hill Descent Modes
• At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
When the hill descent control switch is
pressed and hill descent control is
active, the hill descent control telltale
flashes.
• At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
When the hill descent control switch is
pressed and conditions are not correct
for hill descent activation, the hill
descent control system is enabled and
the hill descent control telltale is solid.
A message displays in the information
display.
• At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h):
When the hill descent control switch is
pressed, the hill descent control
system is enabled, the telltale in the
cluster is not illuminated and a
message is displayed in the information
display.
226
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Terrain Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This
may cause reduced performance or false
alerts.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false beeps. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms. See your
authorized technician.
Note: When a trailer is connected to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide warnings.
Disable the rear parking aid when a trailer
is connected to prevent these warnings.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 60).
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
When receiving a detection warning, the
radio volume reduces to a predetermined
level. After the warning goes away, the
radio volume returns to the previous level.
The sensing system can be switched off
through the information display menu or
from the pop-up message that appears
once you shift the transmission into reverse
(R). See General Information (page 109).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display and you cannot switch the system
on through the pop-up message. See
Information Messages (page 120).
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 11.81 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
11.81 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only two
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.
228
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
E231381
The coverage area is up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. The coverage area could
decrease at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R):
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary, and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the display screen. See
Rear View Camera (page 229).
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use
it in conjunction with the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
as slow as possible, higher speeds may
limit your reaction time to stop your
vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when the
tailgate is ajar. If the tailgate is ajar, the
camera will be out of position and the
video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the tailgate
is ajar. Some vehicles may not come
equipped with guidelines.
WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you shift
the transmission into reverse (R).
During operation, lines appear in the
display that represents the path of your
vehicle and proximity to objects behind it.
229
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
E223144
The rear view camera is located on the
tailgate.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the tailgate is ajar, no rear view camera
features are displayed.
Note: If the image does not turn off while
the transmission is not in reverse (R) and
you are driving over a speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h), have the system inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what is being towed behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and some objects might not be seen. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once the trailer tow connector is engaged.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The camera is misaligned due to
damage to the rear of your vehicle.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if
Active or Fixed guidelines are on.
Note: Some vehicles may not come
equipped with guidelines.
230
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
To use active guidelines, turn the steering
wheel to point the guidelines toward an
intended path. If the steering wheel
position is changed while reversing, the
vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The active guidelines fade in and out
depending on the steering wheel position.
The active guidelines are not shown when
the steering wheel position is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Obstacle Distance Indicator
E190459
The system will provide an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
will highlight green, yellow and red when
the parking aid sensors detect an object in
the coverage area.
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
231
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently
increases.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
• You apply the parking brake on vehicles
with a manual transmission.
360 DEGREE CAMERA
WARNING: The 360 degree
camera system still requires the driver
to use it in conjunction with looking out
of the windows, and checking the interior
and exterior mirrors for maximum
coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
Note: The 360 degree camera system turns
off when your vehicle is in motion at low
speed, except when in reverse (R).
The 360 degree camera system consists
of front, side and rear cameras. The
system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in
front or behind your vehicle.
• Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.
• Allows you to see a top-down view of
the area outside your vehicle, including
the blind spots.
• Provides visibility around your vehicle
to you in parking maneuvers such as:
• Centering in a parking space.
• Obstacles near vehicle.
• Parallel parking.
Camera Views
E205884
The camera button is on the
instrument panel. Pressing the
camera button activates the
system.
When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D),
only images from the front cameras are
displayed. Press the camera button to
display the front camera image on the
display screen.
When in reverse (R), only images from the
rear cameras are displayed. When you shift
into reverse (R), the rear view camera
image automatically shows on the display
screen.
Advanced Camera Views (If Equipped)
E233726
Additional camera views may be
available for vehicles with
specific features. Press the small
camera icon shown on the top left corner
of the display screen to open the camera
view menu.
The following camera views can be
accessed in park (P), neutral (N) or drive
(D) when you press the camera button:
• Front 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal front camera view next to a
360 degree camera view.
• Front Normal View: Provides an
image of what is directly in front of your
vehicle.
232
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
• Front Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is in front of
your vehicle.
• Rear High View: Provides an image
of your truck bed and can be used to
assist you when backing up to align and
hitch a fifth wheel or gooseneck trailer.
• Auxiliary View: Provides a rear view
image from the back of your trailer
while reversing.
The following camera views can be
accessed when you shift into reverse (R):
• Rear 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal rear camera view next to a 360
degree camera view. Press the zoom
(+) button to quickly access Rear
Normal View from this screen.
• Rear Normal View: Provides an image
of what is directly behind your vehicle.
• Rear Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is behind your
vehicle.
• Rear High View: Provides an image
of your truck bed and can be used to
assist you when backing up to align and
hitch a fifth wheel or gooseneck trailer.
• Auxiliary View: Provides a rear view
image from the back of your trailer
while reversing.
• Trailer Reverse Guidance View:
Provides an image of the rear of your
vehicle using the side cameras, useful
when reversing with a trailer. Use the
arrows at the bottom of the screen to
adjust the side camera position. See
Trailer Reversing Aids (page 274).
Keep Out Zone
E184448
The Keep Out Zone is represented by the
yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
vehicle. It is designed to give you the
indication on the ground of the fully
extended outside mirror position.
Front Camera
WARNING: The front camera
system still requires the driver to use it
in conjunction with looking out of your
vehicle.
E184044
233
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
The front video camera is in the grille and
provides a video image of the area in front
of your vehicle. It adds assistance to the
driver while driving forward at low speeds.
To use the front video camera system,
place the transmission in any gear except
reverse (R). An image will display once the
camera enable button is pressed. The area
displayed on the screen may vary
according to your vehicle's orientation or
road condition.
Side Camera
E231401
The side view camera is in the outside
mirror and provides a video image of the
area on the sides of your vehicle. It aids you
while parking your vehicle, or when parking
with a trailer attached.
Note: Use caution when using the 360 view
while any of the doors are ajar. If a door is
ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image could be incorrect.
Bed View Camera (If Equipped)
E231402
The bed view camera system is a variant
of the rear view camera that is mounted
within the high-mount stop lamp. It is
designed to display the contents of your
truck bed or assist you when backing up to
align and hitch a fifth wheel or gooseneck
trailer. The bed view camera is not meant
as an alternative to the rear view camera.
E233763
The camera view contains a dynamic
guideline to help you locate the center of
your vehicle. This view can be accessed
while in drive (D) or reverse (R).
Auxiliary Camera (If Equipped)
Note: The auxiliary camera works with
trailers up to 50 ft (15 m) in length.
234
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
E233727
Access the auxiliary camera view
by pressing the button on the
display screen when in reverse
(R).
Access the auxiliary camera while in drive
(D) by pressing the camera button twice.
The auxiliary camera system is a variant
of the rear view camera. It is designed to
display a rear view image from the back of
a trailer while reversing. The auxiliary
camera is not meant as an alternative to
the rear view camera.
235
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal.
Requirements
Use cruise control when the vehicle speed
is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h).
SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL
ON AND OFF
WARNING: Do not use cruise
control on winding roads, in heavy traffic
or when the road surface is slippery. This
could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 81).
Switching Cruise Control On
E265296
Press the button.
Switching Cruise Control Off
E265297
Press the button when the
system is in standby mode.
The system also turns off when you switch
the ignition off.
Note: The set speed erases when you
switch the system off.
SETTING THE CRUISE
CONTROL SPEED
WARNING: When you are going
downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The
system does not apply the brakes.
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press either button to set the
current speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color in the
information display.
Changing the Set Speed
Press and release the button to
increase the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold the button to accelerate.
Release the button when you reach your
preferred speed.
Press and release the button to
decrease the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold the button to decelerate.
Release the button when you reach your
preferred speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
236
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E265298
Press the button, or tap the
brake pedal to cancel the set
speed.
Note: The system remembers the set
speed.
Note: The system cancels if the vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
Press the button.
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
E71340
Illuminates when you switch the
system on.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Pay close attention to
changing road conditions such as
entering or leaving a highway, on roads
with intersections or roundabouts, roads
without visible lanes of travel, roads that
are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep
slopes.
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer that has
aftermarket electronic trailer brake
controls. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation of
the system. Failure to do so may result
in a loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
WARNING: The system may not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: The system does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the road.
WARNING: The system does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the same
lane.
WARNING: The system is not a
crash warning or avoidance system.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with a snow plow blade installed.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.
237
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
The system uses a radar sensor that
projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.
E262918
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
E265296
Press and release the button.
E144529
The indicator, current gap setting
and set speed appear in the
information display.
E233874
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
Drive to your preferred speed.
Press and release either button.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
E233874
A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is a
vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a
vehicle that is braking, your vehicle does
not always decelerate quickly enough to
avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
238
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
WARNING: The system only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning
or a delayed warning. Apply the brakes
when necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• Your vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds, a message appears in the
information display and an indicator
flashes when the system continues to
brake. Take immediate action.
Setting the Gap Distance
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control.
E263697
Press and release to decrease
the gap distance.
E263696
Press and release to increase the
gap distance.
E233874
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the image.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
239
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic
Behavior
Distance GapGraphic
Display,
Bars Indic-
ated
Between
Vehicles
Sport.Closest.1
Normal.Close.2
Normal.Medium.3
Comfort.Far.4
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING: If you override the
system by pressing the accelerator
pedal, it does not automatically apply
the brakes to maintain a gap from any
vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
E144529
Use the accelerator pedal
normally to intentionally exceed
the set speed limit.
When you override the system, the green
indicator light illuminates and the vehicle
image does not appear in the information
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
Press and release to increase the
set speed in small increments.
Press and release to decrease
the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold either button to change the
set speed in large increments. Release the
button when you reach your preferred
speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Canceling the Set Speed
E265298
Press and release the button or
tap the brake pedal.
The set speed does not erase.
Note: If you press the clutch pedal (manual
transmission only) for an extended period,
this action also cancels the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release the button.
Your vehicle speed returns to the
previously set speed and gap setting. The
set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
240
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Automatic Cancellation
The system is not functional at vehicle
speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h). The
information display indicates low engine
speed, an audible alarm sounds and the
automatic braking releases if the vehicle
drops below this speed.
Automatic cancellation can also occur
when:
• The tires lose traction.
• You apply the parking brake.
Note: If the engine speed drops too low, an
audible warning sounds and a message
appears in the information display.
Automatic braking releases.
Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow
Usage
You should select a lower gear when the
system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep
grades, for example in mountainous areas.
The system needs additional engine
braking in these situations to reduce the
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent it from overheating.
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Note: When towing with adaptive cruise
control, switch on Tow/Haul Mode and
Diesel Engine Brake.
Note: Tow/Haul mode increases the time
gaps and allows more distance for braking.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
E265297
Press and release the button
when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.
Detection Issues
WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the
road infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these
cases, the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening,
if required.
WARNING: If the system
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
241
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
take action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.
Optimal system performance requires a
clear view of the road by the
windshield-mounted camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E243054
The camera is mounted on the windshield
behind the interior mirror.
E312903
242
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
not function when something blocks the
sensor.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.
Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt,
metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors and aftermarket lights may also
block the sensor.
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar is dirty or
obstructed.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
The surface of the radar is clean but the
message remains in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the
road may interfere with the radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.
You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING: Normal cruise control
will not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not respond to lead vehicles.
Automatic braking remains active to
maintain set speed.
You can change from adaptive cruise
control to normal cruise control through
the information display.
243
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
DRIVER ALERT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest
breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for
the system to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles
may result in the system warning you
even if you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the
road lane markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.
Note: If you have a blocked camera or
damaged windshield, the system may not
function.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle, unless
it detects a MyKey™.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
E249505
The system monitors your driving behavior
using various inputs including the front
camera sensor.
If the system detects reduced driving
alertness below a certain threshold, the
system alerts you using a tone and a
message in the information display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off
through the information display by
selecting Settings, Driver Assist and then
Driver Alert in the menu. When activated,
the system monitors your alertness level
based upon your driving behavior in relation
to the lane markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system does not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
244
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
The warning system is in two stages. At
first the system issues a temporary warning
that you need to take a rest. This message
only appears for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving
alertness, another warning could be issued
which remains in the information display
for a longer time. Press OK on the steering
wheel control to clear the warning. When
active the system runs in the background
and only issues a warning if required.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always drive with due
care and attention when using and
operating the controls and features on
your vehicle.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the
road lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in
a false or missed warning.
WARNING: Large contrasts in
outside lighting can limit sensor
performance.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking at a
speed above 40 mph (64 km/h).
Note: The system may not function with a
blocked camera, or if the windshield is
damaged or dirty.
E249505
245
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
When you switch the system on and it
detects an unintentional drift out of your
lane is likely to occur, the system notifies
or assists you to stay in your lane through
the steering system and information
display. The system provides an audible
warning and by vibrating the steering
wheel.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey,
it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert.
Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the
button does not affect the on or off status
of the system. You can only change the
mode and intensity settings.
E173233
Press the button to switch the
system on or off. The button is
above the audio unit or on the
center console.
System Settings
The system sensitivity and intensity can
be adjusted through the display screen.
See General Information (page 109). The
system remembers the last selection. You
do not need to readjust the setting each
time you turn on your vehicle.
Sensitivity: This setting allows you to
select where in the lane a warning is
provided. Increasing the sensitivity setting
moves the warning zones in closer to your
vehicle.
E165517
NormalA
IncreasedB
Note: The alert diagram illustrates general
zone coverage. It does not provide exact
zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration. Increasing
the intensity causes a higher rate of haptic
feedback.
• High.
• Normal.
• Low.
System Display
E233874
When you switch on the system, a graphic
with lane markings appears in the display
screen.
246
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may
still display if adaptive cruise control is
enabled.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
on the indicated side(s). This may be
because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• The direction indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog, following a large vehicle that is
blocking or shadowing the lane or poor
headlamp illumination.
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning on
the indicated side(s).
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
You can temporarily disable the system at
any time by doing the following:
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using your direction indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
• Driving too close to the lane markings.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last feature activation occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
247
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
Vehicle accessories are blocking the camera, for example a snow plow.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use the blind
spot information system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The
blind spot information system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
E227388
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the bumper. The system is
designed to alert you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
248
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It is only designed to alert
you to moving vehicles in the blind spot
zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind spot zone, typically fewer
than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive
your vehicle forward above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
For automatic transmissions, the Blind
Spot Information System remains on while
the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted
into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot
Information System turns back on when
you drive your vehicle above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Note: For automatic transmissions, the
Blind Spot Information System does not
function in reverse (R) or park (P).
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears
except reverse (R).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle
the approaching vehicle is coming from.
When the Blind Spot Information System
is alerting on a vehicle and the
corresponding turn signal is ON, the Blind
Spot Information System alert indicator
flashes as an increased warning level.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
Note: The alert indicator flashes in case of
an alert and the turn signal is set to that side
at the same time.
System Sensor Blockage
E231384
249
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
The system uses radar sensors that are
located inside the tail lamp on each side
of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snow in
front of the sensors or driving in heavy rain
can cause system degradation. Also, other
types of obstructions in front of the sensor
can cause system degradation. This is
referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
appears in the display screen. The alert
indicators remain ON and the system no
longer provides any warnings. You can
clear the warning but the alert indicators
remain illuminated.
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in
two ways:
• After the blockage in front of the
sensors is removed or the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or
stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic
to allow the sensors to detect passing
vehicles.
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Blind Spot
Information System off. If your vehicle has
a tow bar but no factory equipped trailer
tow module, it is recommended to turn the
Blind Spot Information System off
manually. Operating the Blind Spot
Information System without the Blind Spot
Trailer Tow package and a trailer attached
will cause poor system performance.
Blind Spot Information System
with Trailer Tow (If Equipped)
E225007
The Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow is designed to aid you in
detecting vehicles that may have entered
the detection area zone (A). The detection
area is on both sides of your vehicle and
trailer, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to the end of your trailer.
When a trailer is attached and the
customer has set up a Blind Spot Trailer,
the Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow becomes active when driving
forward above 6 mph (10 km/h). See
Trailer Reversing Aids (page 274).
The Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow can be turned off in the
instrument cluster. If the Blind Spot
Information System is turned off, then the
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Tow automatically turns off.
250
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Setting up a Blind Spot Trailer
E225008
Trailer lengthA
Trailer widthB
Trailer hitch ballC
You can set-up any trailer to work with the
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Tow through the instrument cluster menu.
See General Information (page 109).
While setting up a trailer, a sequence of
screens appear asking for trailer
information. The Blind Spot Information
System with Trailer Tow specific screens
are described below:
• Select type of trailer screen -
Conventional, fifth wheel or gooseneck.
The Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow only supports conventional
trailers. If fifth wheel or gooseneck is
selected, the system automatically turns
off.
• Do you want to set up BLIS with trailer
screen?
If no, the Blind Spot Information System
turns off.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
• Is the width less than 9 ft (2.7 m) and
length less than 33 ft (10.1 m)?
If no, the Blind Spot Information System
turns off.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
• Trailer width measurement:
The width of the trailer is measured at the
front of the trailer. It is not measured at the
widest point of the trailer. The maximum
width at the front of the trailer that the
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Tow can support is 8.5 ft (2.6 m).
Note: You do not need to enter an exact
trailer width measurement; just measure
that it is 8.5 ft (2.6 m) or less.
• Trailer length measurement:
The trailer length is the distance between
the trailer hitch ball and the rear of the
trailer. The maximum length that the Blind
Spot Information System with Trailer Tow
can support is 33 ft (10.1 m).
• Enter length of trailer:
The default setting is 18 ft (5.5 m).
Toggling up or down using the menu
buttons will increase/decrease the
measurement by 3 ft (1 m). Select the
length so that the value is equal to or
within 3 ft (1 m) of the actual measured
length. For example, if the actual measured
length is 25 ft (7.6 m), then toggle the
length in the menu to 27 ft (8.2 m). When
the length has been entered, the Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow setup
is saved.
If you do not set up a Blind Spot Trailer, a
warning appears in the instrument cluster
when a trailer is connected stating that the
system has been turned off due to a trailer
connect.
Note: If the trailer is actually a bike rack or
cargo rack with electrical lighting, then the
length will be 3 ft (1 m). Cross Traffic Alert
will remain on for trailers 3 ft (1 m) or less.
Note: Proper measurement and
measurement entry is required for Blind
Spot Information System with Trailer Tow
to function as designed.
251
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
System Operation
If you select a trailer in the display screen
prior to connecting the trailer, the system
will load that configuration and the
information cluster displays a message
when the trailer is connected. A second
message appears stating Cross Traffic
Alert has been turned off; the Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow still
functions normally when driving forward.
If no trailer has been set up and a trailer is
connected, the instrument cluster provides
a message indicating a trailer is connected
followed by a message asking to select a
trailer from the existing list of trailers or to
add a trailer. In order for the Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow to
function, an existing trailer must be
selected or a new trailer must be added. If
the request is ignored or if you exit the
screen, a message appears prompting you
that the system has been turned off due
to a trailer connect. This message may not
appear until your vehicle speed reaches
22 mph (35 km/h).
The Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow activates when driving forward
for that particular trailer set up. If the
ignition is cycled, the Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow
continues to function using the last trailer
selected.
Trailer Considerations
The Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow is designed to work with any
trailer whose front width is 8.5 ft (2.6 m)
or less and total length from the trailer
hitch ball to the rear of the trailer is 33 ft
(10.1 m) or less. Different trailers may
cause a slight change in performance as
outlined below.
Large box trailers may cause false alerts
to trigger when driving next to buildings or
near parking cars. A false alert may also
occur while making a 90-degree turn.
Trailers that are 8.5 ft (2.6 m) wide at the
front and have a total length greater than
20 ft (6 m) may have delayed alerts from
passing vehicles when the vehicle is
passing at high speed.
A box trailer whose front width is 8.5 ft
(2.6 m) may cause early alerts when you
are over taking a vehicle.
When towing a clam shell or V-Nose box
trailer with a front width of 8.5 ft (2.6 m),
delayed alerts on merging vehicles that are
traveling the same speed as your vehicle
may occur.
System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the telltale illuminates
and a message appears in the display
screen. See Information Messages
(page 120).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the display
screen. See General Information (page
109). When the Blind Spot Information
System switches off, you do not receive
alerts and the display screen shows a
system off message. The telltale in the
cluster also illuminates. When you switch
the Blind Spot Information System on or
off, the alert indicators flash twice.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
remembers the last selected on or off
setting.
You can also have the Blind Spot
Information System switched off
permanently at an authorized dealer. Once
switched off permanently, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
dealer.
252
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use the cross
traffic alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
reversing out of a parking space. The
cross traffic alert system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due
care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
The system alerts you of vehicles
approaching from the sides behind your
vehicle when you shift into reverse (R).
Using Cross Traffic Alert
The system detects vehicles that approach
at a speed between 4 mph (6 km/h) and
37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases
when the sensors are partially, mostly or
fully obstructed. Slowly reversing helps
increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
The system turns on when you start the
engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
system turns off when you shift out of
reverse (R).
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only
partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
253
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and
zone coverage on that side is severely
reduced.
Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display when
you shift into reverse (R).
Cross Traffic Alert System
Limitations
The system may not correctly operate
when any of the following occur:
• The sensors are blocked.
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
are obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds less than
4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking
space.
254
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Cross Traffic Alert Behavior When
Trailer is Attached
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an
approved trailer tow module and tow bar,
the system turns off when you attach a
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
Cross traffic alert remains on when you
attach a trailer in vehicles that come with
blind spot information system with trailer
tow under the following conditions:
• You connect a trailer.
• The trailer is a bike rack or cargo rack
with a maximum length of 3 ft (1 m).
• You set the trailer length to 3 ft (1 m)
in the information display.
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 248).
Switching the System On and Off
To switch the system on or off, adjust the
setting. Depending on your vehicle options,
the setting could be in the following:
• Information display. See General
Information (page 109).
• Touchscreen. See Settings (page 531).
Note: The system turns on every time you
switch the ignition on. To permanently
switch the system off, contact an authorized
dealer.
Cross Traffic Alert Indicator
E268294
When the system detects an
approaching vehicle, a tone
sounds, a warning lamp
illuminates in the relevant exterior mirror
and arrows appear in the information
display to show which side the
approaching vehicle is coming from.
Note: If arrows do not display, a message
appears in the information display.
If the system malfunctions, a warning lamp
illuminates in the instrument cluster and
a message appears in the information
display. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could alert you, even when there is nothing
in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing further away from your vehicle.
Cross Traffic Alert Information Messages
ActionMessage
Displays instead of indication arrows when the system
detects a vehicle. Check for approaching traffic.
Cross Traffic Alert
Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system sensors. Clean
the sensors. If the message continues to appear, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle.Cross Traffic Alert Deac-
tivated Trailer Attached
255
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
STEERING
Hydraulic Power Steering
To help prevent damage to the power
steering system:
• Do not hold the steering wheel at its
furthest turning points for more than
three to five seconds when the engine
is running.
• Avoid continuously steering back and
forth with elevated engine RPM as this
may overheat the system. If trying to
free a stuck vehicle, pause between
attempts to allow the power steering
system to cool or seek assistance.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool.
• Do not operate the vehicle if the power
steering pump fluid level is below the
MIN mark on the reservoir.
• Some noise is normal during operation.
If excessive, check for low power
steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your dealer.
• Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused
by low power steering fluid. Check for
low power steering pump fluid level
before seeking service by your dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump
reservoir above the MAX mark on the
reservoir, as this may result in leaks
from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down
or if you switch the engine off, you can
steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort.
If you have any steering components
serviced or replaced, install new fasteners.
Many fasteners have coatings with thread
adhesive, or have prevailing torque
features you cannot reuse. Do not reuse a
bolt or nut. Torque fasteners to
specifications.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• An improperly inflated tire.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Electronic Torque Overlay Steering
(If Equipped)
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays
in the information display. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Switch the ignition off. After at least 10
seconds, switch the ignition on and
watch the information display for a
steering system warning message. If a
steering system warning message
returns, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
WARNING: If the system detects
an error, you may not feel a difference in
the steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. Failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
256
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
The electronic torque overlay steering
system adds supplemental steering assist
to the hydraulic gear when needed,
dependent on vehicle conditions such as
vehicle speed, steering wheel angle, and
steering wheel torque. The hydraulic
steering system provides the majority of
steering assistance. The electronic torque
overlay enables features such as pro trailer
backup assistance and lane departure
warning.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, your vehicle loses electric
power steering assistance. The steering
system still operates, and you can steer
your vehicle with hydraulic assist. Steering
your vehicle with only hydraulic assist
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
Adaptive Learning (If Equipped)
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
you must drive your vehicle a short
distance before the system relearns the
strategy and reactivates all systems.
Adaptive Steering (If Equipped)
Note: The adaptive steering system has
diagnostic checks that continuously monitor
the system. If the system detects a fault, a
message displays in the information display.
If a red warning message displays, stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. The
message may clear if the fault is no longer
present. If an adaptive steering system
warning message appears each time you
start your vehicle, have the system checked
as soon as possible.
The adaptive steering system continually
changes the steering ratio with changes to
vehicle speed, optimizing the steering
response in all conditions. The system also
changes when you switch on the
transmission tow/haul feature. When you
select the tow/haul button, the adaptive
steering system reduces vehicle sensitivity
to steering inputs at higher vehicle speeds,
while maintaining the ease of parking and
maneuverability at low speeds.
Note: The adaptive steering system is
designed with a locking device. With the
lock engaged, the adaptive steering system
remains mechanically locked at a fixed
steering ratio. You may also notice a click
when you switch the vehicle on or after you
switch it off, as the lock disengages or
engages.
Note: If your vehicle loses electrical power
or detects a fault when you are driving, the
system automatically shuts down and you
retain normal steering function with a fixed
steering ratio. During this time it is possible
that the steering wheel may not be straight
when the vehicle is driving straight ahead.
In addition, the driver may notice that the
steering wheel angle required to steer the
vehicle may be different.
257
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Note: During parking maneuvers, the
adaptive steering system balances the driver
work load for various steering wheel inputs
and vehicle loading conditions. Under
extreme operating conditions the system
locking device may engage. This strategy
prevents overheating and permanent
damage to the adaptive steering system.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
detect vehicles that are driving in a
different direction, cyclists or animals.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
operate during hard acceleration or
steering. Failure to take care may lead
to a crash or personal injury.
WARNING: The system may fail or
operate with reduced function during
cold and severe weather conditions.
Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can
adversely affect the system. Keep the
front camera and radar free of snow and
ice. Failure to take care may result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Some situations and
objects prevent hazard detection. For
example low or direct sunlight, inclement
weather, unconventional vehicle types,
and pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Take additional care if
your vehicle is heavily loaded or you are
towing a trailer. These conditions could
result in reduced performance of this
system. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system cannot
help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on
this system to replace driver judgment
and the need to maintain a safe distance
and speed.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System
The Pre-Collision Assist system is active
at speeds above approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h) and pedestrian detection is active
at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
E156130
258
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching
another stationary vehicle, a vehicle
traveling in the same direction as yours, or
a pedestrian within your driving path, the
system provides three levels of
functionality:
1. Alert
2. Brake Support
3. Active Braking
E255268
E156131
Alert: When active, a flashing visual
warning appears and an audible warning
tone sounds.
Brake Support: The system helps reduce
the impact speed by preparing the brakes
for rapid braking. The system does not
apply the brakes. If you press the brake
pedal, the system could apply additional
braking up to maximum braking force, even
if you lightly press the brake pedal.
Active Braking: Active braking may
activate if the system determines that a
collision is imminent. The system may help
the driver reduce impact damage or avoid
the crash completely.
Note: Brake Support and Active Braking are
active at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
If the vehicle has a radar sensor or Adaptive
Cruise Control, then Brake Support and
Active Braking are active up to the maximum
speed of the vehicle.
Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though the manufacturer recommends
using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would
lead to fewer and later system warnings.
Note: The Pre-Collision Assist system
disables when you select 4X4 LOW, Deep
Snow/Sand mode, Rock Crawl mode, or
when you manually disable AdvanceTrac™.
Distance Indication and Alert (If
Equipped)
Distance Indication and Alert is a function
that provides the driver with a graphical
indication of the time gap to other
preceding vehicles traveling in the same
direction. The Distance Indication and Alert
screen in the display screen shows one of
the graphics that follow.
259
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
E254791
If the time gap to a preceding vehicle is
small, a red visual indication displays.
Note: Distance Indication and Alert
deactivates, and the graphics do not display
when Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
Time GapDistance GapGraphicsSensitivitySpeed
>0.9sec>82 ft (25 m)GreyNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
0.6sec —
0.9sec
56–82 ft
(17–25 m)
YellowNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
<0.6sec<56 ft (17 m)RedNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
You can adjust the following settings by
using the information display controls. See
General Information (page 109).
• You can change Alert and Distance
Alert sensitivity to one of three settings.
• You can switch Distance Indication and
Alert on or off.
• If required, you can switch Active
Braking on or off.
• If required, you can switch the entire
Pre-Collision Assist feature on or off.
Note: Active braking automatically turns
on every time you switch the ignition on.
260
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Note: If your vehicle has a radar sensor, we
recommend that you switch the system off
if you install a snow plow or similar object
in such a way that it may block the radar
sensor. Your vehicle remembers the selected
setting across key cycles.
Blocked Sensors
E307836
Camera.1
Radar sensor (if equipped).2
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
or camera appears in the information
display, the radar signals or camera images
have become obstructed. If your vehicle
has a radar sensor, it is located behind the
fascia cover in the center of the lower grille.
With a blocked sensor or camera, the
Pre-Collision Assist system may not
function, or performance may reduce. The
following table lists possible causes and
actions for when this message displays.
Camera Troubleshooting
ActionCause
Clean the outside of the windshield in front
of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is
dirty or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the camera to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The windshield in front of the camera is
clean but the message remains in the
display screen.
261
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Radar Troubleshooting (If Equipped)
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display
screen.
Pre-Collision Assist disables itself. The
system automatically reactivates a short
time after the weather conditions improve.
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog is interfering
with the radar signals.
Pre-Collision Assist disables itself. The
system automatically reactivates a short
time after the weather conditions improve.
Swirling water or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
radar checked for proper coverage and
operation.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end
impact.
Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the camera's field
of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs and your vehicle
has a radar sensor, the radar sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detections. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
at the camera or a potential misalignment
condition, a message may display in the
information display indicating temporary
sensor unavailability. When operational
conditions are correct, the message
deactivates. For example, when the ambient
temperature around the sensor decreases
or the sensor automatically recalibrates
successfully.
DRIVE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Selectable Drive Modes
The system delivers a driving experience
through a suite of sophisticated electronic
vehicle systems. These systems optimize
steering, handling and powertrain
response. This provides a single location
to control multiple system's performance
settings.
Changing the drive mode automatically
changes the functionality of the following
systems:
262
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintains your vehicle control
in adverse conditions or
high-performance driving.
• Electronic throttle control enhances
the powertrain response to your inputs.
• Transmission controls are optimized
with shift schedules tuned to each
terrain.
Using the System
The system tailors your vehicle
configuration for each mode you select.
Column Shifter
E249567
To change the drive mode setting, press
the drive mode button. The drive mode
selection menu appears in the instrument
cluster and allows you to select through
the available drive modes.
E225310
Normal – For everyday driving.
This mode is a perfect balance
of excitement, comfort, and
convenience.
WARNING: Do not use tow/haul
when the road surface is slippery. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle.
E246592
Tow/Haul – For improved
transmission operation when
towing a trailer or a heavy load.
This mode moves upshifts to higher engine
speeds to reduce the frequency of
transmission shifting. This mode also
provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which slows your vehicle and assists
you in controlling your vehicle when
descending a grade. The amount of
downshift braking provided varies based
on the amount you press the brake pedal.
E295420
Deep Snow/Sand – For snow or
soft, dry sand.
E295413
Eco – For efficient driving. This
mode helps deliver maximum
fuel efficiency and helps to
increase driving range.
E295414
Slippery – For less than ideal
road conditions such as snow or
ice covered roads. Use this mode
for crossing terrain where loose, wet or
slippery material covers a firm surface.
Slippery mode lowers throttle response
and, if equipped with automatic
transmission, optimizes shifting for slippery
surfaces.
E225315
Rock Crawl – For optimum
rock-climbing ability. Rock crawl
mode prompts you to put your
vehicle in 4x4 Low. Rock Crawl mode
optimizes the throttle and transmission
response to provide you additional control
of your vehicle. See Using Four-Wheel
Drive (page 207).
E130458
Some drive modes reduce
traction and stability control
performance and the warning
indicator illuminates in the instrument
cluster.
263
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Note: Your vehicle starts in the last selected
drive mode for appropriate modes when
starting the vehicle within two hours of the
last key off. If the vehicle has been off for
more than two hours, a drive mode reminder
prompt displays on the instrument cluster
which requires you to confirm before the
vehicle returns to the last selected drive
mode.
Note: Mode changes are not available when
the vehicle ignition is off. In drive (D), only
some modes may be available.
Note: The system has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor the system for
proper operation. Certain drive modes are
not available based on the gearshift
position. If a mode is unavailable due to a
system fault or change in gearshift position,
the mode defaults to Normal.
264
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
Payload
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
265
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
WARNING: The
appropriate loading capacity of
your vehicle can be limited either
by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the
vehicle should carry). Once you
have reached the maximum
payload of your vehicle, do not
add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
266
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
WARNING: Exceeding the
Safety Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight limits can
adversely affect the
performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR
specified on the certification
label.
WARNING: Do not use
replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the
original tires because they may
lower your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the
original tires do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any
vehicle weight rating can
adversely affect the
performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
267
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
label.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
268
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: When loading
the roof racks, we recommend
you evenly distribute the load,
as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may
handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance,
when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
BED RAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: When sliding the ramp
up or down, take care not to get your
fingers or hands caught in the
mechanism. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Make sure that you
correctly install the ramp to the tailgate
plate. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not step or sit on
the ramp when it is in the stowed
position. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Only install the ramp
within the prescribed ramp angles.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
Note: The ramp maximum capacity is
800 lb (363 kg).
Note: Verify the ramp is on stable ground
before usage.
Note: For loading and unloading
equipment, your ramp should be set
between 10 degrees upward and 26 degrees
downward to avoid damage to the ramp
claw and tailgate plate.
Note: When using your vehicle for off-road
operation, remove the bed ramps from the
vehicle and store them in a safe location
away from your vehicle.
269
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
Using the Bed Ramp
1. Remove the front and rear cables.
E194380
2. Open the cam lever arms and unscrew
the cam bolts.
3. Remove the ramp from the ramp
holder.
E211150
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
the ramp to the open position.
Note: You can use a smooth surface tool
to rotate the stops.
E194382
5. Slide the ramp claw onto the tailgate
plate.
E194383
6. Pull the location pin outward and
extend the ramp until the pin is seated
in the usage position, then set the ramp
on even ground.
270
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
Stowing the Bed Ramp
1. Pick up the ramp. Pull the location pin
outward.
2. Slide the ramp into the storage position
until the location pin locks.
Note: Make sure the proper pin location has
been applied for your bed size.
3. Slide the ramp claw off of the tailgate
plate.
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
the ramp to the closed position.
E194391
5. Place the ramp into the ramp holder.
6. Install the cam bolts and close the cam
lever arms.
7. Attach the front and rear cables.
Note: Make sure you properly secure the
locking cable. If the locking cable is
unsecured, you may hear a rattling noise.
Installing the Ramp Holder
E194387
1. Hook the top of the ramp holder over
the mounting plate and rotate the
ramp holder into position.
E194388
2. Slide the ramp holder studs upwards
into the installed position.
3. Tighten the ramp holder nut.
Note: The nut should be on the upper stud.
271
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR
specified on the certification
label.
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and personal injury.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the lowest rating capacity for
your vehicle or trailer hitch.
Overloading your vehicle or
trailer hitch can impair your
vehicle stability and handling.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control
of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not cut,
drill, weld or modify the trailer
hitch. Modifying the trailer hitch
could reduce the hitch rating.
Note: To prevent your trailer from
accumulating distance, and the
trailer information status appearing
when you restart your vehicle after
disconnecting your trailer, you must
deactivate your trailer. Using the
information display, go to the
Towing menu and then the Select
Trailer option. Select the No active
trailer option. See Information
Displays (page 109).
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 329).
Your vehicle may have ability to
modify trailer towing features.
See General Information (page
109).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
272
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
265).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
273
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
TRAILER REVERSING AIDS (IF
EQUIPPED)
Pro Trailer Backup Assist With
Trailer Reverse Guidance
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
WARNING: This system is an extra
driving aid. It does not replace your
attention and judgment, or the need to
apply the brakes. This system does NOT
automatically brake your vehicle. If you
fail to press the brake pedal when
necessary, you may collide with another
vehicle.
This feature helps you to steer your vehicle
when reversing with a trailer by:
• Using the control knob with Pro Trailer
Backup Assist.
• Using the steering wheel with Trailer
Reverse Guidance.
Each trailer you use with your vehicle has
to be setup once.
You must take care to follow the setup
process accurately to correctly place the
sticker or sensor.
Contact your dealership if you need
assistance setting up your trailer.
Note: Your vehicle saves the trailer
information when you enter it into the
system. You can add a maximum of 10
trailers to the system.
Note: The system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices.
Note: You must always be aware of your
vehicle and trailer combination, and the
surrounding environment.
Note: The system does not detect or
prevent your vehicle or trailer from making
contact with obstacles in the surrounding
environment.
Note: Keep in mind that the front end of
your vehicle swings out when changing the
direction of the trailer.
Note: The system relies on user
measurements to determine sticker
placement or user installation of a sensor
to determine system limits. It is critical to
correctly take the key measurements or
properly install the sensor. Incorrect
measurements or sensor placement can
result in the improper function of the system
up to and including contact between your
vehicle and trailer. Even with correct
measurements and sensor placement, the
system cannot determine if the trailer body
may contact your vehicle. Check the
clearance between your vehicle and trailer,
especially for sharp turns.
Note: The system limits vehicle speed when
backing up. The system is not a replacement
for proper use of the throttle and brake
pedals.
Note: The system does not support backing
up when towing multiple trailers. If you are
towing more than one trailer, you must
disconnect the additional trailers before
using the system.
274
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Positioning Your Vehicle and
Trailer
Hitch your trailer to your vehicle and
connect the electrical wiring harness.
Check to make sure that the wiring is
working. See Essential Towing Checks
(page 295).
E209759
Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a
level surface.
For best results, make sure that your trailer
rides level with the ground when you hitch
your vehicle. More information on selecting
your towbar is available in the Towing
section. See Towing (page 272).
E209760
Make sure that the trailer and your vehicle
are in line with each other. You can do this
by putting the transmission in drive (D) and
pulling straight forward.
Setting Up the System
E318266
1. Press the button to switch the system
on.
2. Use the controls on the steering wheel
to select the option to add a trailer in
the information display. See General
Information (page 109).
3. Add a personalized name for the trailer
using the screen prompts. Use the
down arrow to scroll to the preferred
letter and then press the right arrow to
advance to the next letter. Press OK to
continue.
4. Select the Trailer Brake Type.
Note: Select Default Electric/Surge/None
if your trailer has electric, surge or no brakes.
5. Select the Trailer Brake Effort.
275
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Note: The default option is Low. We
recommend this for most trailers. If the
trailer brakes require more initial voltage, or
if you prefer more aggressive braking, select
Medium or High.
6. Select the trailer type.
Note: The system may prompt you to setup
Trailer Blind Spot before continuing the
setup process.
7. Select whether you want to add Pro
Trailer Backup Assist.
Conventional Trailer Setup (If
Equipped)
The following are examples of
conventional trailers.
E311876
Placing the Sticker
You must place the sticker in an area
visible by the rear view camera.
Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps
turn on to improve visibility.
Note: An assistant can help to carry out the
following procedure.
Note: Make sure nothing can obstruct the
rear view camera's view of the sticker. For
example, items such as a jack handle or
wiring.
Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry and
clean horizontal surface. For best results,
apply the sticker when temperatures are
above 32°F (0°C).
Note: Do not move stickers after placing
them. Do not re-use any stickers if removed.
Note: You can purchase additional stickers
through your authorized dealer.
E310619
Use the supplied measurement card, a
tape measure and pen to carefully mark
the area to attach the sticker. The sticker
is in the back cover pocket of your quick
start guide. Make sure the entire sticker is
within the green zone between the two
arcs or distance markers on the diagram,
and is also visible in the rear view camera
display.
Once you have found the correct location,
place the sticker.
Taking the Measurements
After you place the sticker on your trailer,
you must take some measurements.
Note: You must take accurate
measurements for the system to properly
operate.
276
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Note: When rounding in inches, round
upward if the measured length is a quarter
inch or greater. Round downward if the
measured length is less than a quarter inch.
For example, 12.25 in (31.11 cm) would be
rounded up to 12.50 in (31.75 cm). 12.13 in
(30.8 cm) would be rounded down to
12.00 in (30.48 cm).
Note: When rounding in centimeters, round
to the nearest whole centimeter. If the
measurement is less than 0.2 in (0.5 cm)
round downward. If the measurement is
more than or equal to 0.2 in (0.5 cm) round
upward. For example, 11.9 in (30.3 cm)
would be rounded down to 11.8 in (30 cm).
12.0 in (30.5 cm) would be rounded up to
12.2 in (31 cm).
Note: Use consistent metric or imperial
units as required by your country or vehicle.
The measurement card requires you to
record four key distances: A, B, C and D.
Record the trailer name for these
measurements.
E209806
A
B
C
D
D
The horizontal distance from the
license plate to the center of the
ball hitch on the trailer.
A
The horizontal distance from the
center of the ball hitch to the
center of the sticker.
B
The point to point distance from
the rear view camera to the
center of the sticker.
C
The horizontal distance from the
tailgate to the center of the
trailer axle or axles.
D
Note: Round distance D to the nearest
inch.
Note: Distance D is the center of the axles
for trailers with more than one axle.
Entering the Measurements
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter
each of the measurements. Use the up and
down arrows to increase or decrease the
numbers, as necessary. Press OK to
confirm each measurement. When you add
the last measurement, the information
display shows all the measurements you
entered. You can choose to confirm or
change the measurements.
Confirming the Sticker Location
Check the rear view camera display to see
if the system identifies the sticker. The
system marks the sticker with a red circle.
Confirm that the red circle shows over the
sticker image in the rear view camera
display.
Note: If the system cannot locate the
sticker, try cleaning the camera lens. Make
sure the sticker is within the zone indicated
in Placing the Sticker.
Calibrating the System
To complete setup, drive your vehicle
straight forward between 4–24 mph
(6–39 km/h), as directed by the
information display.
The information display shows a message
during calibration and after calibration is
complete
277
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Note: Calibration steps for conventional
trailers, fifth wheel and gooseneck trailers
vary. Calibration instructions for fifth wheel
and gooseneck trailers are in the following
section.
Note: Keep the steering wheel straight
during the calibration process. If the steering
wheel is in a turned position, the calibration
pauses.
Note: For best results, do not calibrate the
system at night.
Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailer
Setup (If Equipped)
The following are examples of fifth wheel
and gooseneck trailers.
E311877
Installing the Sensor
E315959
E316145
To use the system with a fifth wheel or
gooseneck trailer, you must install a
sensor. Refer to the instructions in the
sensor kit for proper installation.
Note: Make sure the arrows on the sensor
housing are facing up. Mount the sensor to
a vertical part of the trailer that pivots and
moves when you turn your vehicle. Do not
mount to a stationary surface or to the truck
side of the fifth wheel trailer hitch.
Note: You need to replace the 7/4 way
connector in the bumper with the
recommended 7/12 pin connector if your
vehicle did not come with the fifth wheel
prep package. See your authorized dealer.
278
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Note: If your vehicle has the fifth wheel
prep package, you have everything you need.
If your vehicle does not have the fifth wheel
prep package, see your authorized dealer to
purchase the sensor kit and the 7/12 pin
connector.
Calibrating the System
During calibration, the system determines
the trailer length. The system supports
trailer lengths of 10–39 ft (3–11.94 m)
distance from the hitch point to the center
of the axle or axles.
To calibrate the system, you need an area
where you can safely drive forward and
turn left or right. An open parking lot is an
ideal place to perform the calibration.
Drive straight at approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) to align the trailer behind your
vehicle. The information display and center
screen provide you with instructions and
tells you when the system is ready for a
turn. Turn left or right whenever you are
ready and in a safe turning area.
Note: You need to turn approximately 90
degrees to calibrate the system.
Note: The information display shows if you
are going too slow or fast. Calibration
pauses if the speed is outside the required
range of 2–16 mph (4–25 km/h).
Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist
To use the system, press the button and
watch the information display. Use the
controls on the steering wheel to highlight
the trailer, then press OK to select the
trailer.
E318266
When the system locates the sticker or
confirms the sensor is connected, the
display prompts you to shift into reverse
(R). The system turns on.
Note: If you use the steering wheel, the
system turns off and a warning appears in
the information display.
Follow the screen prompts to steer your
vehicle and trailer.
Note: You may have to drive forward to
straighten the trailer.
Take your hands off the steering wheel and
turn the control knob instead. The knob
acts as the steering control for the trailer.
Note: The more you turn the knob, the
sharper the trailer turns.
279
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
E209812
Turn and hold counterclockwise to make
the trailer go left.
E209813
Turn and hold clockwise to make the trailer
go right.
Note: Practice maneuvering with the
system in a safe open area first.
Note: Try backing up in a straight line and
then turning the knob slowly in the direction
you want to go.
Note: Quickly turning and releasing the
knob results in a jerky movement of the
vehicle.
E209814
Release the knob when the trailer is
moving in the direction you want. Control
the accelerator and brakes while the
system steers your vehicle automatically
to keep the trailer moving straight back.
Note: For fifth wheel and gooseneck
trailers, the weight and hitch position of
these trailers may make the trailer respond
differently to the knob input than
conventional trailers. You may need to
release the knob early or stop and pull
forward to align your truck and trailer when
returning to straight backing after making a
turn.
Note: Trailer maneuvering performance
may be compromised when using a fifth
wheel sliding hitch or pivoting pin box since
the system does not know the pivot point.
Note: You may have to use the knob to
correct the trailer direction when attempting
to move the trailer straight back under some
conditions.
Note: The system limits the vehicle speed.
Note: When you release the knob or turn it
to the center position, your vehicle follows
the trailer's path.
Using Trailer Reverse Guidance
This provides information graphics and up
to seven camera views to help you backup
your trailer when you use the steering
wheel. If you do not set up the system, you
can still use the camera views.
Note: The hitch angle graphic, automatic
view switching and straight backup mode
are not available if you do not set up the
system.
1. Shift into reverse (R). Press the rear
camera button to expand the menu.
2. Press the trailer icon.
3. Select the applicable trailer in the
information display.
280
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
4. When in this mode, you can see the
camera view on the side your trailer is
moving, or both sides when the trailer
is straight behind you. When the views
change with the trailer direction, it is
called auto mode. For example, if you
turn the trailer to the right, you see the
right side of your vehicle and trailer.
You can manually switch this view at
any time by using the arrow keys. To
return to auto mode, press the auto
button.
E224484
Straight backup mode. Use this
view when you want to keep your
trailer completely in line with
your truck. In this mode, a steering wheel
graphic shows you which way to turn your
steering wheel to keep your trailer straight.
Note: It may be helpful to shift your vehicle
into drive (D), pull forward and straighten
out the vehicle and trailer before engaging
straight backup mode.
System Camera Views
Use the view that helps you the most when
reversing your vehicle and trailer. You can
use these views in either mode.
Left and right arrows let you see other
views regardless of your trailer angle in rear
split view camera and Trailer Reverse
Guidance view.
Auto mode is the default view if you have
set up Trailer Reverse Guidance.
E310996
360 camera. Shows a 360
degree view on the right-hand
side of the screen, with the keep
out zone on the left-hand side of the
screen.
E310967
Rear view camera. Use this view
when you want to see your trailer
hitch or what is directly behind
your vehicle.
E310974
Rear split view camera. Shows
a 180 degree view of behind your
vehicle.
E310995
Bed camera. Shows the truck
bed and can be used for a fifth
wheel or gooseneck trailer.
E311776
Trailer AUX camera. Shows a
rear view camera image of what
is behind your trailer. This
camera needs to be purchased and
separately installed.
E310965
Trailer Reverse Guidance view.
Shows you a view of the sides of
your truck and your trailer. In
auto mode, this view moves as your trailer
moves so that you do not have to adjust
the camera as you turn.
E224486
This takes you back to the
360-degree camera system and
out of the Trailer Reverse
Guidance feature.
E315644
Auto. This feature returns you to
auto view.
Hitch Angle Graphic
After setting up a trailer, the display shows
a small top-view representation of your
truck and trailer.
This representation shows two,
different-colored lines. A black line shows
you where your trailer is in relation to your
vehicle. For Trailer Backup Assist, the white
line represents the amount the trailer can
turn based on knob input. For Trailer
Reverse Guidance, the white line
represents the amount the trailer can turn
based on steering wheel position.
281
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
A small representation shows you two
zones to warn you of a possible jackknife
condition. The view shows your truck and
trailer position and provides visual
feedback to help avoid a jackknife
condition entirely.
The yellow zone indicates you are
approaching the maximum controllable
trailer angle for the system. When your
trailer enters this zone, it is more difficult
to reduce the trailer turn when backing up.
It may be necessary to put your vehicle
back into drive (D) and pull forward to get
the truck and trailer back to an in-line
position.
The red zone indicates you have exceeded
the maximum controllable trailer angle for
the system. Put the truck into drive (D) and
pull forward until your trailer is no longer
in the red zone.
Troubleshooting - Conventional
Trailer
Note: The system requires a clear view of
the sticker placed on the trailer. You must
keep the camera lens and sticker clean for
the system to operate correctly.
Setup
The system is designed to be used with a
wide variety of trailers. There are some
trailers that do not have a proper surface
and location to mount the sticker. These
trailers are not supported. Attempts to
place the sticker on a surface that does
not meet the sticker placement
requirement listed in Step 3 of the setup
instruction or entering inaccurate
measurements to proceed through setup
can result in improper system function.
Accurate measurements are critical for
correct system function. If you need to
check measurements entered or change
them, you can access them through the
instrument cluster. Choose the option to
change the sticker from the change trailer
settings menu. It is not necessary to
remove the sticker if you are just reviewing
or changing measurements.
The following menu warnings or difficulties
may occur during setup. Tips to resolve
them are listed below.
Note: If you still experience issues with the
system's ability to detect the sticker, see
the information in the next section regarding
sticker lost during system operation.
Measurement A has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• The system is designed to work with
drawbars that have a license plate to
hitch ball center measurement of
9–20 in (23–52 cm) when installed.
Do not attempt to use drawbars that
have a length outside this range as the
system performance degrades and
could cause improper system function.
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from license plate to the hitch ball
center. A straight line distance that
includes any vertical rise or drop
increases the measurement and makes
it inaccurate. Inaccurate
measurements degrade system
performance and could cause improper
system function. See step 4 of the
setup instruction to review
measurement instructions.
282
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Measurement B has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the sticker placement
instruction in step 3 of the setup has
been followed. Stickers placed outside
the allowed zone adversely affects the
system performance and could cause
improper feature function.
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from center of sticker to the hitch ball
center. A straight line distance that
includes any vertical rise or drop
increases the measurement and
causes an inaccurate value to be
entered into the system. See step 4 of
the setup for additional measurement
instructions.
Measurement C has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure you follow the sticker
placement instructions in step 3 of the
setup. Stickers placed outside the
allowed zone adversely affect the
system performance and could cause
improper feature function. If you have
met all the criteria for sticker
placement and you see this message,
the sticker is either too far below or too
close to the camera to properly
recognize the sticker. For the system
to operate correctly, the sticker height
must be lowered if you receive the
minimum warning or the sticker height
must be raised if you receive the
maximum warning.
• Only one sticker can be placed on the
trailer for correct system function. The
previous sticker must be removed or
covered so only one sticker is visible to
the camera.
• Measurement B and C must be
measured again if a new sticker is
placed on the trailer.
Measurement D has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from tailgate to the center of the single
axle or the center of all the axles on the
trailer. See step 4 of the setup for
additional measurement instructions.
The system does not support trailer
lengths outside the range allowed by
the information display.
System is circling something beside the
sticker or system cannot find the sticker:
• Make sure the rear camera is clean and
the sticker is clearly visible in the
camera image. Clean the camera and
sticker if necessary.
• The camera system uses the entered
measurements to help locate the
sticker. Inaccurate sticker
measurements degrade the system’s
ability to locate the sticker. Verify the
measurements you enter into the
system are accurate.
• Remove the incorrectly circled label or
decal if possible.
• If you cannot resolve the issue, try a
new sticker location. The sticker
location must still meet the
requirements noted in step 3 of the
setup instructions. Only one sticker can
be placed on the trailer for correct
system function. The previous sticker
must be removed or covered so only
one sticker is visible to the camera.
Calibration
The system monitors various vehicle
parameters to ensure your vehicle is being
driven straight and the trailer is straight
behind your vehicle. Any steering input or
trailer movement pauses the calibration.
283
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
For best results:
• Use a long, straight, smooth and level
road when attempting to calibrate.
• Drive straight forward.
• Drive between 4–24 mph
(6–39 km/h).
System Operation
The following warnings or difficulties may
occur during feature operation. Tips to
resolve them are listed below.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ System is Not
Available or Trailer Reverse Guidance
System is Not Available:
• The system relies on many
sub-systems in your vehicle to correctly
operate. If those sub-systems are not
correctly operating, the system may
not be available.
• Low battery voltage is a condition that
prevents the system from operating.
Please make sure the battery is
correctly charged if the system is not
available.
• You may need to drive your vehicle
straight forward above 25 mph
(40 km/h) before the system is
available again.
• If the message continues to display,
see your authorized dealer for service.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Driving
Required to Initialize Steering Press Knob
to Exit or Trailer Reverse Guidance Driving
Required to Initialize Steering Press OK to
Exit:
• The steering system needs to learn
internal parameters to fully enable the
feature. Drive your vehicle straight
forward above 25 mph (40 km/h) for
approximately 5 minutes.
• This may occur when your vehicle is
new, the battery voltage is too low, the
battery has been disconnected or your
steering system has been serviced.
Sticker lost:
• If the system cannot initially find the
sticker, it may be necessary for you to
change the lighting conditions by
moving the vehicle and trailer or
waiting until conditions change.
• Check for the following if you receive
the lost sticker message while using
the system.
• Stop your vehicle as soon as the
message displays.
• Make sure the sticker is visible and the
pattern is discernable in the rear view
camera image.
• Clean the sticker and camera to make
sure they are unobstructed.
• Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free
cloth and water.
• Clean the sticker with isopropyl rubbing
alcohol sprayed directly onto the
sticker, and then wipe clean with a soft
cloth.
• Remove any items that may be
blocking the view of the sticker.
Depending on your trailer configuration
and any equipment mounted to your
trailer, it is possible for the sticker to be
blocked from view of the camera as it
rotates on the hitch ball but not be
blocked during setup. Remove the
obstruction if possible. It may be
necessary to remove the sticker from
its current location if the obstruction
cannot be cleared. Place a new sticker
that is visible to the camera in all
positions of the trailer behind your
vehicle.
284
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
• Placing the sticker on a surface angled
away from the vehicle reduces
performance. Use a drawbar that
positions the trailer level to the ground
when attached to the vehicle. This
typically provides a level surface to
mount the sticker. Place the sticker on
a bracket or other object when no level
surface is available.
• Make sure the entire sticker is on a flat
surface that is completely visible to the
camera. Do not fold the sticker over an
edge on the trailer frame. This can
degrade performance.
• Shadows on the sticker may affect
tracking performance under some
lighting conditions. Moving the sticker
to another location within the allowed
placement area may improve
performance. Use the change sticker
option in the information display menu
if you move the sticker.
• You can change your sticker location
by going into the information display
menu, selecting trailer options,
selecting change trailer settings and
then selecting the change sticker
option. The previous sticker must be
removed. ONLY ONE STICKER
SHOULD BE PLACED ON THE TRAILER
FOR CORRECT SYSTEM FUNCTION.
• The camera system uses the entered
measurements to help locate the
sticker. Inaccurate measurements
reduce the system’s ability to locate
the sticker. Check the measurements
entered into the system are correct.
Refer to step 4 of setup for instructions
on measurements.
• You can change your measurement by
going into the information display
menu, selecting trailer options,
selecting change trailer setting and
then selecting the change sticker
option. Disregard the prompt to remove
this sticker and continue to the next
step if you only plan to update the
measurements for the current sticker
location.
System does not reverse straight:
• Factors such as the drawbar
connection to the hitch receiver, road
camber, road grade and compliance in
the trailer suspension can influence
how straight the system is able to
reverse your trailer when the knob is
not turned. You can compensate for
the trailer drifting to the right or left by
slowly turning the knob until the trailer
is following your preferred path and
then holding the knob in that position.
If you would like to recalibrate the
system for straight backing, you can do
so with the following procedure.
• Go into the information display menu,
select trailer options, select change
trailer setting and then select the
change sticker option. Your saved
measurements display. Do not change
them but continue to confirm
measurements. Once you confirm the
measurements, the system then
prompts you to perform the calibration
procedure.
285
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
System consistently shows Pro Trailer
Backup Assist™ Stop now Maximum trailer
angle Press Knob to Exit:
• The system uses your measurements
to determine sticker position and
establish system limits. Accurate
sticker placement and trailer
measurements provide the best
system performance. If you are
consistently receiving this warning, it is
likely there is an issue with sticker
placement or the entered
measurements. Make sure that the
sticker is placed correctly based on
step 3 and the measurements were
made correctly according to step 4.
The troubleshooting guide for trailer
measurements can also be reviewed
for help in making measurements.
• To change sticker location or change
trailer measurements, go into the
information display menu, select trailer
options, select change trailer setting
and then select the change sticker
option.
• If the sticker location needs to be
changed, the previous sticker must be
removed and a new sticker needs to
be placed on the trailer. ONLY ONE
STICKER SHOULD BE PLACED ON THE
TRAILER FOR PROPER SYSTEM
FUNCTION.
• Disregard the prompt to remove this
sticker and continue to the next step if
you only plan to update the
measurements for the current sticker
location.
System consistently shows Pro Trailer
Backup Assist™ Stop Now Take Control
of Steering Wheel:
• The system displays this warning when
it can no longer steer the vehicle and
you must take over steering. There are
four reasons why this warning displays
and additional information regarding
the reason for the warning is available
on the center display.
• The steering wheel is touched when
under system control. Avoid touching
the wheel during system operation.
• The maximum speed for feature
operation is exceeded. System
performance is optimized at slower
speeds. Reverse slowly.
• The sticker was lost by the camera
system. Once your vehicle is stopped,
additional warnings indicate the sticker
was lost. Refer to sticker lost
troubleshooting tips.
• An internal condition for system
operation was not met which requires
your vehicle to return to manual control
of the steering. Using the system for an
extended period of time can cause the
steering system to heat up and turn off
Pro Trailer Backup Assist steering
control to protect itself. The system
may require a cool down time of up to
30 minutes. Keep the system off and
drive forward at a normal speed or
switch the vehicle off.
Note: The system is designed to be used
with the same trailer connection every time
the trailer is chosen from the selection
menu. When using a different drawbar or a
different pin hole on drawbars with more
than one, connecting the drawbar to your
vehicle affects the trailer measurements.
Take the measurements again and update
if required.
286
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Troubleshooting - Fifth Wheel and
Gooseneck Trailer
Setup
The system is designed to be used with a
wide variety of trailers. There are some
trailers that do not have a proper surface
and location to mount the sensor. These
trailers are not supported. Attempts to
install the sensor in a manner that does
not meet the requirements can result in
improper system function.
To correctly install the trailer sensor:
• Attach to vertical surface with the
arrows pointed straight up.
• If you are not sure, use a level to check
that the attachment surface is vertical.
• Securely fasten the sensor so that it is
rigidly mounted and does not shake or
wobble.
• Install within the range of the 12 way
connector so that when the trailer
swings the wire harness does not
stretch, pinch or pull.
If the system displays Pro Trailer Backup
Assist™ Sensor Not Detected Refer to
Owner's Manual Press Knob to Exit or
Trailer Reverse Guidance Sensor Not
Detected Refer to Owner's Manual Press
OK to Exit:
• Check that the 12 way connector is fully
inserted into the 12 way socket. The red
rubber seal is not visible when the
connector is fully inserted.
• Check that the wiring harness sensor
connection is fully inserted at the trailer
sensor.
• Check for damaged wiring between the
12 way connector and the trailer sensor.
• If you have a 12 way connector inside
the bed and in the bumper, ensure that
only a single sensor is connected.
Note: If you did not purchase the fifth wheel
prep pack, you need to replace the 7/4 way
trailer connector in your bumper with a 7/12
pin connector. See your authorized dealer.
Calibration
The calibration process is required for the
system to determine the trailer length. The
system supports trailer lengths of 10–39 ft
(3–11.94 m) distance from the hitch point
to the center of the axle or axles. The
calibration process consists of a straight
forward drive followed by a turn. During
the straight drive, the system monitors
various vehicle parameters to make sure
your vehicle is being driven straight and the
trailer is straight behind your vehicle. Any
steering input or trailer movement during
this straight drive pauses the calibration.
During the turn, the system monitors
various vehicle parameters to make sure
your vehicle and trailer are correctly
turning.
For best results:
• Use a smooth and level road when
attempting to calibrate.
• Steer and smoothly turn and avoid
abrupt steering inputs.
• Drive between 2–16 mph (4–25 km/h).
• Make a typical 90 degree corner turn.
Turning too shallow does not allow the
system to calibrate.
The typical calibration process results in
the system displaying messages in the
information display. The system also
displays additional warnings if the vehicle
or trailer motion is not within the
calibration limits.
287
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
If the system remains on one message for
an extended time, is not progressing
through the typical calibration steps or if
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected. Shift to Park Press Knob to Exit,
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected. Refer to Owner's Manual. Press
Knob to Exit or Trailer Reverse Guidance
Trailer Not Detected. Refer to Owner's
Manual. Press OK to Exit displays, check
the following:
• Verify the sensor is correctly installed.
See Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailer
Sensor Installation.
• Verify the trailer length is within the
allowed range of 10–39 ft (3– 11.94 m).
• Verify you are calibrating on a smooth
road surface.
Repeat calibration on a different route if
you have verified the previous checks.
System Operation
The following warnings or difficulties may
occur during system operation. Tips to
resolve them are listed in the following
section.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ System is Not
Available or Trailer Reverse Guidance
System is Not Available:
• The system relies on many
sub-systems in your vehicle to correctly
operate. If those sub-systems are not
correctly operating, the system may
not be available.
• Low battery voltage is a condition that
prevents the system from operating.
Please make sure the battery is
correctly charged if the system is not
available.
• If the message continues to display,
see your authorized dealer for service.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Driving
Required to Initialize Steering Press Knob
to Exit or Trailer Reverse Guidance Driving
Required to Initialize Steering Press OK to
Exit:
• The steering system needs to learn
internal parameters to fully enable the
feature. Drive your vehicle straight
forward above 25 mph (40 km/h) for
approximately 5 minutes.
• This may occur when your vehicle is
new, the battery voltage is too low, the
battery has been disconnected or your
steering system has been serviced.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Sensor Not
Detected Refer to Owner's Manual Press
Knob to Exit or Trailer Reverse Guidance
Sensor Not Detected Refer to Owner's
Manual Press OK to Exit:
• Check that the 12 way connector is fully
inserted into the 12 way socket. The red
rubber seal is not visible when the
connector is fully inserted.
• Check that the wiring harness sensor
connection is fully inserted at the trailer
sensor.
• Check for damaged wiring between the
12 way connector and the trailer sensor.
• Only one sensor can be connected to
your vehicle at a time. If you have a 7/12
pin connector in the truck bed and in
the bumper, check to make sure that
only one sensor is connected.
Note: If you did not purchase the fifth wheel
prep pack, you need to replace the 7/4 way
trailer connector in your bumper with a 7/12
pin connector. See your authorized dealer.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected. Refer to Owner's Manual. Press
Knob to Exit or Trailer Reverse Guidance
Trailer Not Detected. Refer to Owner's
Manual. Press OK to Exit:
• If the message continues to display,
see your authorized dealer for service.
288
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected Pull Forward to Initialize Press
Knob to Exit or Trailer Reverse Guidance
Trailer Not Detected Pull Forward to
Initialize Press OK to Exit:
• If the vehicle has not moved during this
key cycle, it must be driven forward to
initialize the sensing system.
• Extended operation at speeds below
1 mph (1 km/h) may cause the sensing
system to lose the trailer position and
the system needs to be re-initialized.
• Drive forward above 2 mph (3 km/h)
and the system indicates when it
initializes.
System repeatedly displays Pro Trailer
Backup Assist™ Stop Now System Not
Active Press Knob to Exit:
• System is not fully activated. Select
the trailer in the information display by
using the controls on the steering
wheel and wait until Pro Trailer Backup
Assist™ Backup Slowly Turn Knob to
Steer Press Knob to Exit displays
before starting to move backward.
• This displays if you backup during the
calibration process. Drive forward and
complete calibration.
System does not reverse straight:
• Verify sensor is correctly installed. See
Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailer
Sensor Installation.
• Factors such as the hitch connection,
road camber, road slope and
compliance in the trailer suspension
can influence how straight the system
is able to reverse the trailer when the
knob is not turned. You can
compensate for the trailer drifting to
the right or left by slowly turning the
knob until the trailer is following your
preferred path and then holding the
knob in that position.
System consistently shows Pro Trailer
Backup Assist™ Stop now Maximum trailer
angle Press Knob to Exit:
• Verify sensor is correctly installed. See
Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailer
Sensor Installation.
• Verify the correct trailer is selected in
the information display.
• The system may need to be
recalibrated. The system can be
recalibrated by using the information
display to delete the trailer and
repeating the setup process. If the
same sensor is installed on another
trailer, create a new trailer in the
information display and complete the
setup and calibration process for the
new trailer. If using the same sensor on
multiple trailers, disconnect the 7/12
pin connector when switching trailers.
See Setting Up The System.
System consistently shows Pro Trailer
Backup Assist™ Stop Now Take Control
of Steering Wheel:
• The system displays this warning when
it can no longer steer the vehicle and
you must take over steering. There are
four reasons why this warning displays
and additional information regarding
the reason for the warning is available
on the center display.
• The steering wheel is touched when
under system control. Avoid touching
the wheel during system operation.
• The maximum speed for feature
operation is exceeded. System
performance is optimized at slower
speeds. Reverse slowly.
289
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
• The trailer is not detected. Once your
vehicle is stopped, additional warnings
indicate the trailer is not detected.
Refer to trailer not detected
troubleshooting tips.
• An internal condition for system
operation was not met which requires
your vehicle to return to manual control
of the steering. Using the system for an
extended period of time can cause the
steering system to heat up and turn off
Pro Trailer Backup Assist steering
control to protect itself. The system
may require a cool down time of up to
30 minutes. Keep the system off and
drive forward at a normal speed or
switch the vehicle off.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway
control increases the risk of loss of
vehicle control, serious injury or death.
Ford does not recommend disabling this
feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (such as
hill climbing), the driver has significant
trailer towing experience, and can control
trailer sway and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE
SPEED appears in the information display.
The first thing to do is slow your vehicle
down, then pull safely to the side of the
road and check for proper tongue load and
trailer load distribution. See Load
Carrying (page 265).
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
WARNING: You must use
the heavy-duty drawbar pin
supplied with your vehicle when
using the heavy-duty hitch.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control
of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
Note: Vehicles with a 21,200 lb
(9,616 kg) hitch and above must
use the drawbar pin that came with
the vehicle. You can obtain a
replacement drawbar pin at your
authorized dealer.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Do not exceed 60 ft² (5.6 m²)
trailer frontal area for conventional
trailers. Do not exceed 75 ft² (6.9
m²) trailer frontal area for fifth
wheel and gooseneck trailers.
290
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Note: Exceeding this limitation
may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Note: Your vehicle could have
reduced performance when
operating at high altitudes and
when heavily loaded or towing a
trailer. When driving at elevation,
in order to match driving
performance as perceived at sea
level, reduce gross vehicle weight
and gross combination weight by
2% per 1,000 ft (300 m) elevation.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as your
vehicle's electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to use electric trailer
brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight
calculated using the formula
following the chart.
Pickup and box delete
Maximum
GCWR
Rear axle ratioEngineVehicle
19,500 lb
(8,845 kg)
3.73
6.2L gas
F-250
22,000 lb
(9,979 kg)
4.30
23,500 lb
(10,659 kg)
3.316.7L diesel
30,000 lb
(13,607 kg)
3.31, 3.55
6.7L diesel
1
21,800 lb
(9,888 kg)
3.55
7.3L gas
26,000 lb
(11,793 kg)
4.30
19,500 lb
(8,845 kg)
3.736.2L gas
F-350 single
rear wheel
291
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Pickup and box delete
Maximum
GCWR
Rear axle ratioEngineVehicle
23,000 lb
(10,433 kg)
4.30
30,000 lb
(13,607 kg)
3.31
6.7L diesel
30,000 lb
(13,607 kg)
3.55
23,500 lb
(10,659 kg)
3.73
7.3L gas
27,500 lb
(12,473 kg)
4.30
20,000 lb
(9,071 kg)
3.73
6.2L gas
F-350 dual rear
wheel
23,500 lb
(10,659 kg)
4.30
40,000 lb
(18,143 kg)
3.55
6.7L diesel
43,400 lb
(19,685 kg)
4.10
24,000 lb
(10,886 kg)
3.73
7.3L gas
28,000 lb
(12,700 kg)
4.30
45,300 lb
(20,547 kg)
4.30
6.7L dieselF-450
1
Trailer Tow Package.
292
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Chassis cab
Maximum
GCWR
Rear axle
ratio
EngineVehicle
30,000 lb
(13,607 kg)
3.73
6.7L diesel
F-350 single
rear wheel
26,000 lb
(11,793 kg)
4.30
7.3L gas
31,500 lb
(14,288 kg)
3.73
6.7L diesel
F-350 dual rear
wheel
32,500 lb
(14,741 kg)
4.10
22,500 lb
(10,205 kg)
3.37
7.3L gas
26,000 lb
(11,793 kg)
4.30
32,500 lb
(14,741 kg)
4.10
6.7L diesel
F-450 dual rear
wheel
35,000 lb
(15,875 kg)
4.30
28,000 lb
(12,700 kg)
4.887.3L gas
32,500 lb
(14,741 kg)
4.10
6.7L diesel
F-550 dual rear
wheel (17500/
18000 lb
GVWR)
37,000 lb
(16,782 kg)
4.30
28,000 lb
(12,700 kg)
4.887.3L gas
32,500 lb
(14,741 kg)
4.886.7L diesel
F-550 dual rear
wheel (19000/
19500 lb
GVWR)
40,000 lb
(18,143 kg)
293
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Chassis cab
Maximum
GCWR
Rear axle
ratio
EngineVehicle
28,000 lb
(12,700 kg)
4.887.3L gas
43,000 lb
(19,504 kg)
4.886.7L diesel
F-600 dual rear
wheel
30,000 lb
(13,607 kg)
4.887.3L gas
Calculating the Maximum
Loaded Trailer Weight for Your
Vehicle
1. Start with the gross combined
weight rating for your vehicle
model and axle ratio. See the
previous chart.
2. Subtract all of the following
that apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight.
• Hitch hardware weight, such as
a draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing hardware.
• Driver weight.
• Passenger(s) weight.
• Payload, cargo and luggage
weight.
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
This equals the maximum loaded
trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load is
considered part of the payload for
your vehicle. Reduce the total
payload by the final trailer tongue
weight.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer
to determine the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your vehicle if
you are not sure.
For additional information on
trailer weights, reference the RV
& Trailer Towing Guide available
at your authorized dealer, or
online.
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guidesWebsite
294
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
WARNING: Do not exceed the
maximum vertical load on the tow ball.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 553).
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
See Load Limits in the Load Carrying
chapter for load specification terms found
on the tire label and Safety Compliance
label and instructions on calculating your
vehicle's load.
Vehicles with a diesel engine have an
engine braking feature. See General
Information (page 217).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Some vehicles will have the ability to
modify trailer towing features. See
General Information (page 109).
Trailer Towing Connector
E163167
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left turn signal and stop lampYellow
Ground (-)White
Electric brakesBlue
Right turn signal and stop
lamp
Green
Battery (+)Orange
Running lightsBrown
Reverse lightsGrey
295
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a
factory brake controller, the Battery (+)
Orange wire is powered when you start the
engine and you apply the brakes at least
once when a trailer with brake lamps is
connected. If your vehicle is not equipped
with a factory brake controller, relays control
the system and it becomes active when you
power on your vehicle.
Dynamic Hitching Using the Rear
View Camera System
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
Use the centerline (B) guideline to assist
you in setting your steering wheel properly
to help align the trailer hitch and tongue.
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelines.A
Centerline.B
Fixed guideline: Green zone.C
Fixed guideline: Yellow zone.D
Fixed guideline: Red zone.E
Rear bumper.F
Fixed guidelines are always shown in the
display, but the active guidelines only
display when the steering wheel is turned.
To use active guidelines, turn the steering
wheel to point the guidelines toward an
intended path. If the steering wheel
position is changed while reversing, your
vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
296
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
The active guidelines fade in and out
depending on the steering wheel position.
The active guidelines are not shown when
the steering wheel position is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Refer to the Rear View Camera section for
additional information. See Rear View
Camera (page 229).
Hitches
Note: On pick-up trucks, the trailer hitch
provided on this vehicle enhances crash
protection for the fuel system. Do not
remove!
Note: Do not cut, drill, weld or modify trailer
hitches. Modifying trailer hitches can reduce
hitch rating.
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle. You
must distribute the load in your trailer so
that 10-15% for conventional towing or
15-25% for fifth wheel towing of the total
weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Hitch Components (If Equipped)
The following components are required.
Some are provided in certain vehicles.
• A trailer hitch with a 3 inch receiver and
a 5/8 inch hitch pin. Check the
stamped rating number on the pin to
determine the 21,200 lb (9,616 kg) or
24,200 lb (10,976 kg) hitch pin
capacity.
• A hitch pin sleeve stored in the glove
box to use when mounting the 3 inch
drawbar with the 3/4 inch pin hole.
• A cotter pin to help keep the hitch pin
in place.
Installing a 3 Inch Drawbar with 3/4
Inch Pin Hole
E247903
The pin sleeve should be inserted in the
3/4 inch pin hole of the 3 inch drawbar.
297
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
E247902
Remove reducers before inserting the 3
inch drawbar. Insert the drawbar into hitch
receiver.
E247909
Put the 5/8 inch hitch pin through pin hole.
Place the cotter pin around the neck of
hitch pin.
Weight-distributing Hitches
WARNING: Do not adjust the spring
bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper
is higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may
cause unpredictable handling, and could
result in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
halfway between H1 and H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
298
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Fifth-wheel Trailer Hitch (If Equipped)
Note: For a detailed description of
installation and other information, see the
Owner's Manual-5th Wheel Trailer Hitch.
Note: The mounting pads in the bed are
specifically designed for certain fifth-wheel
trailer hitches and gooseneck ball hitches.
Do not use these mounting pads for other
purposes.
Note: Contact an authorized dealer to
purchase gooseneck and fifth-wheel hitches
that are compatible with your vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
fifth-wheel prep package. This package
enables your vehicle to accept certain
fifth-wheel trailer hitches and gooseneck
ball hitches. The fifth-wheel trailer hitch
attaches to the four mounting pads in the
pick-up bed. An optional 7-pin trailer wiring
connector may be in the bed as well. The
gooseneck ball hitch is a separate
mounting pad from the fifth-wheel hitch,
located in the center of the bed.
Shorter pick-up boxes, such as the 6½-foot
box on the F-250 and F-350, provide less
clearance between the cab and the
fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailer
compared to longer box pick-ups, such as
an 8-foot box on the F-250 or F-350. When
selecting a trailer and tow vehicle, it is
critical to check that this combination
provides clearance between the front of
the trailer and tow vehicle for turns up to
90 degrees. Failure to follow this
recommendation could result in the trailer
contacting the cab of the tow vehicle
during tight turns that are typical during
low-speed parking and turning maneuvers.
This contact could result in damage to the
trailer and tow vehicle.
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper. Always connect the safety chains
to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer
hitch.
Install trailer safety chains to the trailer
hitch as recommended by the
manufacturer. Cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning tight corners. Do not allow the
chains to drag on the ground.
E265060
If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch,
make sure the latch is fully closed.
Note: If you install the hook with the latch
facing toward the rear of your vehicle, you
may not be able to fully close the safety
chain hook latch. If this occurs, install the
hook with the latch facing toward the front
of your vehicle.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a
trailer's hydraulic brake system directly
to your vehicle's brake system. Your
vehicle may not have enough braking
power and your chances of having a
collision greatly increase.
299
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
(If Equipped)
WARNING: The anti-lock brake
system does not control the trailer
brakes.
WARNING: Use the integrated
trailer brake controller to properly adjust
the trailer brakes and check all
connections before towing a trailer.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
Note: The integrated Ford brake controller
is compatible with trailers equipped with
electric-actuated drum brakes and
electric-over hydraulic brake systems.
Note: The integrated Ford brake controller
does not control hydraulic surge-style
brakes.
E183395
When used properly, the trailer brake
controller assists in smooth and effective
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes
with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
You can adjust the amount of initial trailer
brake output by selecting one of three
settings through the message center.
Ford has tested the trailer brake controller
to be compatible with several major
brands of electric-over-hydraulic trailer
brakes. Contact an authorized dealer for
information on which brands you can use.
The controller user interface consists of
the following:
A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons):
Pressing these buttons adjusts the
controller's power output to the trailer
brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase
the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer
braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer
braking). Pressing and holding a button
raises or lowers the setting continuously.
The gain setting displays in the message
center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
300
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
B: Manual control lever: Slide the control
lever to the left to switch on the trailer's
electric brakes independent of the tow
vehicle's. See the following Procedure for
adjusting gain section for instructions on
proper use of this feature. If you use the
manual control while the brake is also
applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer
brakes.
• Stop lamps: Using the manual control
lever lights both the trailer brake lamps
and your vehicle brake lamps.
Trailer brake control messages appear in
the information display as follows:
• TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER:
Shows the current gain setting.
• TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT=/ / / /
/ /: Displays when braking. The bars
indicate the amount of power going to
the trailer brakes.
• TRAILER CONNECTED: Displays
when the system senses a correct
trailer wiring connection.
• TRAILER DISCONNECTED: Displays
when the system senses a trailer
disconnection.
Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake
Controller Effort
Choose either the electric option for trailers
with electromagnetic drum brakes, or the
electric over hydraulic option for trailers
with these brake systems.
Trailer Brake Effort Setting
The trailer brake controller allows the user
to customize how aggressively the trailer
brakes engage. The default value is the low
setting and is the recommended setting
for most trailers. If your trailer's brakes
require more initial voltage, or if you prefer
more aggressive trailer braking, then select
either the medium or the high setting.
Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake
Controller Mode
Choose the low, medium or high setting
for the required initial trailer brake output.
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a
traffic-free environment at speeds of
approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
The gain setting adjusts the trailer brake
controller for the specific towing condition.
You should change the setting as towing
conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
road conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance while
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer
wheels may lead to trailer instability.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric
or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a
confirmation message appears in the
information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -)
buttons to increase or decrease the
gain setting to the desired starting
point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good
starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual control lever
completely.
301
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated
by squealing tires, reduce the gain
setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely,
increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a
point just below trailer wheel lock-up.
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel
lock-up may not be attainable even
with the maximum gain setting of 10.
Information Display Warning Messages
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose
the trailer brake controller to determine
exactly which trailer fault has occurred.
However, your Ford warranty does not cover
this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT
Displays in response to faults sensed by
the trailer brake controller, accompanied
by a single tone. If this message appears,
contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair. The
controller may still function, but with
degraded performance.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER
Displays when there is a short circuit on
the electric brake output wire.
If this message displays, with no trailer
connected, the problem is with your vehicle
wiring or trailer brake controller. Contact
an authorized dealer.
If the message only displays with a trailer
connected, the problem is with the trailer
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for
assistance. This can be a short to ground
(such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage
(such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency
breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes
may be drawing too much current.
Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
result.
• Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller.
• Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
above, whenever road, weather, trailer
or vehicle loading conditions change
from when the gain was initially set.
• Only use the manual control lever for
proper adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as
application during trailer sway, could
cause instability of trailer or tow
vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of
the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in reduced stability of trailer and tow
vehicle.
• The trailer brake controller is equipped
with a feature that reduces output at
vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h)
so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky
or harsh. This feature is only active
when applying the brakes using your
vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller.
• The controller interacts with the brake
control system and powertrain control
system of your vehicle to provide the
best performance on different road
conditions.
302
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
• Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing
the gain setting on the controller does
not affect the operation of your
vehicle's brakes.
• When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the
display and module shut down.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any
trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail
lamp wiring; this may damage the
electrical system resulting in fire. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible for assistance in proper trailer
tow wiring installation. Additional
electrical equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in park (P) to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• If your vehicle is equipped with
Adaptive Steering and you have
enabled Tow/Haul, the Adaptive
Steering system adjusts the steering
response to match your vehicle’s load.
The system reduces vehicle sensitivity
to steering inputs at higher vehicle
speeds while it maintains the ease of
parking and maneuverability at low
speeds.
• If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a
slower speed while towing may reduce
this tendency.
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
gross combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic
gear lubricant (if the axle is not already
filled with it). See Capacities and
Specifications (page 429).
303
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
• Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the transmission in park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
temporary or conventional spare tire. A
"temporary" spare tire is different in size
(diameter or width), tread-type
(All-Season or All Terrain) or is from a
different manufacturer than the road tires
on your vehicle. Consult information on the
tire label or Safety Compliance label for
limitations when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after you remove the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the
ignition is in the accessory or on position
when being towed.
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
and transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in neutral (N).
If you cannot move the transmission
into neutral (N), you may need to
override it. See Transmission (page
201).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 139).
304
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing, such as towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We have
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
Two-wheel Drive Vehicles
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels
on the ground, as vehicle or transmission
damage may occur. You must tow your
vehicle with all four (4) wheels off the
ground, such as when using a car-hauling
trailer.
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles
If towing your vehicle with wheels off the
ground it must be all four wheels, such as
when using a car-hauling trailer.
To tow a four-wheel drive vehicle with all
wheels on the ground, place the transfer
case in its neutral position and engage the
four-wheel-down towing feature.
Perform the steps in the following section
after positioning your vehicle behind the
tow vehicle and properly securing them
together.
Note: Make sure you properly secure your
vehicle to the tow vehicle.
Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground
1. Put the ignition in the on position, but
do not start the engine.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Rotate the four-wheel drive control to
2H.
4. Shift into neutral (N).
5. Using the instrument cluster display
controls on the steering wheel, select
Settings.
6. Select Advanced Settings.
7. Select Vehicle.
8. Select Neutral Tow.
9. Press and hold the OK button until a
confirmation message appears in the
information display.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts into its neutral position.
10. If you do not see a message in the
display, you must perform the
procedure again from the beginning.
11. Leave the transmission in neutral (N)
and turn the ignition off.
12. If your vehicle has an ignition key, you
must leave the key in the ignition
while towing.
Note: To lock and unlock your vehicle, use
the keyless entry keypad or extra set of keys.
13. If your vehicle has intelligent access,
switch the vehicle into accessory
mode. See Starting and Stopping
the Engine (page 168).
Note: You do not need to leave your keys
in the vehicle. You can lock and unlock your
vehicle as you normally do.
14. Release the brake pedal.
WARNING: Do not disconnect the
battery during recreational towing. It
prevents the transfer case from shifting
properly and may cause the vehicle to
roll, even if the transmission is in park
(P).
WARNING: Shifting the transfer
case to its neutral position for
recreational towing may cause the
vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is
in park (P). It may injure the driver and
others. Make sure you press the foot
brake and the vehicle is in a secure, safe
position when you shift to neutral (N).
Note: Failing to put the transfer case in its
neutral position while towing with all four
wheels on the ground will damage vehicle
components.
305
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
Note: You can check four-wheel-down
towing status at any time by opening the
driver's door or turning the ignition to the
accessory or on position. A message
displays in the information display
confirming your vehicle is in neutral tow.
When finished towing with all four wheels
on the ground return the transfer case to
its 2H position:
1. With your vehicle still properly secured
to the tow vehicle, put the ignition in
the on position, but do not start the
engine. If your vehicle has an ignition
key, switch the key to on. If your vehicle
has intelligent access, switch the
vehicle into accessory mode. See
Starting and Stopping the Engine
(page 168).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift out of neutral (N).
4. Release the brake pedal.
Note: If completed successfully, the
instrument cluster displays 2H and Neutral
Tow Disabled.
Note: If the indicator light and message do
not display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: If Shift Delayed Pull Forward
displays in the instrument cluster, a transfer
case blockage is present. See resolving the
shift delayed pull forward message
instructions after this section.
5. Apply the parking brake and disconnect
the vehicle from the tow vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake, start the
engine and shift the transmission to
drive (D) to make sure the transfer
case is out of neutral (N).
7. If the transfer case does not
successfully shift out of neutral (N),
set the parking brake until you can have
your vehicle serviced.
Resolving the Shift Delayed Pull Forward
Message
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Put the transmission into neutral (N),
and then start the engine.
3. With the engine running, shift the
transmission to drive (D) and let the
vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m).
4. Make sure the instrument cluster
displays that neutral tow is disabled.
306
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Towing
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under, and how you
maintain your vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
• Revving the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
weight carried).
• Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 5–10 mi
(12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The following off-road driving
information applies to Tremor package
equipped vehicles only.
307
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Hints
In addition to providing an excellent
on-road driving experience, your vehicle
excels at all types of off-road driving. Your
vehicle has been designed and equipped
to allow you to explore those places where
the road doesn’t take you, whether it’s a
forest trail or the open desert. Before going
off-roading, consult with your local
governmental agencies to determine
designated off-road trails and recreation
areas. Also, be sure to understand any
off-road vehicle registration requirements
for the area in which you plan on driving.
Tread Lightly® is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nation’ s wilderness areas. Ford joins
the U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help
preserve our national forest and other
public and private lands by treading lightly.
Before taking your vehicle off-roading, a
basic vehicle inspection should be
conducted to make sure that the vehicle
is in peak operating condition.
It is always recommended that at least
two vehicles are used while off-roading.
The buddy system helps make sure that
help is close at hand should a vehicle
become stuck or damaged. It is also wise
to take supplies such as a first aid kit,
drinking water, tow strap, cell or satellite
phone with you any time an off-road
excursion is planned.
Remove the front license plate before
off-roading to achieve optimal
performance.
Basic Off-road Driving Techniques
• Grip the steering wheel with thumbs
on the outside of the rim. This reduces
the risk of injury due to abrupt steering
wheel motions that occur when
negotiating rough terrain. Do not grip
the steering wheel with thumbs inside
the rim.
• Throttle, brake and steering inputs
should be made in a smooth and
controlled manner. Sudden inputs to
the controls can cause loss of traction
or upset the vehicle, especially while
on sloped terrain or while crossing
obstacles such as rocks or logs.
• Look ahead on your route noting
upcoming obstacles, changes to
surface texture, color changes and any
other factors which may indicate a
change in available traction. Adjusting
the vehicle speed and route
accordingly. During pre-run, mark
obstacles with GPS markers to make
sure appropriate speeds are used to
avoid potential vehicle damage.
• When driving off-road, if the front or
rear suspension is bottoming-out
and/or excessive contact with the
skid-plates is encountered, reduce
vehicle speed to avoid potential
damage to the vehicle.
• When running with other vehicles, it is
recommended that some form of radio
communication is used so the lead
vehicle can notify others of obstacles
that could cause damage.
• Always keep available ground
clearance in mind and pick a route that
minimizes the risk of catching the
underside of the vehicle on an obstacle.
308
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Hints
• When negotiating low speed obstacles,
applying light brake pressure in
conjunction with the throttle will help
prevent the vehicle from lurching and
will allow you to negotiate the obstacle
in a more controlled manner. Using 4L
also assists with this.
• Use and equip supplemental safety
equipment.
• Please consult your local off-road
group for other helpful tips.
• Off-roading requires a high degree of
concentration. Even if your local law
does not prohibit alcohol use while
driving off-road, Ford strongly
recommends against drinking alcohol
if you plan to off-road.
Crossing Obstacles
• Review the path ahead before
attempting to cross any obstacles. It is
best if the obstacles are reviewed from
outside the vehicle so that there is a
good understanding of the terrains
condition both in front of and behind
the obstacles.
• Approach obstacles slowly and slowly
creep the vehicle over.
• If a large obstacle such as a rock
cannot be avoided, choose a path that
places the rock directly under the tire
rather than the undercarriage of the
vehicle. This helps prevent damage to
the vehicle.
• Ditches and washouts should be
crossed at a 45 degree angle, allowing
each wheel to independently cross the
obstacle.
Hill Climbing
WARNING: Extreme care should
be used when steering the vehicle in
reverse down a slope so as not to cause
the vehicle to swerve out of control.
• Always attempt to climb a steep hill
along the fall line of the slope and not
diagonally.
• If the vehicle is unable to make it up
the hill, DO NOT attempt to turn back
down the slope. Place the vehicle in
low range and slowly back down in
reverse.
• When descending a steep slope, select
low gear and engage trail control. Use
the throttle and brake pedals to control
your descent speed as described earlier
in this section using trail control. Note
that trail control is functional in reverse
and should be used in this situation.
After Off-Road Driving
It is important to complete a full vehicle
inspection after off-road driving. Some
items to check include:
• Make sure that tires are inflated to
proper tire pressure as indicated on the
tire placard.
• Check the wheels and undercarriage
for built up mud or debris which can
cause vehicle vibration.
• Make sure that the grille and radiator
are clear of any obstructions that may
affect cooling.
• Make sure that the brakes are in proper
working order and free of any mud,
stones and debris, which can become
trapped around the brake rotor,
backing plate and caliper.
• Check that the air filter is clean and dry.
• Inspect for torn or punctured boots on
ball joints, half shafts, steering gears.
309
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Hints
• Inspect exhaust system for damage or
looseness.
• Inspect undercarriage fasteners. If any
are loose or damaged, tighten or
replace ensuring that the proper torque
specification is used.
• Inspect the tires for any cuts in the
tread or sidewall area. Also inspect the
sidewall for any bulge indicating
damage to the tire.
• Inspect the wheels for dents, cracks,
or other damage.
• Refit the front license plate if removed
previously.
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 mi
(1,600 km) before towing a trailer. Make
sure you use the specified engine oil. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
437).
Do not add friction modifier compounds
or special break-in oils during the first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation.
These additives may prevent piston ring
seating.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Do not drive through
flowing or deep water as you may lose
control of your vehicle.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
For Vehicles without Tremor Off-
Road Package
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Drive through water in an emergency
only and not as part of normal driving.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
hubs.
E176913
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
310
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Hints
For Vehicles with Tremor Off-Road
Package
Your vehicle equipped with Tremor
Off-Road package is capable of traveling
through water at a maximum depth of
33 in (837 mm). When driving through
standing water do not exceed crawl speed
of 4 mph (7 km/h).
• Always determine the depth before
attempting a water crossing.
• Proceed slowly and avoid splashing
water any more than is necessary. As
the water depth increases, vehicle
speed must be reduced to avoid
potential vehicle damage.
• Be aware that obstacles and debris
may be beneath the water’s surface.
• Keep the doors fully closed during the
water crossing.
• Upon completion of the water crossing,
slowly drive a short distance and check
the brakes for full effectiveness.
SNOW PLOWING
Ford recommends that the Super Duty
F-Series used for snow removal include
the snowplow package option.
Installing the Snowplow
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting
and installing the snowplow are in the Ford
Truck Body Builders Layout Book,
snowplow section, found at
www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. A typical
installation affects the following:
• Certification to government safety laws
such as occupant protection and airbag
deployment, braking, and lighting. Look
for an Alterer’s Label on the vehicle
from the snowplow installer certifying
that the installation meets all
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (FMVSS).
• The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity
(TARC) is on the lower right side of the
vehicle’s Safety Compliance
Certification Label. This applies to
Ford-completed vehicles of 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) GVWR or less. This is the
weight of permanently-attached
auxiliary equipment, such as snowplow
frame-mounting hardware, that can
be added to the vehicle and satisfy
Ford compliance certification to
FMVSS. Exceeding this weight may
require the auxiliary equipment installer
additional safety certification
responsibility. The Front Accessory
Reserve Capacity (FARC) is for
customer convenience.
• Rear ballast weight behind the rear
axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide
front-to-rear weight balance for proper
braking and steering.
• Front wheel toe may require
re-adjustment to prevent premature
uneven tire wear. Specifications are in
the Ford Workshop Manual.
• Headlight aim may require
re-adjustment.
311
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Hints
• The tire air pressures recommended
for general driving are on the vehicle’s
Safety Certification Label. The
maximum cold inflation pressure for
the tire and associated load rating is
on the tire sidewall. Tire air pressure
may require re-adjustment within these
pressure limits to accommodate the
additional weight of the snowplow
installation.
• Federal and some local regulations
require additional exterior lamps for
snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult
your authorized dealer for additional
information.
Operating the Vehicle with the
Snowplow Attached
Note: Do not use your vehicle for snow
removal until you have driven at least
500 mi (800 km).
Ford recommends vehicle speed does not
exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when
snowplowing.
If transporting a snowplow in summertime,
cooling system airflow may be blocked by
the snowplow. Change the snowplow
height or position to improve airflow to the
radiator or limit your vehicle speed to a
maximum of 45 mph (72 km/h).
The attached snowplow blade restricts
airflow to the radiator, and may cause the
engine to run at a higher temperature:
Attention to engine temperature is
especially important when outside
temperatures are above freezing. Angle
the blade to maximize airflow to the
radiator and monitor engine temperature
to determine whether a left or right angle
provides the best performance.
Follow the severe duty schedule in your
Scheduled Maintenance information for
engine oil and transmission fluid change
intervals.
Snowplowing with your Airbag
Equipped Vehicle
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of your
vehicle (including hood, bumper system,
frame, front end body structure, tow
hooks and hood pins) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not
modify or add equipment to the front
end of your vehicle.
Note: Please refer to the Body Builders
Layout Book for instructions about the
appropriate installation of additional
equipment.
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and
passenger airbag supplemental restraint
system. The supplemental restraint system
will activate in certain frontal and offset
frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
sufficient frontal deceleration.
Careless or high speed driving while
plowing snow that results in sufficient
vehicle decelerations can deploy the
airbags. Such driving also increases the risk
of accidents.
312
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Hints
Never remove or defeat the tripping
mechanisms designed into the snow
removal equipment by its manufacturer.
Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle
and the snow removal equipment as well
as possible airbag deployment.
Engine temperature while plowing
When driving with a plow, your engine may
run at a higher temperature than normal
because the attached snowplow blade will
restrict airflow to the radiator.
• If you are driving more than 15 mi
(24 km) at temperatures above
freezing, angle the plow blade either
full left or full right to provide
maximum airflow to the radiator.
• If you are driving less than 15 mi
(24 km) at speeds up to 45 mph
(72 km/h) in cold weather, you will not
need to worry about blade position to
provide maximum airflow.
Transmission operation while
plowing
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
• Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low)
when plowing in small areas at speeds
below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High)
when plowing larger areas or light snow
at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph
(24 km/h).
• Do not shift the transmission from a
forward gear to R (Reverse) until the
engine is at idle and the wheels have
stopped.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat
designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal
area. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot
move freely can cause loss of vehicle
control and increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Secure the floor mat
to both retention devices so that it
cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top
of the original floor mats. This could
result in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot
well while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped
under the pedals causing a loss of
vehicle control.
313
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Hints
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
314
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period supplied with
your vehicle.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
• Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the Owner's Manual kit.
United States vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
315
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This program
is eligible within Canada or the continental
United States.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside
coverage and benefits may differ from the
U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please call
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to
restart your vehicle.
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
• Press the button again to switch them
off.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER (IF EQUIPPED)
Every month you should visually inspect it
and verify that the indicator and the
canister show no damage, the trigger is in
good operating condition, and there is no
obstruction to removing the extinguisher.
Maintenance of the fire extinguisher is the
responsibility of the owner. The operating
instructions are on the fire extinguisher.
When replacing, make sure the new fire
extinguisher is of type dry powder ABC.
Note: Before use, remove the transparent
plastic packaging to prevent obstruction.
Note: Make sure you regularly check the
expiration date on the fire extinguisher.
WARNING TRIANGLE (IF EQUIPPED)
You can stow the warning triangle in the
rear load floor storage compartment.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or
death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
316
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Roadside Emergencies
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch to start position.
3. Switch off the ignition.
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
fuel pump.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
If your vehicle has a push button start
system:
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not attach the
cables to fuel lines, engine rocker covers,
the intake manifold or electrical
components as grounding points. Stay
clear of moving parts. To avoid reverse
polarity connections, make sure that you
correctly identify the positive (+) and
negative (-) terminals on both the
disabled and booster vehicles before
connecting the cables.
317
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: Do not attach the end
of the positive cable to the studs or
L-shaped eyelet located above the
positive (+) terminal of your vehicle’s
battery. High current may flow through
and cause damage to the fuses.
WARNING: Do not connect the end
of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A
spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
318
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Roadside Emergencies
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled
in specific markets.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Block the wheels to
help prevent the vehicle from moving.
WARNING: Unexpected and
possibly sudden vehicle movement may
occur if you do not take these
precautions.
319
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Roadside Emergencies
E143886
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
professional towing service or, if you are a
member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do
not approve a slingbelt towing procedure.
If you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by
any other means, vehicle damage may
occur.
We produce a towing manual for all
authorized tow truck operators. Have your
tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel
drive vehicle towed with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the
rear wheels off the ground.
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. However, it is acceptable to
use a wheel lift to raise the rear of your
vehicle so long as, depending on vehicle
configuration, you perform the following
before towing:
• If your vehicle has a manual-shift
transfer case, make sure the front
wheel hub locks are in the FREE
position before towing.
• If your vehicle has an electronic
shift-on-the-fly transfer case, make
sure you switch the four-wheel drive
control to the 2H position before
towing.
Note: Towing an electronic shift-on-the-fly
four-wheel drive vehicle with the front
wheels on the ground without disengaging
the front hubs may cause damage to the
automatic transmission.
Note: Towing a two-wheel drive vehicle or
an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel
drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground for more than 50 mi (80 km) or
faster than 35 mph (56 km/h) may cause
damage to the automatic transmission.
Note: Using wheel lift equipment to tow a
dual rear wheel vehicle requires removing
an outer rear wheel before towing.
TOWING POINTS
WARNING: Using recovery hooks
is dangerous and should only be done by
a person familiar with proper vehicle
recovery safety practices. Improper use
of recovery hooks may cause hook failure
or separation from the vehicle and could
result in serious injury or death.
320
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: Always slowly remove
the slack from the recovery strap prior
to pulling. Failure to do so can introduce
significantly higher loads which can
cause the recovery hooks to break off, or
the recovery strap to fail which can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never link two straps
together with a clevis pin. These heavy
metal objects could become projectiles
if the strap breaks and can cause serious
injury or death.
Your vehicle comes equipped with
frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
These hooks should never have a load
applied to them greater than the gross
vehicle weight rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are
secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
• Never use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
the stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help
absorb the energy in the event the
strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
weight rating specified on the
certification label.
• Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
vehicle in a straight line (within 10
degrees).
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the length of the recovery strap. This
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.
321
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
If your vehicle is configured as a
motorhome please call 1-800-444-3311
for support.
Additional information and resources are
available online:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-888-658-6805)
Website
www.ford.ca
Facebook
FordServiceCA (English)
FordServiceQC (Français)
Twitter
@FordServiceCA
322
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
323
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
For additional information refer to the
Better Business Bureau website.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
324
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Assistance Center:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:
325
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
E-mailFaxPhone
Customer Relation-
ship Center
apemcrc@ford.comN/AN/AAsia Pacific
atnclien@ford.comN/A+1-800-841-3673
Caribbean and
Central America
menacac@ford.com971 4 3327 266
Ford
Middle East
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441067
UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078
Kuwait
22280384
nafcrc@ford.comN/AN/ANorth Africa
atnclien@ford.comN/A+1-800-841-3673
Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands
ssacrc@ford.comN/AN/ASub-Saharan Africa
infokr1@ford.com or
infokr@lincoln.com
N/A+82-02-1600-6003South Korea
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Global Trade Services
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
326
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
327
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-
vehicles.html (English)
Website
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-
automobiles.html (French)
Website
1-800-333-0510Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1-800-565-3673Phone
328
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current
fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box
before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
The engine compartment fuse box is in the
engine compartment. It has high-current
fuses that protect your vehicle's main
electrical systems from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you need to reset some features.
See Changing the 12V Battery (page 368).
Replace fuses with the same type and
rating. See Changing a Fuse (page 335).
E306306
329
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Power point 4.20 A1
Power point 3.20 A2
Spot light module.10 A3
Four-wheel drive vacuum solenoid.10 A4
Active front steering.40 A5
Snow plow.10 A6
Trailer tow battery charge.30 A7
Anti-lock brake system module.10 A8
Electronic power assisted steering module.10 A9
Trailer tow park lamps.30 A10
Horn.20 A11
Torque overlay.30 A12
Power sliding rear window.30 A13
Body control module - battery power in feed 1.40 A14
Passenger seat power.30 A15
Powertrain control module.10 A16
Transmission control module.
Blind spot information system.10 A17
Four-wheel drive module.10 A18
Adaptive cruise control.5 A19
Heated mirrors.15 A20
Heated rear window.40 A21
On-board diagnostic module.10 A22
Smart data link connector.
Transmission control module.15 A23
Driver power seat.30 A24
Voltage quality module.25 A25
330
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Trailer tow battery charge.30 A26
Rear heated seats.20 A27
Glow plug (diesel).25 A28
Not used (gas).—
Electric power assisted steering motor.40 A29
Heated wiper park.10 A30
Power point 5.20 A31
Four-wheel drive module.25 A32
Alternator sense line 2.10 A33
Electric cooling fan (gas).50 A34
Supplemental air heater (diesel).
Power point 2.20 A35
Power point 1.20 A36
Anti-lock brake system pump.60 A37
Inverter.60 A38
Four-wheel drive module.25 A39
Starter motor solenoid.30 A40
Tailgate release solenoid.10 A41
Blower motor.40 A42
Trailer tow backup lamps.10 A43
Trailer tow lighting module.40 A44
Anti-lock brake system valve.30 A45
Compressed natural gas module power.30 A46
Supplemental air heater (diesel).50 A47
Not used (gas).—
Supplemental air heater (diesel).50 A48
Not used (gas).—
331
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Not used.—49
Heated and cooled seats.30 A50
Powertrain control module.20 A51
Compressed natural gas (gas).15 A52
Fuel rail pressure relief control (diesel).
Exhaust gas recirculation stepper motor (gas).20 A53
Universal exhaust gas oxygen sensors (gas).
Exhaust gas recirculation cooler bypass (diesel).
Urea pump motor controller (diesel).
Oxygen sensors.
A/C clutch relay power.20 A54
Fan clutch.
Rain sensor.5 A55
Windshield wipers.30 A56
Upfitter interface module.10 A57
Alternator sense line.10 A58
Power running boards.30 A59
Body control module - battery power in feed 2.40 A60
Telescopic mirror motors.10 A61
Trailer brake control.40 A62
Aftermarket e-brake access.
Multi-contour seats.15 A63
Ignition coil (gas).20 A64
Glow plug module (diesel).
Nitrogen oxide module (diesel).
Urea level and quality sensor (diesel).
Fuel pump.30 A65
A/C clutch solenoid.10 A66
Auxiliary lighting module.40 A67
Powertrain control module.10 A68
332
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Body control module power.60 A69
Trailer tow stop and turn lamps.30 A70
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is in the right-hand side of
the passenger footwell behind a trim panel.
To remove the trim panel, pull it toward
you and swing it away from the side. To
reinstall it, line up the tabs with the grooves
on the panel, and then push it shut.
Note: It may be easier to access the fuse
panel if you remove the finish trim piece.
Replace fuses with the same type and
rating. See Changing a Fuse (page 335).
E145984
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Not used.—1
Driver door pack switch.10 A2
Power sliding rear window switch.
Seat memory switch.7.5 A3
333
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Power lumbar motor.
Wireless charging module.
Not used.—4
Not used.—5
Power telescoping mirrors switch.10 A6
Front power windows switch.
Brake on-off switch.10 A7
Embedded modem.5 A8
Combined sensor module.5 A9
Not used.—10
Not used.—11
On-board diagnostic module.7.5 A12
Smart data link connector.
Climate control module.
Steering column control module.7.5 A13
Instrument cluster.
Not used.—14
SYNC.15 A15
Display.
Not used.—16
Active front steering module.7.5 A17
Park aid module.
Selectable drive modes switch.7.5 A18
Select shift switch.
Head up display.5 A19
Ignition switch.5 A20
Key inhibit solenoid.
Head up display.5 A21
In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.
Upfitter switches.5 A22
334
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Driver front door module.30 A23
Moonroof.30 A24
Not used.—25
Passenger front door module.30 A26
Not used.—27
Amplifier.30 A28
Adjustable pedals switch.15 A29
Brake on-off output to trailer brake controller and customer access
circuits.
5 A30
Remote keyless entry.10 A31
Radio.20 A32
Not used.—33
Run/start relay.30 A34
Not used.—35
Camera module.15 A36
Lane keeping system.
Auto-dimming interior mirror.
Rear heated seats.
Heated steering wheel.20 A37
Power windows.30 A38
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse
with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a
higher amperage rating can cause severe
wire damage and could start a fire.
E217331
335
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuses
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
Fuse Types
E207206
Fuse TypeCallout
Micro 2A
Micro 3B
MaxiC
MiniD
M CaseE
J CaseF
J Case Low ProfileG
336
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left hand side
of the instrument panel.
E166491
2. Go to the front of your vehicle and
locate the secondary release lever
under the front of the hood near the
center of your vehicle.
337
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
E190266
3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders
hold it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make
sure that it is closed properly and fully
latched.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 6.2L
E330427
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 368).A.
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 329).B.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 341).C.
338
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 353).D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 366).E.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 371).F.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 368).G.
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 367).H.
Engine oil fill cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 341).I.
Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 346).J.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 6.7L DIESEL
E310091
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 368).A
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 329).B
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 341).C
Secondary fuel filter. See Changing the Engine-Mounted and Diesel Fuel
Conditioner Module Fuel Filters (page 375).
D.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 343).E
339
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Engine cooling system coolant reservoir - primary high-temperature cooling
system. See Engine Coolant Check (page 353).
F
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 366).G
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 368).H
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 371).I
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 367).J
Secondary cooling system coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page
353).
K
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 349).L
Air filter restriction gauge. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 349).M
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 7.3L
E314803
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 371).A.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 360).B.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 366).C.
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 329).D.
340
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 367).E.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 341).F.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 344).G.
Air cleaner assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 349).H.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 6.2L
E161560
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 6.7L
DIESEL
E71362
A B
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 7.3L
E250320
Minimum.A
Nominal.B
Maximum.C
ENGINE OIL CHECK - 6.2L
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Run engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
341
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 337).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. For 6.2L V8 See
Under Hood Overview (page 338).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 341).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 429).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. For
6.2L V8 See Under Hood Overview
(page 338).
3. Only add engine oil that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 429).
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
342
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL CHECK - 6.7L
DIESEL
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 337).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 339).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 341).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 446).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 339).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
3. Add engine oil of the proper viscosity
and grade that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 446). You may
have to use a funnel to pour the engine
oil into the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
343
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Engine lubrication for severe
service operation
The following conditions define severe
operation for which engine operation with
SAE 5W-40 oil which meets Ford
specification, WSS-M2C171-F1, is
recommended. Oil and oil filter change
intervals will be determined by the
Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ as noted
previously.
ENGINE OIL CHECK - 7.3L
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Maintenance
(page 337).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See
Maintenance (page 337).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Maintenance (page 337).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 429).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
344
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
3. Add engine oil that meets the correct
specification.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
AND OIL FILTER
WARNING: Do not add engine oil
when the engine is hot. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, an
Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ calculates the
proper oil change service interval. When
the information display indicates: OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED, change the engine
oil and oil filter. See Information
Displays (page 109).
The engine oil filter protects your engine
by filtering harmful, abrasive or sludge
particles and particles significantly smaller
than most available will-fit filters. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 431).
1. Unscrew the oil filter and oil pan drain
plug and wait for the oil to drain.
2. Replace the filter.
3. Reinstall the oil pan drain plug.
4. Refill the engine with new oil. See
Engine Specifications (page 429).
5. For diesel engines, you need to reset
the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™. See
Information Displays (page 109).
Engine Lubrication for Severe
Service Operation
The following conditions define severe
operation:
• Frequent or extended idling such as
over 10 minutes per hour of normal
driving.
• Low-speed operation or stationary use.
• If the vehicle is operated in sustained,
ambient temperatures below -9°F
(-23°C) or above 100°F (38°C).
• Frequent low-speed operation, or
consistent heavy traffic less than
25 mph (40 km/h).
• Operating in severe dust conditions.
• Operating the vehicle off road.
• Towing a trailer over 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
• Sustained, high-speed driving at the
gross vehicle weight rating.
• Use of fuels with sulfur content other
than ultra-low sulfur diesel (ULSD).
• Use of high-sulfur diesel fuel.
Only use engine oil that meets our
specifications.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
345
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the down arrow
button, then from this menu
scroll to the following
message.
Truck Info
Press the OK button.Mainten-
ance
Monitor
Press the down arrow
button, then from this menu
scroll to the following
message.
Oil Life:
xxx%
Press the OK button.Oil Life
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Oil Life
Hold OK to
Reset
Oil Life: 100%
When the oil change indic-
ator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Repeat the process if the oil
change indicator does not
reset.
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 6.2L
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
Use the correct specification air filter
element. See Motorcraft Parts (page
431).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 553).
E226426
x4
1
2
4
3
1. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector, if required.
2. Remove the air intake tube securing
clamp.
3. Pull the air intake tube away from the
air filter housing.
4. Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover. Remove the air
filter housing cover.
346
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
E226427
5
5. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
6. Install in the reverse order.
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 6.7L DIESEL
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
Use the correct specification air filter
element. See Motorcraft Parts (page
434).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 553).
E310318
1. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector, if required.
2. Remove the clips (x3) that secure the
air filter housing cover. Remove the air
filter housing cover. Disconnect and
pull the air intake tube away, as
needed.
E310319
3. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
347
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
4. Remove the auxiliary foam filter from
the air filter housing.
5. To install, reverse the removal
procedure. The housing cover can be
oscillated slightly left to right to assist
with installation as needed, until
positioned such that all three clips can
be re-engaged.
Air Filter Restriction Gauge
E310420
The air filter restriction gauge is in the
upper housing of the air filter assembly.
Check the air filter restriction gauge
whenever you open the hood to carry out
general engine maintenance or at least
every 7,500 mi (12,000 km). If you operate
your vehicle in extremely dusty conditions,
check the gauge at least every 500 mi
(800 km) or two weeks, whichever occurs
first. Change the air filter element when
the restriction gauge reads near the
change filter line and the gauge is yellow.
Allowing the restriction gauge to reach
maximum affects engine performance and
fuel economy.
Operating your vehicle in heavy snowfall
or extreme rain conditions may allow
excessive amounts of snow or water into
the air intake system. This could restrict air
flow and cause the engine to lose power
or shut down.
After installing a new air filter element, you
must reset the gauge by pressing the reset
button.
After operating your vehicle during heavy
snowfall or extreme rain, do the following:
• Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open
the hood and clear any snow and ice
from the air filter housing inlet and
reset the air filter restriction gauge.
• Extreme rain: The air filter element
dries out after approximately 15–30
minutes of driving at highway speeds.
At the earliest opportunity, open the
hood and reset the air filter restriction
gauge.
Note: Do not remove the foam filter.
348
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 7.3L
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
Note: Operating your vehicle in heavy
snowfall or extreme rain conditions may
allow excessive amounts of snow or water
into the air intake system. This could plug
or soak the air filter that could cause the
engine to lose power or shut down.
When replacing the air filter element, use
a Motorcraft® air filter element. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 434).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 553).
E270820
1. Locate the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector on the air outlet
tube. Disconnect the mass air flow
sensor electrical connector.
E163756
2. Reposition the locking clip on the
connector, squeeze the connector and
pull it off of the air outlet tube.
E270821
3. Clean the area from around the air tube
to the air cover connection to prevent
debris from entering the system. Next,
loosen the bolt on the air tube clamp
so the clamp is no longer snug to the
air tube. It is not necessary to
completely remove the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air cleaner
housing.
349
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
E207259
x3
5. Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover. Push the air filter
cover toward the center of the vehicle
and up slightly to release it.
6. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
7. Install the new air filter element.
8. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. Ensure that you
align the tabs on the edge properly into
the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air filter
housing and tighten the air-tube clamp
bolt snugly. Do not over tighten
air-tube clamp bolt.
E163760
10. Reconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector to the outlet
tube. Make sure the locking tab on
the connector is in the locked
position.
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER
WATER TRAP - 6.7L DIESEL
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel
in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.
Your vehicle has a diesel fuel conditioner
module. The module is mounted between
the outboard side of the fuel tank and the
frame rail.
Note: The module is at the front of the fuel
tank or at the front of the aft-axle fuel tank
on some models.
350
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
You should drain water from the
module assembly whenever the
warning light illuminates or a
message appears in the information
display advising you to drain the water
separator. This occurs when approximately
6.76 fl oz (200 ml) of water accumulates
in the module. If you allow the water level
to exceed this level, the water may pass
through to the engine and may cause fuel
injection equipment damage.
Filter Location
Use the tables below to find the location
of your filter.
Pick-up Truck
Filter LocationBox LengthCab Type
Left side of fuel tank.
8 ft (2.4 m)Regular.
6.75 ft (2.057 m)
SuperCab.
In front of fuel tank.
8 ft (2.4 m)
6.75 ft (2.057 m)
Super Crew Cab.
Left side of fuel tank.8 ft (2.4 m)
Chassis Cab
Filter LocationFuel Tank TypeCab Type
Right side of fuel tank.Single midship fuel tankChassis Cab.
Right side of midship fuel
tank.
Aft axle/midship fuel tanksChassis Cab.
Front of fuel tank.Single aft axle fuel tankChassis Cab.
Draining the Diesel Fuel
Conditioner Module
1. Switch the engine off.
2. Access the underside of your vehicle.
351
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
E226475
2
3. Use the table to find the location of
your fuel filter.
E269861
4. Drain the diesel fuel conditioner
module. Turn the drain plug
counterclockwise until it stops. Do not
use any tools to loosen the drain plug.
Drain the filter, approximately 0.5 gal
(2 L), into an appropriate container.
Do not re-use the fuel drained from the
module.
5. Tighten the drain plug, turn it clockwise
until it stops and you feel a strong
resistance. Do not use any tools to
tighten the drain plug.
6. Prime the system by turning the key to
the on position for 30 seconds. Turn
the key to the off position, then the on
position again for another 30 seconds.
Repeat this twice.
352
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK -
6.2L
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in
the windshield washer reservoir. If
sprayed on the windshield, coolant could
make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system
is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid
can come out forcefully when you loosen
the cap slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 553).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We
recommend Robinair® Coolant and
Battery Refractometer 75240 (Rotunda
tool part number: ROB75240). We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use coolant or
windshield washer fluid outside of its
specified function and vehicle location.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant meeting the correct specification
in order to avoid plugging the small
passageways in the engine cooling system.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 437). Incorrect prediluted coolant
use can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
353
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant meeting the
correct specification. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 553).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
the cap clockwise until it contacts the
hard stop.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle.
Do not mix different colors or types of
prediluted coolant in your vehicle. Mixing
of prediluted coolant or using an incorrect
prediluted coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without prediluted
coolant in order to reach a vehicle service
location. On arrival do the following:
1. Drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the cooling system.
We recommend Motorcraft Premium
Cooling System Flush.
3. Refill with prediluted coolant as soon
as possible.
Water alone, without prediluted coolant,
can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
354
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40%
provides improved overheat
protection. Coolant concentrations
below 40% decrease the freeze and
corrosion protection characteristics of
the coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the
coolant temperature gauge moves toward
the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for
use during emergencies only. Operate
your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as
long as necessary to bring your vehicle
to rest in a safe location and seek
immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
mode, your vehicle will have limited
power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
355
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the
vehicle may not be able to accelerate
with full power until the coolant
temperature reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to pull off the road. You can continue
to drive your vehicle.
The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature
does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
356
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK -
6.7L DIESEL
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in
the windshield washer reservoir. If
sprayed on the windshield, coolant could
make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system
is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid
can come out forcefully when you loosen
the cap slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 553).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C). Check the coolant concentration
using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine
coolant when the engine is on or the
cooling system is hot. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use coolant or
windshield washer fluid outside of its
specified function and vehicle location.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
357
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification to avoid plugging the small
passageways in the engine cooling system.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 446). Do not mix different colors or
types of coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of
engine coolants or using an incorrect
coolant may harm the engine or cooling
system components and may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to our
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, immediately add
prediluted coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems
with a non-pressurized cap on the coolant
recovery system, add coolant to the
coolant recovery reservoir when the engine
is cool. Add prediluted coolant to the
maximum level. For all vehicles which have
a coolant degas system with a pressurized
cap, or if it is necessary to remove the
coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator,
follow these steps to add engine coolant:
1. Turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. Slowly unscrew the cap. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
3. Slowly fill the coolant reservoir with
prediluted engine coolant to within the
minimum and maximum range on the
engine coolant reservoir. If you
removed the radiator cap in an
overflow system, fill the radiator until
the coolant is visible and the radiator
is almost full. If you add coolant to
bring the level within the minimum and
maximum range when the engine is not
cold, the system may remain under
filled.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
the cap clockwise until it contacts the
hard stop.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the proper level.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved antifreeze concentrate
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 446).
Using water that has not been deionized
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion or plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without prediluted
coolant in order to reach a vehicle service
location. On arrival do the following:
1. Drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the cooling system.
We recommend Motorcraft Premium
Cooling System Flush.
3. Refill with prediluted coolant as soon
as possible.
Water alone, without prediluted coolant,
can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
358
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or non-specified
additives to the coolant. These can be
harmful and compromise the corrosion
protection of the coolant.
Engine and Secondary Cooling
System Refill Procedure
Perform this procedure when refilling the
engine or secondary cooling systems after
it has been drained or become extremely
low:
1. Before you remove the cap, turn the
engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick
cloth around the cap. Slowly turn cap
counterclockwise until pressure begins
to release.
3. Step back when the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure
has been released, use the cloth to turn
the cap counterclockwise and then
remove it.
5. Slowly add prediluted engine coolant
to the coolant reservoir until the
coolant level is within the minimum
and maximum range as listed on the
reservoir.
6. Reinstall the pressure relief cap.
7. Start and run the engine at 2000 rpm
for 2 minutes.
8. Shut the engine off, and remove the
pressure relief cap as previously
outlined.
9. If required, add prediluted engine
coolant to the coolant reservoir until
the coolant level is within the minimum
and maximum range as listed on the
reservoir.
10. Engine cooling system: Repeat steps
5 through 9 until the coolant level has
stabilized and is no longer dropping
after each step and the upper
radiator hose at the radiator is warm
to the touch, indicating that the
engine thermostat is open and
coolant is flowing through the
radiator.
11. Check the secondary cooling system.
Repeat steps 1 through 10 until the
coolant level has stabilized and is no
longer dropping after each step and
the lower passenger side of the
secondary radiator is warm to the
touch, indicating secondary
thermostat is open and coolant is
flowing through the entire system.
12. Check the coolant level in both
systems before you drive your vehicle
the next few times.
13. If necessary, add prediluted engine
coolant to the coolant reservoirs until
the coolant level is within the
minimum and maximum range as
listed on the reservoir. After you add
coolant, check the coolant
concentration.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
359
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
Coolant Change
Follow the specific mileage intervals, as
listed in the scheduled maintenance
information, to change the coolant. The
information display may display a message
to change coolant at this time. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 429).
Engine-driven Cooling Fan
Your vehicle may have an engine driven
cooling fan drive also called a fan clutch.
This fan drive changes the fan speed to
match the vehicle’s changing cooling air
flow requirements. Fan speed, fan noise
level and fuel consumption all will increase
based on the driving conditions that
include trailer towing, hill climbing, heavy
loads, high speed and high ambient
temperature, individually or in combination.
The fan drive is designed to provide the
minimum fan speed and resulting
minimum fan noise and fuel consumption
required to meet the ever-changing vehicle
cooling air flow requirements. You can hear
the amount of fan noise increasing and
decreasing as the engine power
requirements and vehicle driving conditions
change as you drive. This is normal to the
operation of your vehicle. You may also
hear high levels of the fan when the engine
is first started and should normally
decrease after driving for a short time.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK -
7.3L
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in
the windshield washer reservoir. If
sprayed on the windshield, coolant could
make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
360
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system
is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid
can come out forcefully when you loosen
the cap slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 553).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C). Check the coolant concentration
using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine
coolant when the engine is on or the
cooling system is hot. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use coolant or
windshield washer fluid outside of its
specified function and vehicle location.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 457). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to our
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
361
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems
with a non-pressurized cap on the coolant
recovery system, add coolant to the
coolant recovery reservoir when the engine
is cool. Add prediluted coolant to the
maximum level. For all vehicles which have
a coolant degas system with a pressurized
cap, or if it is necessary to remove the
coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator,
follow these steps to add engine coolant:
1. Turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
3. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with
prediluted engine coolant to within the
minimum and maximum range on the
engine coolant reservoir. If you
removed the radiator cap in an
overflow system, fill the radiator until
the coolant is visible and the radiator
is almost full. If coolant is added to
bring the level within the minimum and
maximum range when the engine is not
cold, the system may remain
underfilled.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
the cap clockwise until it contacts the
hard stop.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the proper level.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved antifreeze concentrate
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 457).
Using water that has not been deionized
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion or plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
Note: In case of emergency, you can add a
large amount of water without coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location.
Water alone, without coolant, can cause
engine damage from corrosion, overheating
or freezing. When you reach a service
location, you must have the cooling system
drained, flushed and refilled using the
correct specification prediluted coolant or
antifreeze concentrate. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 457).
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
362
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
Coolant Change
Change the coolant at specific mileage
intervals as listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. The information
display may display a message to change
coolant at this time. Add prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 429).
Engine-driven Cooling Fan (Fan
Clutch)
Your vehicle comes with an engine driven
cooling fan drive, also called a fan clutch.
This fan drive changes the fan speed to
match the vehicle’s changing cooling air
flow requirements. Fan speed, fan noise
level and fuel consumption all will increase
based on the driving conditions that
include trailer towing, hill climbing, heavy
loads, high speed and high ambient
temperature, individually or in combination.
The fan drive is designed to provide the
minimum fan speed, and resulting
minimum fan noise and fuel consumption
required to meet the ever changing vehicle
cooling air flow requirements. You will hear
the amount of fan noise increasing and
decreasing as the engine power
requirements and vehicle driving conditions
change as you drive. This is to be expected
as being normal to the operation of your
vehicle. High levels of fan noise might also
be heard when your engine is first started,
and should normally decrease after driving
for a short time.
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the
coolant temperature gauge moves toward
the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.
363
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
switches to alternating cylinder operation.
Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump
and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for
use during emergencies only. Operate
your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as
long as necessary to bring your vehicle
to rest in a safe location and seek
immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
mode, your vehicle will have limited
power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
shutting down to prevent engine damage.
In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the
vehicle may not be able to accelerate
with full power until the coolant
temperature reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.
364
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to pull off the road. You can continue
to drive your vehicle.
The air conditioning may turn on and off
during severe operating conditions to
protect the engine from overheating. When
the coolant temperature decreases to the
normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature
does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Your transmission is filled for life, and does
not need to be checked. Your transmission
does not consume fluid. However, if the
transmission slips or shifts slowly, or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
365
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
TRANSFER CASE FLUID
CHECK (IF EQUIPPED)
E164246
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the
fluid level.
3. Add only enough fluid through the filler
opening so that the fluid level is at the
bottom of the opening.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 429).
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNING: Do not use any fluid
other than the recommended brake fluid
as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use
of incorrect fluid could result in the loss
of vehicle control, serious personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid
from a sealed container. Contamination
with dirt, water, petroleum products or
other materials may result in brake
system damage or failure. Failure to
adhere to this warning could result in the
loss of vehicle control, serious personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid
to touch your skin or eyes. If this
happens, rinse the affected areas
immediately with plenty of water and
contact your physician.
WARNING: The brake system
could be affected if the brake fluid level
is below the MIN mark or above the MAX
mark on the brake fluid reservoir.
366
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
E170684
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface.
2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see
where the brake fluid level is relative
to the MIN and the MAX marks on the
reservoir.
Note: If the brake fluid level is between the
MIN and the MAX marks on the reservoir, it
is acceptable.
Note: If the brake fluid level is below the
MIN mark or above the MAX mark, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the
reservoir cap must remain in place and fully
tight, unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 429).
Brake Fluid Service Interval
Brake fluid absorbs water over time which
degrades the effectiveness of the brake
fluid. Change the brake fluid at the
specified intervals to prevent degraded
braking performance.
For detailed interval information, see
Scheduled Maintenance in your Owner's
Manual or your local maintenance guide.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Check the power steering fluid. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 553). If
adding fluid is necessary, use only
MERCON LV ATF
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient
temperature.
1. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It
should be between the MIN and MAX
range. Do not add fluid if the level is
within this range.
2. If the fluid level is low, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to between the MIN
and MAX range.
3. Switch the engine on.
4. While the engine idles, turn the steering
wheel left and right several times.
5. Switch the engine off.
6. Recheck the fluid level in the reservoir.
Do not add fluid if the level is between
the MIN and MAX range.
7. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small
amounts, continuously checking the
level until it is between the MIN and
MAX range. For proper fluid type, See
Capacities and Specifications (page
429). Be sure to put the cap back on the
reservoir.
367
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in
personal injury and damage to the
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a
battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your hands
after handling.
WARNING: This vehicle may have
more than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery
does not disconnect your vehicle
electrical system. Make sure you
disconnect the battery cables from all
batteries when disconnecting power.
Failure to do so may cause serious
personal injury or property damage.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When a battery replacement is required,
you must use a recommended
replacement battery that matches the
electrical requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery
vent tube, battery cover or shield.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained
by power from the battery. When the
battery is disconnected or a new battery
is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.
To restore the settings, do the following:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
368
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. Reset the
power windows bounce-back feature.
See Windows and Mirrors (page 94).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 474).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km)
to completely relearn the idle trim and
fuel trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
negative battery cable to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Battery Management System (If
Equipped)
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery
drain is detected, the system temporarily
disables some electrical systems to
protect the battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
displays to alert you that battery
protection actions are active. These
messages are only for notification that an
action is taking place, and not intended to
indicate an electrical problem or that the
battery requires replacement.
After battery replacement, or in some
cases after charging the battery with an
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
time to relearn the battery state of charge.
During this time your vehicle must remain
fully locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
of charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection
directly to the battery negative post. This
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
369
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, the
alignment of your headlamps should be
checked by your authorized dealer.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the right hand
portion of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the high intensity light zone is
not at the horizontal reference line, the
headlamp will need to be adjusted.
A
B
E223774
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
Note: A. LED headlamp.
370
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
B. Halogen headlamp.
6. Repeat steps 3 thru 5 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 40°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid
with antifreeze protection in cold
weather could result in impaired
windshield vision and increase the risk
of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 429).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER - 6.2L/7.3L
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
You can manually move the wiper arms
when the ignition is off. This allows for ease
of blade replacement and cleaning under
the blades.
E165804
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
371
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
A
E165794
2. Release the wiper blade lock (A) and
separate the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back on the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when you turn the ignition on.
• Replace wiper blades at least once per
year for optimum performance.
• You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNING: Switch the lamps and
the ignition off. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Bulbs can become hot.
Let the bulb cool down before removing
it. Failure to do so could result in
personal injury.
Use the correct specification bulb. See
Bulb Specification Chart (page 467).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
Front Park and Direction Indicator
Lamp Bulbs
Note: To access the right-hand side bulbs,
remove the air intake pipe. See Changing
the Engine Air Filter (page 346).
To access the left-hand side bulbs, remove
the washer reservoir filler tube. Vehicles with
diesel engine only.
E224990
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Headlamp Bulbs
Note: To access the right-hand side bulbs,
remove the air intake pipe. See Changing
the Engine Air Filter (page 346).
To access the left-hand side bulbs, remove
the washer reservoir filler tube. Vehicles with
diesel engine only.
372
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
E224991
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of children’s reach.
Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and
do not touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the headlamps are operated.
Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
E163826
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. To access the bulb, reach behind the
bumper.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Handle a halogen bulb carefully and
keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb
only by its plastic base and do not touch the
glass. The oil from your hand could cause
the bulb to break the next time the fog
lamps are operated.
Rear Lamps, Brake Lamps, Rear
Direction Indicator and Reversing
Lamp Bulbs
Pickup Models - Vehicles without Blind
Spot Information System
E223775
5
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Open the tailgate to expose the lamp
assemblies.
373
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
3. Remove the bolts from the tail lamp
assembly and carefully pull the lamp
assembly from the tailgate pillar by
releasing the two retaining tabs.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Pickup Models - Vehicles with Blind
Spot Information System
E224204
4
6
5
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Open the tailgate to expose the lamp
assemblies.
3. Remove the bolts from the tail lamp
assembly and carefully pull the lamp
assembly from the tailgate pillar by
releasing the two retaining tabs.
4. Remove the screws from the blind spot
information system module cover.
5. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
6. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Chassis Cabs
E163828
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the screws and the lamp lens
from lamp assembly.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Cargo Lamp and Central High
Mounted Brake Lamp Bulbs
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the screws and carefully pull
the lamp assembly from the vehicle to
expose the bulb sockets.
E187290
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
374
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
License Plate Lamp Bulb
E163830
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. To access the bulb, reach behind the
bumper.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
LED Lamps (If Equipped)
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
The following lamps may be LED:
• Headlamps.
• Front fog lamps.
• Rear lamps.
• High stop lamp and cargo lamp.
• License plate bulb.
CHANGING THE ENGINE-
MOUNTED AND DIESEL FUEL
CONDITIONER MODULE FUEL
FILTERS - 6.7L DIESEL
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel
in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.
Your vehicle has two fuel filters. The first
filter mounts on top of the engine on the
left-hand side. The second filter is inside
the diesel fuel conditioner module. The
module is attached to the fuel tank in
different locations depending on the
configuration of your truck. See table
below for configurations.
Note: The module is at the front of the fuel
tank or at the front of the aft-axle fuel tank
on some models.
Regular fuel filter changes are an
important part of engine maintenance;
failing to keep with the scheduled
maintenance could lead to engine
performance issues and fuel injection
system damage. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 553).
Use only recommended service parts
conforming to specifications. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 433).
Note: Using fuel that has high levels of
impurities may require more frequent filter
replacements than the service interval
specifies.
Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module
Filter
Filter Location
Use the tables below to find the location
of your filter.
375
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Pick-up Truck
Filter LocationBox LengthCab Type
Left side of fuel tank.
8 ft (2.4 m)Regular.
6.75 ft (2.057 m)
SuperCab.
In front of fuel tank.
8 ft (2.4 m)
6.75 ft (2.057 m)
Super Crew Cab.
Left side of fuel tank.8 ft (2.4 m)
Chassis Cab
Filter LocationFuel Tank TypeCab Type
Right side of fuel tank.Single midship fuel tankChassis Cab.
Right side of midship fuel
tank.
Aft axle/midship fuel tanksChassis Cab.
Front of fuel tank.Single aft axle fuel tankChassis Cab.
Removal
E247666
1. For 2017 models, disconnect the fuel
line quick connect coupling from the in
tank fuel pump. For 2018 models and
later, skip this step but insure that the
fuel filler cap is closed before draining
the filter. Failure to close the fill cap
results in the siphoning of the entire
fuel tank contents when you open the
drain screw.
2. Locate your filter.
376
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
E269861
3. Drain the diesel fuel conditioner
module. Turn the drain plug
counterclockwise until it stops. Do not
use any tools to loosen the drain plug.
Drain the filter, approximately 0.53 gal
(2 L), into an appropriate container.
Do not re-use the fuel drained from the
module.
E269862
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Fully loosen the bolts securing the
lower portion of the diesel fuel
conditioner module housing.
Note: Do not fully remove the bolts from
the lower portion of the diesel fuel
conditioner module housing.
6. Remove the lower portion of the diesel
fuel conditioner module housing.
E269863
7. Slide the filter element toward the
drain plug to disengage the securing
clips.
Installation
1. Slide the filter element into the housing
and fully engage the securing clips.
2. Install the lower portion of the housing.
Tighten the bolts until you feel a strong
resistance. Maximum torque 7 lb.ft
(9 Nm).
3. Connect the electrical connector.
4. Tighten the drain plug, turn it clockwise
until it stops and you feel a strong
resistance. Do not use any tools to
tighten the drain plug.
377
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Engine-mounted Fuel Filter
Although the fuel system is not fully
pressurized when the vehicle is off, some
residual pressure may remain in the fuel
system since it can take some time for the
pressure to completely bleed off.
Therefore, we recommend you place an
absorbent cloth below the filter connectors
to absorb any fuel that may drain.
The engine-mounted fuel filter is a plastic
disposable cartridge.
Removal
E226215
1
1. Disconnect the fuel lines by squeezing
the connector tabs and pulling the lines
straight off.
E226214
2
3
2. Rotate the filter fully counterclockwise
until the peg is at the far end of the slot.
3. Pull the filter straight up from the
bracket and discard the filter.
Note: No special air purge is necessary after
filter servicing. The fuel system purges the
air in the filters.
Installation
1. Install the new filter into the filter
bracket. Turn the filter clockwise to
lock it in place.
2. Reconnect the fuel lines.
3. Switch the ignition on for 30 seconds
and then switch the ignition off.
Repeat this operation six times in a row
to purge any trapped air from the fuel
system.
SPRING U-BOLT CHECK - F-
600
Check and tighten the U-bolt nuts after
your vehicle has been operated under load
for 1,000 mi (1,600 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Check and tighten the U-bolt nuts every
37,000 mi (60,000 km).
378
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Check and tighten the U-bolt nuts with
your vehicle at curb height and unloaded.
Inspect the U-bolt threads for rust and
debris. Clean the threads if contaminated.
U-bolt Nut Torque
Rear Axle
Note: Check and tighten the U-bolt nuts
evenly using a criss-cross pattern in the
following stages.
lb.ft (Nm)Stage
70 lb.ft (100 Nm)1.
150 lb.ft (200 Nm)2.
220 lb.ft (300 Nm)3.
300 lb.ft (400 Nm)4.
379
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-
A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
380
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces
immediately.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
• Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
381
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
Underbody
Regularly clean the underside of your
vehicle using water. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover
remove the cover before application of
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser.
Immediately rinse away any over spray.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE EXHAUST -
6.7L DIESEL
WARNING: Failure to maintain the
functional holes, in the tailpipe section
of the exhaust, clean and free of debris
or foreign material may result in the
holes becoming blocked or plugged. Do
not modify or remove the tail-pipe
382
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
section. Blocked or plugged holes or
removal/modification of the system
could result in elevated exhaust gas
temperatures which may result in
vehicle/property damage or personal
injury.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is
very high. Never work around or attempt
to repair any part of the exhaust system
until it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the diesel oxidation
catalytic converter and/or the diesel
particulate filter (DPF). The diesel
oxidation catalytic converter and/or the
DPF heats up to a high temperature after
only a short period of engine operation
and can stay hot even after the engine
is turned off. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
E163380
The visible holes in the exhaust tip and the
holes under the shield just inboard of the
right rear tire(s) are functional. The holes
need to be kept clear of mud/debris or
foreign material to maintain proper
function of the exhaust system. Clean and
remove debris or foreign material if present
as needed. Spraying with a hose during
regular washing of vehicle should help
keep holes clean and clear of debris or
foreign material.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
383
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the
side airbag system and affect
performance of the side airbag in a crash.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
Note: Cashmere and microfiber cloth fabric
is made of polyester microfiber with
micro-porous polyurethane. Using
commercially available fabric cleaners can
cause permanent damage.
Note: Do not use commercially available
leather and vinyl cleaning products on
cashmere or microfiber cloth fabric.
Note: Your vehicle may have cashmere or
microfiber cloth fabric on the seats,
headliner, floor mats and door panels.
Depending on the type of stain, use water,
lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
cleaning. For cleaning microfiber cloth,
refer to the following chart:
Cleaning ProcedureType of Stain
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing
with clean water.
Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup.
Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with
clean water. Avoid warm water because it
makes these substances coagulate.
Blood, egg, excrement or urine.
Use lukewarm water. If the color remains,
treat with lemon juice and then rinse.
Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola
and tea.
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing
with clean water.
Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry
with cream or chocolate, ice cream or
mustard.
Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water
and rinse by dabbing with clean water.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee
with sugar.
Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water.Dye transfer and all other stains.
384
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
cleaning the steering wheel or
instrument panel to avoid contamination
of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 385).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF
EQUIPPED)
Without King Ranch Edition
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing spots and stains
such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft
Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
385
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
With King Ranch Edition
Your vehicle has seating covered in
premium, top-grain leather that is
extremely durable, but still requires special
care and maintenance in order to preserve
longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning
maintains the appearance of the leather.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a
clean, damp cloth or soft brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap
and water solution.
• Clean spills as quickly as possible.
• Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather as
cleaners may darken the leather.
• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard,
orange juice or oil-based products on
the leather as they may permanently
stain the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning
products, alcohol solutions, solvents
or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl
or plastics.
Scratches
Because the leather in the seat comes
from genuine steer hides, there may be
evidence of naturally occurring markings,
such as small scars. These markings give
character to the seating covers and are
considered to be proof of a genuine leather
product.
In order to lessen the appearance of
certain scratches and other wear marks,
apply conditioner on the affected area
following the same instructions as in the
Conditioning section.
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner
are available at the King Ranch Saddle
Shop. Visit the website at
www.krsaddleshop.com, or call
1–800–282–KING (5464) in the United
States. If you are unable to obtain King
Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another
premium leather conditioner.
• Clean the surfaces using the steps
outlined in the Cleaning section.
• Make sure the leather is dry then apply
a nickel-sized amount of conditioner
to a clean, dry cloth.
• Rub the conditioner into the leather
until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry, then repeat the
process for the entire interior. If a film
appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean
cloth.
386
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Read the instructions before using cleaning
products.
CLEANING THE WHEELS
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if
available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you
use Ford approved bug and tar remover
if available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake
discs, brake pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
387
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast
idle with the climate controls set to
defrost until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if you disconnect the battery
cables.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
388
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
389
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. If you intend to change the size of
the wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 392).
You can find the recommended tire
inflation pressures can on the Tire Label,
which is on the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver door. You can also find this
information on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door latch post;
next to the driver seating position.
We strongly recommend maintaining these
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
fuel economy, and adversely affect the
way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
If your vehicle has a spare tire, set the
pressure to the highest value given for your
vehicle and tire size combination.
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a
seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
390
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.
Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive,
when selected, has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power transfer
unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you
to select different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel
Drive (page 207). For information on
transfer case maintenance, See
Maintenance (page 337). You should
become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your
vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the
initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
drive when the vehicle is moving can cause
a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not
cause for concern.
In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
spare tire relative to the remaining tires can
have an effect on the 4x4 system. If there
is a significant difference between the size
of a spare and the remaining tires,
four-wheel drive functionality may be
limited. See Using Four-Wheel Drive
(page 207).
How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded
condition. These differences that make
your vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
391
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 ©)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction
grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
392
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
393
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.
B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example).
394
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph (130
km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h).
These ratings are listed in the
following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
81 (130)M
87 (140)N
99 (159)Q
106 (171)R
112 (180)S
118 (190)T
124 (200)U
130 (210)H
149 (240)V
395
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
168 (270)W
186 (299)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number: This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the
tire meets all federal standards.
The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the
next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent
the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers
317 mean the 31st week of 1997.
After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are
identification codes used for
traceability. This information is
used to contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear 1½ times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
396
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
397
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single; defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
398
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
WARNING: Under-inflation
is the most common cause of
tire failures and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread
separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle
control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. The
Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
399
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure
to change the ride characteristics
of the vehicle. If you do not
maintain the inflation pressure at
the levels specified by Ford, your
vehicle may experience a condition
known as shimmy. Shimmy is a
severe vibration and oscillation in
the steering wheel after the vehicle
travels over a bump or dip in the
road that does not dampen out by
itself. Shimmy may result from
significant under-inflation of the
tires, improper tires (load range,
size, or type), or vehicle
modifications such as lift-kits. In
the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should
slowly reduce speed by either lifting
off the accelerator pedal or lightly
applying the brakes. The shimmy
will cease as the vehicle speed
decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the manufacturer’s recommended
cold inflation pressure which can
be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of 1
psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your
tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, (for
example, driven more than 1 mile
[1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A
hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be
significantly under-inflated.
400
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you have to drive a
distance to get air for your tire(s),
check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the
pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go
up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem
in the center of the valve. Then
recheck the pressure with your tire
gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare
tires, (see the Dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly
information for a description. Store
and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly information for
a description. Store and maintain
at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
Tire Inflation Information
WARNING: An inflated tire
and rim can be very dangerous
if improperly used, serviced or
maintained. To reduce the risk
of serious injury, never attempt
to re-inflate a tire which has
been run flat or seriously
under-inflated without first
removing the tire from the wheel
assembly for inspection. Do not
attempt to add air to tires or
replace tires or wheels without
first taking precautions to
protect persons and property.
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies
(if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords
in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light
truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be
performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped
according to Federal Occupational
Safety and Health Administration
regulations. For example, during
401
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
any procedure involving tire
inflation, the technician or
individual must utilize a remote
inflation device, and ensure that
all persons are clear of the
trajectory area.
WARNING: Always inflate
steel carcass tires with a remote
air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
E161437
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
402
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread
is worn down to one sixteenth of
an inch (2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING: Tires degrade
over time depending on many
factors such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
WARNING: In general, tires
should be replaced after six
years regardless of tread wear
or even if they have not been
used. However, heat caused by
hot climates or frequent
high-load conditions can
accelerate the aging process and
may require you to replace tires
more frequently.
403
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: You should
replace your spare tire when you
replace the road tires or after six
years due to aging even if it has
not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNING: Only use
replacement tires and wheels
that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type
(such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or
the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), or the
Tire Label which is located on
the B-Pillar or edge of the
driver’s door. If this information
is not found on these labels, then
you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
404
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: To reduce the
risk of serious injury, when
mounting replacement tires and
wheels, you should not exceed
the maximum pressure indicated
on the sidewall of the tire to set
the beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for
mounting pressures up to 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear
protection.
WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate
steel carcass tires with a remote
air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a
pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels are not designed to
be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, the
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
405
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Replacing a Tire That is
Greenhouse Gas Certified
The tires installed on this vehicle
at the factory as original
equipment are certified for
Greenhouse Gas and Fuel
Efficiency regulations.
Replacement tires must be of
equal or lower rolling resistance
level (TRRL or Crr). Consult with
your tire supplier(s) for
appropriate replacement tires.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle
is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do
not rapidly spin the tires;
spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A
tire can explode in as little as
three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the
wheels at over 34 mph
(55 km/h). The tires may fail and
injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits.
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road.
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking.
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
406
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension may
require alignment of all four
wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
WARNING: If the tire label
shows different tire pressures for
the front and rear tires and the
vehicle has a tire pressure
monitoring system, then you
need to update the settings for
the system sensors. Always
perform the system reset
procedure after tire rotation. If
you do not reset the system, it
may not provide a low tire
pressure warning when
necessary.
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometime
irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
E142548
Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles (front
tires at left of diagram).
407
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
E166988
Dual rear wheel drive vehicle - six
tire rotation (front tires at top of
diagram).
If your vehicle is equipped with
dual rear wheels it is
recommended that the front and
rear tires (in pairs) be rotated only
side to side. We do not
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a set. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be
adjusted for the tires new
positions in accordance with
vehicle requirements.
E227387
Note: When installing 17-inch dual
rear wheels, align the valve stems
facing each other.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the
same size, load index and speed rating
as those originally provided by Ford. Use
of any tire or wheel not recommended
by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. Additionally, the use of
408
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
non-recommended tires and wheels can
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.
Follow the Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (on the
door hinge pillar, door latch post or the
door edge that meets the door latch
post, next to the driver seat), or Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle
handles.
WARNING: Do not use snow chains
on snow-free roads.
Note: Do not use snow chains on vehicles
with LT275/65R20 or LT 285/75R18 sized
tires.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, we recommend that you use
steel wheels of the same size and
specification, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that
the chains do not touch any wiring,
brake lines or fuel lines.
• Only install snow chains on the rear
axle.
• For Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) vehicles,
only install snow chains on the outer
wheel of each pair.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the chains. If this does
not work, remove the chains to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when you no
longer need them. Do not use tire
chains on dry roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
Vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to
correctly maintain tire pressures could
increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Check each tire, including the
spare, if provided, monthly when
cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
409
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale flashes for
approximately one minute and then
remains continuously illuminated. This
sequence continues upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference.
• This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E142549
410
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Periodically check the tire pressure, at least
monthly, using an accurate tire gauge. See
Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
Single Rear Wheel
E224333
Dual Rear Wheel
E224332
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light
turns on if the tire pressure is significantly
low. Once the light is illuminated, one or
more of your tires are under-inflated and
needs to be inflated to the manufacturer’s
recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns on and a short time later turns
off, your tire pressure still needs to be
checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When you need to replace one of your road
tires with the temporary spare, the system
continues to identify an issue to remind
you to repair the damaged road wheel and
tire assembly and put it back on your
vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
411
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Customer Action RequiredPossible CauseLow Tire Pressure
Warning Light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label, located on
the edge of driver door or the B-Pillar,
you must drive your vehicle for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire under inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
On vehicles with different front and rear
tire pressures, the system must be
retrained following every tire rotation.
See Tire Care (page 392).
Tire rotation without
sensor training
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
412
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires, such as at
a gas station or in your garage, the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. When driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa)
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as
being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the system warning light for low
tire pressure.
If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire
is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the
road tires. If any tire is under-inflated,
carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the
tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure
WARNING: To determine the
required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seat) or the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
each tire rotation.
To provide the vehicle's load carrying
capability, some vehicles require different
recommended tire pressures in the front
tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire
pressure monitoring system equipped on
these vehicles is designed to illuminate the
low tire pressure warning light at two
different pressures; one for the front tires
and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide
consistent performance and maximum tire
life, the tire pressure monitoring system
needs to know when the tires are rotated
to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this
information, the system can detect and
properly warn of low tire pressures.
System reset tips:
413
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
• To reduce the chances of interference
from another vehicle, perform the
system reset procedure at least 3 ft
(1 m) away from another Ford Motor
Company vehicle undergoing the
system reset procedure at the same
time.
• Do not wait more than two minutes
between resetting each tire sensor or
the system can time-out and you have
to repeat the entire procedure on all
four wheels.
• A double horn sounds indicating the
need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the System Reset Procedure
- Single Rear Wheel
Read the entire procedure before
attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes,
then park in a safe location where you
can easily get to all four tires and have
access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and
keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position
with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off
three times. You must accomplish this
within 10 seconds. If you successfully
enter the reset mode, the horn sounds
once, the system indicator flashes and
a message shows in the information
display. If this does not occur, please
try again starting at step 2. If after
repeated attempts to enter the reset
mode, the horn does not sound, the
system indicator does not flash and no
message shows in the information
display, seek service from your
authorized dealer.
5. Train the tire pressure monitoring
system sensors in the tires using the
following system reset sequence
starting with the left front tire in the
following clockwise order: Left front -
driver side front tire, Right front -
passenger side front tire, Right rear -
passenger side rear tire, Left rear -
driver side rear tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn tone confirms that
the sensor identification code has been
learned by the module for this position. If a
double horn is heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease
the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn
sounds for the last tire trained, driver
side rear tire, the system indicator
stops flashing, and a message shows
in the information display.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
beeps are heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful and you must
repeat it. If after repeating the
procedure and two short beeps are
heard when the ignition is turned to
off, seek assistance from your
authorized dealer.
414
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
11. Set all four tires to the recommended
air pressure as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label, affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position or
Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver door.
Performing the System Reset Procedure
- Dual Rear Wheel
For further information see
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System and refer to Dual
Rear Wheel, earlier in this section.
Read the entire procedure before
attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes,
then park in a safe location where you
can easily get to all six tires and have
access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and
keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position
with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off
three times. You must accomplish this
within 10 seconds. If you successfully
enter the reset mode, the horn sounds
once, the system indicator flashes and
a message shows in the information
display. If this does not occur, please
try again starting at step 2. If after
repeated attempts to enter the reset
mode, the horn does not sound, the
system indicator does not flash and no
message shows in the information
display, seek service from your
authorized dealer.
5. Train the tire pressure monitoring
system sensors in the tires using the
following system reset sequence
starting with the left front tire in the
following order: Left front - driver side
front tire, Right front - passenger side
front tire, Right outer rear -passenger
side rear outer tire, Right inner rear -
passenger side rear inner tire, Left outer
rear - driver side rear outer tire, Left
inner rear - driver side rear inner tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that
the sensor identification code has been
learned by the module for this position. If a
double horn is heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease
the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right outer rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn
sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right inner rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn
sounds.
10. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left outer rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the
horn sounds.
11. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left inner rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the
horn sounds. Training is complete
after the horn sounds for the last tire
trained, the system indicator stops
flashing, and a message is shown in
the information display.
415
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
12. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
beeps are heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful and you must
repeat it. If after repeating the
procedure and two short beeps are
heard when the ignition is turned to
off, seek assistance from your
authorized dealer.
13. Set all six tires to the recommended
air pressure as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label, affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position or
Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver door.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (If Equipped)
Note: Additional equipment may be
required for your vehicle to support trailer
tire pressure monitoring. See your authorized
dealer for more information.
Note: The trailer tire pressure monitoring
system is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance. It is your responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressures at all times.
Note: If a trailer tire is repaired, replaced or
broken down for service, the screw and valve
on the trailer tire pressure sensor should be
replaced. See your authorized dealer for
details.
E235807
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system
is an added safety feature that allows you
to view your trailer tire pressures through
the information display. See General
Information (page 109). Tire pressure
sensors are mounted into each tire on your
trailer. The sensors send a message to your
vehicle indicating the current trailer tire
pressure.
If the trailer tire pressure monitoring
system detects that a tire is low, a warning
message appears in the information
display. The trailer tire pressure status
screen in the information display highlights
the tire with a low pressure.
The main function of the trailer tire
pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your trailer tires need air. It can also
warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended.
See Information Messages (page 120).
When a Temporary Spare or New Tire
is Installed
If you have replaced a trailer tire with a new
or spare tire, a warning message appears
and pressure readings are no longer
displayed for that tire.
To restore the full function of the trailer
tire pressure monitoring system:
• Have the damaged wheel and tire
assembly repaired and remounted to
your trailer.
• Install the trailer tire pressure
monitoring sensor into the new wheel
and tire assembly.
• Perform the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Reset Procedure
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
each tire rotation, or when a new trailer tire
pressure sensor is installed into a trailer tire.
416
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system
can be reset through the menu in the
information display. See General
Information (page 109). Performing the
trailer setup process also resets the trailer
tire pressure monitoring system.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: If the tire pressure
monitor sensor becomes damaged it
may not function.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the
tire pressure monitoring system, the
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire
pressure monitoring system, have a flat
serviced by an authorized dealer in order
to prevent damage to the system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 409). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the system
sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or
death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels.
Full-size dissimilar spare
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, 4WD
functionality may be limited. You may
experience the following:
• Additional noise from the transfer case
or other drive components.
• Difficulty shifting out of a mechanically
locked 4WD mode.
417
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
recommended that you do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) in 4WD.
• Engage 4WD unless the vehicle is
stationary.
• Use 4WD on dry pavement.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• Four-wheel drive capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Location of the Spare Tire and
Tools
See the following table for their locations:
LocationItem
Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear
bumper.
Spare tire - pick-up trucks only
Fastened to the floor pan behind the rear-
most seat on the passenger side.
Jack
Regular Cab: Fastened to floor behind the
driver seat.
Jack handle, lug wrench, lug wrench exten-
sion - only provided on dual rear wheel
vehicles. Super Cab and Crew Cab: Fastened to the
floor under the rear seat on the driver's side.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: The jack supplied with
this vehicle is only intended for changing
wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other
than when you are changing a wheel in
an emergency.
E166722
418
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park
(P), set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to
secure the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed. For example,
when changing the front left wheel,
place an appropriate block or wheel
chock on the right rear wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight,
including any vehicle cargo or
modifications. If you are unsure if the jack
capacity is adequate, contact the
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or
death.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and your
vehicle.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and the ground.
WARNING: Park your vehicle so
that you do not obstruct the flow of
traffic or place yourself in any danger and
set up a warning triangle.
WARNING: Do not work on your
vehicle when the jack is the only support
as your vehicle could slip off the jack.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not get under a
vehicle that is only supported by a
vehicle jack.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being
hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
WARNING: Only use the spare
wheel carrier to stow the wheel provided
with your vehicle. Other wheel sizes
could cause the spare wheel carrier to
fail if it does not fit securely or is too
heavy.
Note: Do not use impact tools or power
tools operating at over 200 RPM on the
spare wheel carrier winch, which may cause
it to malfunction and prevent a secure fit.
Override the winch at least three times
(there is an audible click each time) to make
sure the wheel and tire fit securely.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
1. Park the vehicle on a level firm ground
and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Apply the parking brake, place the
transmission in park (P), switch the
engine off.
3. Block the wheel diagonally opposite
the flat tire. For example, if the left
front tire is flat, block the right rear
wheel.
419
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
E175447
4. You can find the jack on the floor
behind the rear-most seat on the
passenger side. Turn the retainers
counterclockwise to remove the jack.
E309424
5. You can find the tool kit on the floor
under the driver seat for regular cab or
under the rear seat on the driver side.
Turn the retainers counterclockwise to
remove the tool kit.
E309795
6. Use the ignition key to open the lock at
the rear bumper.
7. One or more handle extensions are
used to operate the spare tire carrier.
To assemble, align the button with the
hole and slide the parts together. To
disconnect, press the button and pull
apart.
E308882
8. The lug wrench is used to turn the
handle extensions and the jack handle;
slide the square end of the handle
extension into the square hold of the
lug wrench until it clicks in place.
E162796
9. Fully insert the jack handle, with one
extension, through the bumper hole
and into the guide tube. Additional
extensions will be needed if the tailgate
is in the lowered position and cannot
be raised. Turn the handle
counterclockwise and lower the spare
tire until you can slide the tire rearward
420
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
and the cable is slack. You will feel
some resistance when you turn the jack
handle assembly. If not replacing the
spare or flat tire to the underbody
storage area, raise the wheel retainer
up into the installed position.
10. Slide the retainer through the center
of the spare tire wheel and remove
the spare tire.
E310417
11. Remove the wheel trim with the lug
wrench tip, or use the wheel trim tool
described later in this section.
12. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground. For dual rear wheel,
assemble the lug wrench and
extension tool together to access the
lug nuts.
E309794
13. Position the jack under the correct
jacking points according to following
pictures.
Removing Wheel Trim With Single
Wheels
1. Insert the flat end of the lug wrench
between the wheel rim and the wheel
trim.
2. Carefully remove the wheel trim.
Vehicles With Dual Rear Alloy Wheels
E338541
421
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
E338539
The wheel trim removal tool is in the
storage bag near the lug wrench.
Rear Wheel Trim
E338557
1. Locate the notch in the wheel trim.
E338552
2. Insert the wheel trim removal tool into
the notch in the wheel trim.
3. Rotate the wheel trim removal tool and
remove the wheel trim.
Jacking the Vehicle
F-250 and F-350 Single Rear Wheel
Vehicles
E162801
422
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
E162802
E162803
E162804
E162805
F-350 Dual Rear Wheel, F-450 and F-550
Vehicles
E162812
E162813
Front (4x2):F350 Dual rear wheel
Note: Place the jack directly under the
I-beam.
423
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
E162815
Front passenger side (4x4): F-350 dual
rear wheel
E162814
Front driver side (4x4): F-350 dual rear
wheel
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto the flat
area on the outboard side of the differential
housing.
E162817
Rear: F-350 dual rear wheel
E162816
Front: F-450 and F-550
E162818
Rear: F-450 and F-550
Insert the hooked end of the jack handle
into the jack and turn the jack handle
clockwise. For hydraulic jacks, operate the
handle up-and-down until the wheel is
completely off the ground and high enough
to install the spare tire.
Note: Hydraulic jacks have a pressure relief
valve that prevents lifting loads which
exceed the jack's rated capacity.
F-250 and F-350 Single Rear Wheel
Vehicles
424
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
E162811
F-350 Dual Rear Wheel Vehicles
E162819
Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench,
replace the flat tire with the spare, making
sure the valve stem of the spare is facing
outward when replacing a front wheel. For
the rear wheel position on vehicles with
single rear wheel fitments, install the spare
with the valve stem facing outward. For
vehicles with dual rear wheels, the valve
stem of the spare must face outward when
replacing an inner wheel, but must face
inward when replacing an outboard wheel.
Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten
the lug nuts until the wheel has been
lowered.
Lower the vehicle completely by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise until the
vehicle is completely lowered.
Note: For F-350 Dual Rear Wheel, F-450
and F-550 Vehicles, insert the notched end
of the jack handle to the release valve, open
the release valve slightly by turning the
handle counterclockwise. Stop turning the
release valve when vehicle start to lower.
Make sure to close the valve when you
completely lower your vehicle.
F-350 Dual Rear Wheel, F-450 and
F-550 Vehicles.
E162812
Installing the lug Nuts and Ornaments
E161441
1
3
4
2
7
6
5
8
8-lug nut torque sequence
425
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
E169375
10-lug nut torque sequence
Note: When installing the wheel center
ornaments, make sure that the ornament
retention towers on the back side of the
ornament are aligned with the studs or nuts
and retain to the flange on the lug nuts.
E162820
Note: For dual rear wheels, align the
ornament with the lug nuts. (A) is the clip
in the ornament and (B) is the flange of the
lug nut. Make sure that each of the retention
clips are sitting on a lug nut flange.
A B
E162822
Note: If the ornament retention clips are
aligned between the studs or lug nuts, the
ornament will be improperly installed. This
improper installation may appear and sound
correct, but will not keep the ornament on
the vehicle. Ornaments improperly installed
in this manner may become loose or fall off
during driving.
E162823
Use your hand or a rubber mallet to tap the
ornament until the retention clips snap
over the lug nut flanges. Tap in a star
pattern until the ornament seats fully onto
the wheel. There should be an even gap
between the ornament and the wheel
when it is properly installed.
426
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
A
C
B
D
E162824
Stowing the Flat Tire or Spare Tire
1. Place the tire on end with the valve
stem facing toward the front of the
vehicle. Lay the tire on the ground, near
the rear of the vehicle, with the valve
stem side facing up.
E162800
2. Slide the wheel partially under the
vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. If equipped, you may
have to remove the wheel center cap
prior to pushing the retainer through
the center of the wheel. To remove the
center cap, press it off with the lug
wrench tip from the inner side of the
wheel. Pull on the cable to align the
components at the end of the cable.
3. Turn the lug wrench clockwise until the
tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The wrench
will become harder to turn and the
spare tire winch will ratchet or slip
when the tire is raised to maximum
tightness. You will hear a clicking sound
from the winch indicating that the tire
is properly stowed. Check that the tire
lies flat against the frame and is
properly tightened.
4. Carefully place all tools back in the tool
kit bag.
5. Reinstall the tool kit bag and tighten
the wing nut.
6. Properly reinstall the jack into the
bracket and tighten the wing nut.
427
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel
hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while
your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
lb.ft (Nm)
1
Bolt size
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5
1
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque
at 100 mi (160 km) after any wheel disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire,
or wheel removal.
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified
torque at 100 mi (160 km), and again at 500 mi (800 km) of new vehicle operation and
after any wheel disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, or wheel removal.
It is important to follow the proper wheel mounting and lug nut torque procedures.
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
428
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 6.2L
6.2L V8 EngineEngine
379 in³ (6,210 cm³)Displacement.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2Firing order.
Coil on plugIgnition system.
0.041 in (1.04 mm) - 0.047 in (1.2 mm)Spark plug gap.
9.8:1Compression ratio.
Drivebelt Routing
E163761
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 6.7L DIESEL
6.7L V8 Diesel EngineEngine
406 in³ (6,651 cm³)Displacement.
Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel up to B20Required fuel.
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8Firing order.
15.8:1Compression ratio.
429
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
Single Alternator
E299020
Dual Alternator
E299021
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 7.3L
7.3L V8 EngineEngine
445 in³ (7,293 cm³)Displacement.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2Firing order.
Coil near spark plug with spark plug wireIgnition system.
0.049 in (1.25 mm) - 0.053 in (1.35 mm)Spark plug gap.
10.5:1Compression ratio.
430
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
Single Alternator
E305075
Drivebelt closest to the engine.A
Drivebelt furthest from the
engine.
B
Dual Alternator
E298579
Drivebelt closest to the engine.A
Drivebelt furthest from the
engine.
B
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 6.2L
Motorcraft Part numberComponent
FA-1950Air filter element.
BXT-65-650Battery (XL).
BXT-65-750Battery (all except XL).
FP-79Cabin air filter.
FL-820-S
Engine oil filter.
1
SP-526
Spark plugs.
2
FT-188Six-speed automatic transmission fluid
filter (6R100).
431
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Motorcraft Part numberComponent
FT-221Ten-speed automatic transmission fluid
filter (10R140).
WW-2248Windshield wiper blades.
1
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36/USC-D.
2
For spark plug replacement, contact your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the recommended intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 556).
We recommend Motorcraft® parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. These parts are engineered for your vehicle, and meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
432
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 6.7L DIESEL
Motorcraft Part numberComponent
FA-1951Air filter.
FA-1952Foam pre-filter.
BXT-65-750Battery (two required).
FP-79Cabin air filter.
FL-2051-S
Engine oil filter.
1
FD-4631Fuel filter.
FT-221Ten-speed automatic transmission fluid
filter (10R140).
WW-2248Windshield wiper blades.
1
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36/USC-D.
We recommend Motorcraft® parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. These parts are engineered for your vehicle, and meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
433
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 7.3L
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1950Air filter element.
BXT-65-750Battery.
FP-79Cabin air filter.
FL-820-S
Engine oil filter.
1
SP-586
Spark plugs.
2
FT-221Ten-speed automatic transmission fluid
filter (10R140).
WW-2248Windshield wiper blades.
1
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
2
For spark plug replacement, contact your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the recommended intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 556).
We recommend Motorcraft® parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
434
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
435
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
SSix-speed automatic transmission 6R100.
GTen-speed automatic transmission 10R140.
436
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS - 6.2L
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, it could result in:
• Component damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
Air Conditioning System
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
4.1 fl oz (120 ml)27 oz (0.765 kg)With six-speed automatic
transmission (6R100).
3.7 fl oz (110 ml)27 oz (0.765 kg)With ten-speed automatic
transmission (10R140).
Materials
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AMotorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-134a Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-134a(Canada)
YN-19(U.S.)
CYN-19-R(Canada)
WSH-M1C231-BMotorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil / Huile
PAG pour compresseur frigorifique Motor-
craft®(Canada)
YN-12-D(U.S. & Canada)
437
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Automatic Transmission-Six
Speed
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid could cause
transmission damage.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
13.9 qt (13.2 L)
1
Six-speed automatic transmission (6R100).
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
Automatic Transmission-Ten
Speed
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® ULV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® ULV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid could cause
transmission damage.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
18.2 qt (17.2 L)
1
Ten-speed automatic transmission
(10R140).
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
438
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C949-A, MERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-
matique Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada)
Engine Coolant
Capacities
QuantityVariant
24.6 qt (23.3 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
Engine Oil
E142732
E276075
439
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN PLUS requirements and display the
API Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
7.0 qt (6.6 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-B1Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C953-B1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
440
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
Fuel Tank
Capacities
QuantityVariant
34.0 gal (128.7 L)Complete vehicle-all except 176 inch
wheelbase and incomplete vehicles.
48.0 gal (181.7 L)Complete vehicle-176 inch wheelbase.
40.0 gal (151.4 L)Incomplete vehicle, aft- axle -location.
26.5 gal (100.3 L)Incomplete vehicle, middle location.
Grease
441
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M1C267-A1Motorcraft® High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and
Wheel Bearing Grease(U.S.)
Motorcraft® High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and
Wheel Bearing Grease / Graisse haute température
pour roulements de roue et ponts avant 4x4 Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XG-11(U.S. & Canada)
ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / Graisse
tout usage en aérosol Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-5-A(U.S. & Canada)
ESA-M1C75-BMotorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease / Graisse
longue durée de qualité première Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XG-1-E1(U.S. & Canada)
Hydraulic Brake System
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid could cause reduced brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials could result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Power Steering System
442
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
Locks
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid / Liquide dégrippant
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-1(U.S.)
CXC-51-A(Canada)
Transfer Case
Capacities
QuantityVariant
1.9 qt (1.8 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
443
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Front Axle
Capacities
QuantityVariant
2.75 qt (2.6 L)
Four wheel drive.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSP-M2C197-AMotorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Axle Lubricant
/ Lubrifiant pour essieux de très haute qualité SAE
80W-90 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-80W90-QL(U.S.)
CXY-80W90-1L(Canada)
Rear Axle - 10.5
Capacities
QuantityVariant
3.3–3.5 qt (3.1–3.3 L)With Electronic Locking Differential.
3.5–3.6 qt (3.3–3.4 L)Without Electronic Locking Differential.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
444
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Rear Axle - 11.8
Capacities
QuantityVariant
3.78 qt (3.58 L)
1
All.
1
For complete refill of limited slip axles, add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier
XL-3 or equivalent, meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A. Include this friction modifier
in the total lube volume of 3.78 qt (3.58 L).
Materials
SpecificationName
EST-M2C118-AMotorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier / Additif
modificateur de friction Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-3(U.S.)
CXL-3(Canada)
WSP-M2C197-AMotorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Axle Lubricant
/ Lubrifiant pour essieux de très haute qualité SAE
80W-90 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-80W90-QL(U.S.)
CXY-80W90-1L(Canada)
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
445
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen-
trate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F(Canada)
CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS - 6.7L DIESEL
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, it could result in:
• Component damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
Note: We recommend an engine block
heater at temperatures below –10°F
(–23°C).
Air Conditioning System
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
3.7 fl oz (110 ml)27 oz (0.765 kg)All.
446
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AMotorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-134a Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-134a(Canada)
YN-19(U.S.)
CYN-19-R(Canada)
WSH-M1C231-BMotorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil / Huile
PAG pour compresseur frigorifique Motor-
craft®(Canada)
YN-12-D(U.S. & Canada)
Automatic Transmission
Note: Only use MERCON ULV transmission
fluid for automatic transmissions that
require MERCON ULV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid could cause
transmission damage.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
18.1 qt (17.1 L)
1
All.
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C949-A, MERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-
matique Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada)
447
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Coolant
Capacities
QuantityVariant
31.7 qt (30 L)Primary cooling system.
8.1 qt (7.7 L)Secondary cooling system.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
Engine Oil
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft motor oil is not
available, use motor oil of the
recommended viscosity grade that meets
our specification WSS-M2C171-F1. You can
find the list of approved motor oils at
www.motorcraft.com.
Do not use engine oil additives as they
could lead to engine damage not covered
by your vehicle warranty.
The use of correct oil viscosities for diesel
engines is important for satisfactory
operation. Determine which oil viscosity
best suits the temperature range you
expect to encounter for the next service
interval from the SAE Viscosity Grades
chart.
448
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
E327351
449
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
13.0 qt (12.3 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C171-F1Motorcraft® SAE 10W-30 Super Duty Diesel Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Super Duty Motor Oil SAE 10W-30 /
Huile moteur Super Duty SAE 10W-30 Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XO-10W30-QSDF(U.S.)
CXO-10W30-LSD12(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C171-F1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-40
Alternative Engine Oil for Biodiesel
Fuel Blends (B20 Max)
450
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C171-F1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor
Oil(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-5W40-5Q3SD(U.S.)
WSS-M2C171-F1Motorcraft® SAE 15W-40 Super Duty Diesel Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Super Duty Motor Oil SAE 15W-40 /
Huile moteur Super Duty SAE 15W-40 Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XO-15W40-QSDF(U.S.)
CXO-15W40-LSD12(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for Severe
Duty Service
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C171-F1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor
Oil(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-5W40-5Q3SD(U.S.)
Fuel Tank
Capacities
QuantityVariant
29.0 gal (109.8 L)Complete vehicle-142 inch and 148 inch
wheelbase, middle location.
34.0 gal (128.7 L)Complete vehicle-160 inch and 164 inch
wheelbase, middle location.
48.0 gal (181.7 L)Complete vehicle-176 inch wheelbase,
middle location.
451
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
QuantityVariant
26.5 gal (100.3 L)Incomplete vehicle, middle location.
40.0 gal (151.4 L)Incomplete vehicle, aft- axle -location.
66.5 gal (251.7 L)Incomplete vehicle, middle and aft- axle -
locations.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank
Capacities
QuantityVariant
7.4 gal (28 L)Complete vehicle.
7.2 gal (27.3 L)Incomplete vehicle.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M99C130-AMotorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid / Fluide pour
échappement diesel Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-27-GAL,PM-27-JUG(U.S.)
CPM-27-J(Canada)
Grease
452
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M1C267-A1Motorcraft® High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and
Wheel Bearing Grease(U.S.)
Motorcraft® High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and
Wheel Bearing Grease / Graisse haute température
pour roulements de roue et ponts avant 4x4 Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XG-11(U.S. & Canada)
ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / Graisse
tout usage en aérosol Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-5-A(U.S. & Canada)
ESA-M1C75-BMotorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease / Graisse
longue durée de qualité première Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XG-1-E1(U.S. & Canada)
Hydraulic Brake System
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid could cause reduced brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials could result in
brake system damage and failure.
Power Steering System
453
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
Locks
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid / Liquide dégrippant
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-1(U.S.)
CXC-51-A(Canada)
Transfer Case
Capacities
QuantityVariant
1.9 qt (1.8 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
454
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Front Axle
Capacities
QuantityVariant
2.75 qt (2.6 L)
1
With Tremor package-with limited slip.
2.75 qt (2.6 L)Without Tremor package-without limited
slip.
1
For complete refill of limited slip axles, add 5.4 fl oz. (160 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier
XL-3 or equivalent, meeting specification EST-M2C118-A. Include this friction modifier in
the total lube volume of 2.75 qt (2.6 L).
Materials
SpecificationName
EST-M2C118-AMotorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier / Additif
modificateur de friction Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-3(U.S.)
CXL-3(Canada)
WSP-M2C197-AMotorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Axle Lubricant
/ Lubrifiant pour essieux de très haute qualité SAE
80W-90 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-80W90-QL(U.S.)
CXY-80W90-1L(Canada)
Rear Axle - 10.5
Capacities
QuantityVariant
3.3–3.5 qt (3.1–3.3 L)With Electronic Locking Differential.
3.5–3.6 qt (3.3–3.4 L)Without Electronic Locking Differential.
455
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
Rear Axle - 10.8
Capacities
QuantityVariant
3.6 qt (3.42 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSL-M2C192-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant / Lubrifiant synthétique pour pont arrière
SAE 75W-140 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)
CXY-75W140-1L(Canada)
Rear Axle - 11.8
Capacities
QuantityVariant
3.78 qt (3.58 L)
1
All.
1
For complete refill of limited slip axles, add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier
XL-3 or equivalent, meeting specification EST-M2C118-A. Include this friction modifier in
the total lube volume of 3.78 qt (3.58 L).
456
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
EST-M2C118-AMotorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier / Additif
modificateur de friction Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-3(U.S.)
CXL-3(Canada)
WSL-M2C192-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant / Lubrifiant synthétique pour pont arrière
SAE 75W-140 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)
CXY-75W140-1L(Canada)
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen-
trate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F(Canada)
CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS - 7.3L
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, it could result in:
• Component damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
457
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
Air Conditioning System
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
3.7 fl oz (110 ml)27 oz (0.765 kg)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AMotorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-134a Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-134a(Canada)
YN-19(U.S.)
CYN-19-R(Canada)
WSH-M1C231-BMotorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil / Huile
PAG pour compresseur frigorifique Motor-
craft®(Canada)
YN-12-D(U.S. & Canada)
Automatic Transmission
Note: Only use MERCON® ULV
transmission fluid for automatic
transmissions that require MERCON® ULV
transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid
could cause transmission damage.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
18.2 qt (17.2 L)
1
Ten-speed automatic transmission
(10R140).
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
458
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C949-A, MERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-
matique Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada)
Engine Coolant
Capacities
QuantityVariant
22.5 qt (21.3 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
Engine Oil
E142732
E276075
459
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN PLUS requirements and display the
API Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
8.0 qt (7.57 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-B1Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C953-B1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
460
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
Fuel Tank
Capacities
QuantityVariant
34.0 gal (128.7 L)Complete vehicle-all except 176 inch
wheelbase and incomplete vehicles.
48.0 gal (181.7 L)Complete vehicle-176 inch wheelbase.
40.0 gal (151.4 L)Incomplete vehicle, aft- axle -location.
26.5 gal (100.3 L)Incomplete vehicle, middle location.
Grease
461
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M1C267-A1Motorcraft® High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and
Wheel Bearing Grease(U.S.)
Motorcraft® High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and
Wheel Bearing Grease / Graisse haute température
pour roulements de roue et ponts avant 4x4 Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XG-11(U.S. & Canada)
ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / Graisse
tout usage en aérosol Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-5-A(U.S. & Canada)
ESA-M1C75-BMotorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease / Graisse
longue durée de qualité première Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XG-1-E1(U.S. & Canada)
Hydraulic Brake System
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid could cause reduced brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials could result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Power Steering System
462
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
Locks
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid / Liquide dégrippant
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-1(U.S.)
CXC-51-A(Canada)
Transfer Case
Capacities
QuantityVariant
1.9 qt (1.8 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
463
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Front Axle
Capacities
QuantityVariant
2.75 qt (2.6 L)
1
With Tremor package (with limited slip).
2.75 qt (2.6 L)Without Tremor package (without limited
slip).
1
For complete refill of limited slip axles, add 5.4 fl oz. (160 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier
XL-3 or equivalent, meeting specification EST-M2C118-A. Include this friction modifier in
the total lube volume of 2.75 qt (2.6 L).
Materials
SpecificationName
EST-M2C118-AMotorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier / Additif
modificateur de friction Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-3(U.S.)
CXL-3(Canada)
WSP-M2C197-AMotorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Axle Lubricant
/ Lubrifiant pour essieux de très haute qualité SAE
80W-90 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-80W90-QL(U.S.)
CXY-80W90-1L(Canada)
Rear Axle - 10.5
Capacities
QuantityVariant
3.3–3.5 qt (3.1–3.3 L)With Electronic Locking Differential.
3.5–3.6 qt (3.3–3.4 L)Without Electronic Locking Differential.
464
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
Rear Axle - 10.8
Capacities
QuantityVariant
3.6 qt (3.42 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSL-M2C192-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant / Lubrifiant synthétique pour pont arrière
SAE 75W-140 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)
CXY-75W140-1L(Canada)
Rear Axle - 11.8 (With HD Tow Option)
Capacities
QuantityVariant
3.78 qt (3.58 L)
1
All.
1
For complete refill of limited slip axles, add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier
XL-3 or equivalent, meeting specification EST-M2C118-A. Include this friction modifier in
the total lube volume of 3.78 qt (3.58 L).
465
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
EST-M2C118-AMotorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier / Additif
modificateur de friction Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-3(U.S.)
CXL-3(Canada)
WSL-M2C192-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant / Lubrifiant synthétique pour pont arrière
SAE 75W-140 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)
CXY-75W140-1L(Canada)
Rear Axle - 11.8 (Without HD Tow Option)
Capacities
QuantityVariant
3.78 qt (3.58 L)
1
All.
1
For complete refill of limited slip axles, add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier
XL-3 or equivalent, meeting specification EST-M2C118-A. Include this friction modifier in
the total lube volume of 3.78 qt (3.58 L).
Materials
SpecificationName
EST-M2C118-AMotorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier / Additif
modificateur de friction Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-3(U.S.)
CXL-3(Canada)
WSP-M2C197-AMotorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Axle Lubricant
/ Lubrifiant pour essieux de très haute qualité SAE
80W-90 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-80W90-QL(U.S.)
CXY-80W90-1L(Canada)
466
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen-
trate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F(Canada)
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
60/55H13/9008Headlamp.
LEDLEDHeadlamp.
5W5WFront side marker lamp.
409140Front fog lamp.
LEDLED
Front fog lamp.
3
467
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
28/8T20/7444NA
Front direction indicator and parking
lamp.
27/73157KRear lamp, brake lamp, and rear side
marker lamp. Low/Mid series.
1
21WTY21WRear direction indicator lamp. Low/Mid
series.
1
LEDLEDRear lamp, brake lamp, rear direction
indicator, rear side marker lamp and
reverse lamp. High series.
1
27/73157KRear lamp, brake lamp, rear direction
indicator and rear side marker lamp.
2
21WT21WReversing lamp. Low/Mid series.
5168License plate lamp. Low series.
LEDLEDLicense plate lamp. High series.
12.8912Central high mounted cargo lamp.
LEDLEDCentral high mounted cargo lamp.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator and mirror
clearance lamp.
LEDLEDFront clearance lamp.
LEDLEDRear clearance lamp.
LEDLEDFront identification lamp.
LEDLEDRear identification lamp.
LEDLEDUnderhood lamp.
1
Pickup only.
2
Chassis cab only.
3
U.S. and Canada only
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
468
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDMap lamp.
LEDLEDGlove compartment lamp.
LEDLEDInterior lamp.
LEDLEDOverhead console lamp.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
469
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A MOBILE NETWORK
What Is the Modem
The modem allows you to connect your
vehicle to the Internet to use when you are
on the road.
If you enable the modem using the
FordPass app, you can access the
following services:
• Locating and remotely starting, locking
and unlocking your vehicle. See the
information in FordPass app.
• Automatic system updates.
Enabling the Modem Using
FordPass
1. Open the FordPass app on your device
and log in.
2. Select your vehicle.
3. Select the option for vehicle details.
4. Select the option to activate your
vehicle.
5. Switch the ignition on.
6. Make sure that the name on the screen
matches the name shown in your
FordPass account.
7. Confirm the association of your vehicle
with your FordPass account.
Enabling the Modem Using the
Touchscreen
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select FordPass Connect.
2. Select Connectivity Settings.
3. Switch connectivity features on.
470
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Network Connectivity (If Equipped)
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY – TROUBLESHOOTING
Wi-Fi Network
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi
network.
– Password error.
• Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID,. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection
disconnects after successful
connection.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot
but the network signal
strength is weak.
– Obstructed network signal.
• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the
list of available networks
that I expect to see.
– Hidden network.
• Make the network visible and try again.
471
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Network Connectivity (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot see the Wi-Fi
Hotspot name when I search
for Wi-Fi networks on my
cell phone or other device.
– System limitation.
• Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on.
• The system does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at
this time.
– Weak network signal
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use an more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Software downloads take
too long.
– No software update available.
– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
of terms and conditions.
• Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
The system seems to
connect to a Wi-Fi network
and the signal strength is
excellent but the software
does not update.
Mobile Network
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Modem is not enabled.
• Switch connectivity features on.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to a place where the
network signal is not obstructed.
I cannot confirm the
connection of the modem
with the FordPass account.
472
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Network Connectivity (If Equipped)
CREATING A VEHICLE WI-FI
HOTSPOT
You can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in your
vehicle and allow devices to connect to it
for access to the Internet.
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
1. Select Connectivity Features.
2. Select Vehicle Hotspot.
Note: The vehicle hotspot default setting
is on.
3. Select Settings.
4. Make sure that you have Wi-Fi visibility
switched on.
Note: The Wi-Fi Visibility default setting is
on.
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name
and Password
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
1. Select Connectivity Features.
2. Select Vehicle Hotspot.
3. Select Settings.
Note: The SSID is the hotspot name.
4. Scroll to Hide password.
5. Uncheck the box.
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot
1. On your device, turn on Wi-Fi and select
the hotspot from the list of available
Wi-Fi networks.
2. When prompted, enter the password.
Purchasing a Data Plan
1. Connect a device to the hotspot.
Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portal
opens on your device.
2. If the portal does not open on your
device, open a website and it redirects
to the vehicle network carrier’s portal.
Note: Secure websites do not redirect.
Note: If you have an active plan, the system
does not redirect to the vehicle network
carrier’s portal when you connect a device.
Visit the vehicle network carrier’s website
to purchase more data.
Note: If data usage information is available
in the vehicle hotspot menu, it is
approximate.
Note: If you carry out a master reset, the
system does not remove your vehicle from
your vehicle network carrier’s account. To
remove your vehicle from the account,
contact your vehicle network carrier.
Note: The vehicle network carrier provides
Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your
vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
and availability.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE WI-
FI HOTSPOT NAME OR
PASSWORD
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
1. Select Connectivity Features.
2. Select Vehicle Hotspot.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select SSID: ___.
5. Enter your required SSID.
6. Select Done.
7. Select Password: ___.
8. Enter your required password.
9. Select Done.
473
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/TOUCHSCREEN
DISPLAY/SYNC 3
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
E291384
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls could look different
from what you see here.
474
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Audio System
Note: Some features, such as satellite
radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features.
Adjusting the Volume
E265373
Turn to adjust the volume.
Changing Radio Stations
E265696
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the
previous or next available satellite radio
station.
Selecting the Audio Modes
E265035
Press and release the button to
access different audio modes,
for example AM and FM.
Setting a Memory Preset
Tune to a station, then press and hold one
of the memory preset buttons on the
touchscreen. The audio briefly mutes while
the system saves the station and returns
once the station is stored.
Switching the Audio Unit On and
Off
Press and release the button.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse
E265045
E265044
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press and release either button. The
system stops at the first station it finds in
that direction.
In satellite radio mode, press and release
to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category,
such as jazz, rock or news, press to find the
next or previous station in that category.
475
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SYNC
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
E291383
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Note: Some features, such as satellite
radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
Accessing the Apps Menu
Press and release the button to
access the apps menu. Follow
the on-screen prompts to make
your selection.
Accessing the Clock Settings
E265036
Press and release the button to
access the clock setting.
Use the center arrow controls to
change the hours and minutes.
Accessing the Media Source Menu
E265035
Press and release the button to
open the media source menu.
You can press this multiple times to
change to a SYNC-Media device or scroll
through the media sources using the arrow
buttons. Press OK to select a source.
Accessing the Phone Features
Press and release the button to
access the phone features of the
SYNC system.
Accessing the Sound Settings
E280315
Press and release the button to
access settings for Treble,
Midrange, Bass, Fade and
Balance.
Accessing the Settings Menu
E142607
Press and release the button to
access the settings menu.
Follow the on-screen prompts
to make your selection.
476
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Audio System
Adjusting the Volume
E265373
Turn to adjust the volume.
Changing Radio Stations
E265696
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the
previous or next available satellite radio
station.
Listening to the Radio
E265033
Press and release the button to
listen to the radio or change
radio stations.
Playing or Pausing Media
Press and release the button to
either play or pause current
media source.
Switching the Audio Unit On and
Off
Press and release the button.
Switching the Display On and Off
E272035
Press and release the button.
Switching Radio Text On and Off
E268570
Press and release the button to
display extra information, for
example, artist name.
Note: Extra information may not always be
available.
Switching Repeat Mode On and Off
E268569
Press and release the button to
repeat the current media source.
Switching Shuffle Mode On and
Off
Press and release the button to
shuffle the current media source.
477
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Audio System
Using the Display Control
Use the up and down arrow buttons to
select the various settings. When you make
your selection, press the left and right
arrow buttons to change the settings.
E265041
Press and release to confirm a
selection.
Press and release the function buttons
below the display to select different
functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in.
Using the Number Block
In radio mode, store and recall your favorite
radio stations. To store a favorite station,
press and hold until the sound returns. In
phone mode, enter a phone number.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse
E265045
E265044
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press and release either button. The
system stops at the first station it finds in
that direction.
In satellite radio mode, press and release
to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category,
such as jazz, rock or news, press to find the
next or previous station in that category.
DIGITAL RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts, where
available, in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode, only, if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations, HD2 through HD7, are
only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
478
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station, aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations, it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for the accuracy of all audio
streams and data fields.
479
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Audio System
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
1
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
1
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
1
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
variety of music, news, sports, weather,
traffic and entertainment satellite radio
channels. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
480
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E208625
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account.
481
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Audio System
Locating Your ESN
With satellite radio as the source, use the
touchscreen to select the following:
1. Select Settings. See Settings (page
531).
2. Select SiriusXM.
3. Select SiriusXM information.
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SiriusXM satellite or Siri-
usXM tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
482
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Audio System
USB PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
USB A
E201595
USB C
E301114
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices.
Note: We recommend using only USB-IF
certified cables and adapters. Non-certified
cables and adapters may not work.
Locating the USB Ports
The USB ports may be in the following
locations:
• Inside the media bin.
• Inside the center console.
• On the lower instrument panel.
Note: The number and type of USB ports
may vary depending on your vehicle.
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have
data transfer capabilities. See Auxiliary
Power Points (page 162).
483
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your Bluetooth
enabled cellular phone and portable media
player. This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist or Emergency Assistance
and applications via SYNC AppLink.
*
• Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected
phone.
• Text message.
• Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
• Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*
These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
SYNC support is available at your regional
Ford website. See SYNC™
Troubleshooting (page 492).
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
484
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when you connect the cellular phone or
media player. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
No one can access system data without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 488).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is around you.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
appears in the display.
Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
Gives you available commands you can use
on the current screen.
Help
Gives you a list of possible voice
commands.
List of Commands
This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by pressing seek
up, seek down, or holding the voice button
for two or more seconds.
Cancel
485
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
Interaction Mode Standard
Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
Interaction Mode Advanced
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.
Phone Confirmation Off
The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
Phone Confirmation On
486
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller identification.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Pairing a Phone
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or
neutral (N) for manual transmission.
Using the Audio System
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the Settings button.
3. Select Bluetooth from the menu.
4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone and
downloading your phonebook.
Using Voice Commands
E142599
Make sure to switch on your
phone's Bluetooth feature
before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
Follow the instruc-
tions on the audio
display.
Pair Phone
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. You can
do things like place a phone call
and access text messages.
When prompted, say a command. See the
following table for examples of
commands.
Voice Command
___ List of Commands
Help
Call ___
Dial ___
Text Messages
487
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
__ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
contact or phone number.
Phone Controls
Use the phone buttons on your steering
wheel to answer, reject, or hang up a call.
Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Scroll through the menu to view
contacts, text messages, and the
phone dialer.
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications (if your
phone is compatible).
These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
911 Assist
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the
system will not dial for help which could
delay response time, potentially
increasing the risk of serious injury or
death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911
Assist to make an emergency call if you
can do it yourself. Dial emergency
services immediately to avoid delayed
response time which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a
crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within
five seconds of the crash, the system or
phone may be damaged or
non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your
phone in a secure location in your vehicle
so it does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or
damage the phone which could prevent
911 Assist from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
or off, that setting applies for all paired
phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
a voice message plays or a display message
or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
started and after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
488
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 43). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 315).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On or Off
Press the Settings button then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Select the desired option, on
or off.
911 Assist
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a Bluetooth
enabled and compatible cell phone to
SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
damage or loses its connection to SYNC
during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel".
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle are
able to talk with the operator. Be prepared
to provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
489
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.
SYNC Mobile Apps
The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. When an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website
Note: Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled
Apps will vary by region.
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Press the Mobile Apps button to access
the menu on-screen. Then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Scroll through the list of
available applications and
select a particular app.
Find
Mobile
Apps
Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button, then when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".
Mobile Applications
SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps.List Applications
Searches your connected mobile device for SYNC-compatible
mobile apps.
Find Applications
Use this command to discover the available voice commands.Help
490
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.
• To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
• To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps.
Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
SYNC supports digital media sources
including: iPod, Bluetooth devices, and
most USB drives. SYNC also supports
audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV
and ACC.
Media Sources
The AUX or MEDIA button allows you to
view and select available media sources.
Press the AUX or MEDIA button to view
your sources. Use the directional arrows
and OK button to select your source. You
can also use the steering wheel audio
controls.
491
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Audio Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. You can
do things like play a specific song
or album, or tune to a radio
station. When prompted, say a command.
See the following table for example
commands. Not all commands may be
available on your vehicle.
Command
___ List of Commands
Help
Pause
Play
AM ___
FM ___
CD Player
Sirius Channel ___
USB
Bluetooth Audio
__ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as an
artist, station, or media source.
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use your regional Ford website at any time
to check your phone's compatibility,
register your account and set preferences
as well as access a customer
representative via an online chat (during
certain hours).
Website(s)Market
www.SYNCMyRide.comNorth America
www.SYNCMyRide.ca
www.sync-
maroute.ca
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
492
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
493
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Press the Phone button to
return to the Phone menu.
You are on the Select a
Character screen.
I cannot return to the Phone
menu when selecting a
contact.
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
494
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
The device is not connected.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
The file may be corrupted.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
Switch radio bands and
return to Sirius or switch the
feature off. You can then
change the Sirius station
using the directional
buttons.
Sirius Replay is active.
I cannot change the Sirius
station.
495
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
496
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
New Apps," SYNC does not
find any applications.
paired and connected to
497
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some appsAppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
498
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth bug on
some older versions of the
Android operating system
that may cause apps that
were found on your previous
vehicle drive to not be found
again if you have not turned
off Bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
499
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
500
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
About SYNC
The system allows you to interact with the
entertainment, information and
communication systems on your vehicle
using voice commands and a touchscreen.
The system provides easy interaction with
audio, phone, navigation, mobile apps and
settings.
Note: You can switch the system on and
use it for up to an hour without switching
the ignition on.
Note: You can use the system after you
switch the ignition off for up to 10 minutes
or until you open a door.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited to
when your vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Using the Touchscreen
E293823
Status bar.A
Home screen.B
Clock. See Settings (page 531).C
Outside air temperature.D
Feature bar.E
Status Bar
Cell phone microphone muted.
Audio system muted.
Software update installed.
Wi-Fi connected.
Cell phone roaming.
Text message received.
501
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Automatic crash notification
system off.
Cell phone network signal
strength.
Vehicle data sharing on.
Vehicle location sharing on.
Vehicle data and vehicle location
sharing on.
Wireless charger active.
Feature Bar
E100027
Select to use the radio, a USB, a
media player or a Bluetooth
device. See Entertainment
(page 509).
E283811
Select to adjust climate settings
See Climate (page 519).
Select to make calls and access
the phonebook on your cell
phone. See Phone (page 521).
Select to use the navigation
system. See Navigation (page
523).
Select to search for and use
compatible apps on your iOS or
Android device. See Apps (page
528).
E280315
Select to adjust system settings.
See Settings (page 531).
Cleaning the Touchscreen
See Cleaning the Interior (page 383).
Updating the System
Updating the System Using a USB Drive
Downloading an Update
1. Go to the SYNC update page on the
local Ford website.
2. Download the update.
Note: The website notifies you if an update
is available.
3. Insert a USB drive into your computer.
Note: The USB drive needs to be empty and
meet the minimum requirements detailed
on the website.
4. Follow the instructions provided to
download the update to the USB drive.
Installing an Update
Note: You can use the system when an
installation is in progress.
1. Disconnect all other USB devices from
the USB ports.
2. Connect the USB drive with the update
to a USB port.
Note: Installation starts automatically
within 10 minutes.
Updating the System Using a Wi-Fi
Network Connection
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Automatic Updates.
2. Select System Wi-Fi.
3. Switch System Wi-Fi on.
4. Select Available Wi-Fi Networks.
5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
Note: Enter the network password to
connect to a secure network.
502
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Switching Automatic System Updates
On
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Automatic Updates.
2. Switch Automatic System Updates
on.
The system is now set to check for and
receive system updates when it is
connected to a Wi-Fi network.
Note: You can use the system when a
download is in progress.
Note: If the system is disconnected from
the Wi-Fi network when a download is in
progress, the download continues the next
time the system is connected to a Wi-Fi
network.
Additional Information and
Assistance
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer or refer to the local Ford
website.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The system allows you to interact with the
entertainment, information and
communication systems on your vehicle
using voice commands. This allows you
to keep your hands on the steering wheel
and focus on what is in front of you.
E142599
Press the voice control button
on the steering wheel and wait
for the voice prompt.
Note: Press the voice control button again
to interrupt a voice prompt and begin
speaking.
Note: Turn the volume control when a voice
prompt plays to adjust the volume.
Note: Press and hold the voice control
button on the steering wheel to use Siri on
your iOS device.
The following voice commands are
designed to help you from any screen:
• List of Commands
• Help
The following tables list some of the more
frequently used voice commands. For a
complete list of voice commands, refer to
our website.
General
DescriptionVoice Command
Get a list of voice commands for a specific feature.
1
___ List of Commands
Cancel an active voice session.Cancel
Get a list of voice commands for a specific feature.
1
___ Help
Return to the previous screen.Go back
Go to the main menu.Main Menu
503
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
DescriptionVoice Command
Go to the next page.Next Page
Go to the previous page.Previous Page
1
Add the name of the feature to the command.
Entertainment
Audio Source
DescriptionVoice Command
Use the radio.Radio
Use the CD player.CD Player
Use a Bluetooth device.Bluetooth Stereo
Use a USB or media player.USB
Radio
DescriptionVoice Command
Listen to AM radio.AM
Tune to a specific AM frequency.
1
AM ___
Listen to SiriusXM radio.
2
Sirius Channel ___
Listen to FM radio.FM
Tune to a specific FM frequency.
1
FM ___
1
Add the radio frequency to two decimal places to the command.
2
You can say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius Channel 16" or "Sirius
The Pulse".
504
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
USB and Media Player
DescriptionVoice Command
Play your music by category.
1
Play Album ___
Play Artist ___
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
Play Podcast ___
Browse music on a USB device.
Browse All Albums
Browse All Artists
Browse All Audiobooks
Browse All Genres
Browse All Playlists
Browse All Podcasts
Browse All Songs
Browse your music by category on a USB device.
1
Browse Album ___
Browse Artist ___
Browse Audiobook ___
Browse Genre ___
Browse Playlist ___
Browse Podcast ___
1
Add an album name, artist name, audiobook name, genre name, playlist name, podcast
name or track name to the command. Say the name exactly as it appears on your device.
Climate (If Equipped)
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
setting.
505
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
To adjust the temperature, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F
(15.5–29.5°C).
Set Temperature ___
Phone
DescriptionVoice Command
Pair a cell phone or Bluetooth enabled device.Pair Phone
Redial the last number that you dialed.Redial
Dial a number.
1
Dial ___
Call a specific contact from your phonebook.
2
Call ___
Call a specific contact from your phonebook at a
specific location.
3
Call ___ ___
Listen to a text message.Listen to Message
Listen to a specific text message from a list of text
messages.
Listen to Message ___
Reply to the last text message.Reply to Message
1
Add the number you want to dial to the command.
2
Add a contact name from your phonebook to the command. Say the first and last name
of your contact exactly as it appears on your device.
3
Add a contact name and location from your phonebook to the command. Say the first
and last name of your contact exactly as it appears on your device.
506
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Navigation (If Equipped)
Setting a Destination
DescriptionVoice Command
Enter a destination address. When prompted,
provide the house number, the street and city.
Find an Address
Search for a point of interest by name or by category.Find a Place
Search for a nearby point of interest by category.
1
Find the Next ___
Search for a point of interest category.
1
Find a POI Category
Set your saved home address as your destination.Drive Home
Set your saved place of work as your destination.Drive to Work
Display and select from a list of previous destina-
tions.
Show Previous Destinations
Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.Show Favorites
1
Add a point of interest category or the name of a major brand or chain to the command.
Route Guidance
DescriptionVoice Command
Cancel the current route.Cancel Route
Select an alternate route.Detour
Repeat the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction
Display an overview of the route.Show Route
Display a list of traffic events on your route.Show Traffic
Display the map on the touchscreen.Show Map
Display a two-dimensional map with north toward
the top of the touchscreen.
North Up
Display a two-dimensional map with the direction
you are traveling toward the top of the touchscreen.
Heading Up
Display a three-dimensional map with the direction
you are traveling toward the front.
Show 3D
507
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Apps
General
DescriptionVoice Command
Start an app. The system prompts you for the app
name.
Mobile Applications
Get a list of apps running on your device.List Applications
Search and connect to apps running on your device.Find Applications
Active App
DescriptionVoice Command
Get a list of voice commands for a specific app.
1
___ Help
Close an app.
1
Exit ___
1
Add an app name to the command.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If Equipped)
DescriptionVoice
command
Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show
Traffic
Displays the current weather map.Show
Weather
Map
Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel
Prices
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5
Day Fore-
cast
508
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Voice Settings
DescriptionVoice Command
Go to the voice settings menu.Voice Settings
Switch long voice prompts on.Interaction Mode Novice
Switch short voice prompts on.Interaction Mode Advanced
Switch call confirmation on. The system prompts
you to confirm before making a call.
Phone Confirmation On
Switch call confirmation off. The system does not
prompt you to confirm before making a call.
Phone Confirmation Off
Switch the display of voice commands on.Voice Command Lists On
Switch the display of voice commands off.Voice Command Lists Off
Automatic Blower Motor Speed
Reduction
If necessary, the system decreases the
blower motor speed when you are using
voice commands to reduce the amount of
background noise in your vehicle. It returns
to normal when you are done.
Switching Automatic Blower Motor
Speed Reduction Off
Simultaneously press the A/C and
recirculated air buttons.
ENTERTAINMENT
A
B
E293491
Audio source. Select to choose
a different audio source.
A
Presets. Swipe left to view more
presets.
B
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
509
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
Menu Item
AM
FM
1
SIRIUS
CD
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB
Bluetooth Stereo
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
Apps
1
This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the
touchscreen, select:
Menu Item
Direct Tune
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
Once you have entered the station's
call numbers, you can select:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Enter
Press to exit
without changing
the station.
Cancel
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station
and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.
You may be able to add additional preset
pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
510
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
E234451
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. We are not responsible for any such
programming changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Direct Tune
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
The system tunes to the station you select.Enter
You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
Cancel
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
511
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-
imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
Replay
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
Live
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
ALERT
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts.
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.
You may be able to add additional preset
pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
ence and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
512
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Troubleshooting Tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.
Acquiring Signal
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
There is an internal module or
system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer avail-
able.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the Siri-
usXM satellite or SiriusXM
tower to your vehicle antenna.
Satellite acquiring
signal…
No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.
Update of channel program-
ming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve subscrip-
tion issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call 1-
888-539-7474
Use the channel guide or the
Sirius XM Settings tile to turn
off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
All the channels in the selected
category are either skipped or
locked.
None found. Check
channel guide.
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
SIRIUS Subscription
updated
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 531).
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
513
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
Pressing this button allows you to cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Presets
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
514
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential Station Issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment by
the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The recep-
tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until the
audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is available.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
515
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Potential Station Issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. The station
is not available in your current
location.
The previously stored multicast
preset or direct tune is not
available in your current recep-
tion area.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form.
1
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form.
1
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
1
You can find the form here:
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS. The vehicle
manufacturer and DTS are not responsible
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed,
added or deleted at any time at the station
owner's discretion.
CD (If Equipped)
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
FunctionButton
You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
Repeat
516
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
FunctionButton
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
FunctionButton
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Repeat
Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the
currently playing track, press the cover art
or Info button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
buttons allow you to skip forward or
backward within a track.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
FunctionButton
If available, displays the list of tracks in the
Now Playing playlist.
Browse
This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
New Search
Play All
517
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
FunctionButton
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
A-Z Jump
If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Explore Device
USB Ports
E211463
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the
instrument panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 528).
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
518
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the
file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.
CLIMATE
Touch the climate button on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 531).
Accessing the Climate Control
Menu
E265038
Touch the button to access
additional controls for the front
climate system.
Directing the Airflow
Touch the button to direct
airflow to the windshield air
vents and de-mister.
E244097
Touch the button to direct
airflow to the instrument panel
air vents.
Touch the button to direct
airflow to the footwell air vents.
You can direct air through any combination
of these air vents.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Touch up or down to increase or
decrease the volume of air that
circulates in your vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
Touch up or down on the left-hand
temperature control to set the left-hand
temperature.
Note: This control also adjusts the
right-hand side temperature when you
switch off dual zone mode.
Touch up or down on the right-hand
temperature control to set the right-hand
temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Touch the button to switch on
automatic operation, then set
the temperature.
The system adjusts the blower motor
speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and outside or recirculated air
to reach and maintain the temperature you
have set.
Switching the Air Conditioning On
and Off
A pop-up appears on the screen
to display the air conditioning
options.
MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate
and maximize cooling. The driver and
passenger temperatures are set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning
automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
519
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning
on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to
improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions, such as
maximum defrost, the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On
and Off
Touch the button.
Switching the Climate Controlled
Seats On and Off
E265282
Touch the button to cycle
through the various climate
controlled seat settings.
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and
Off
E265280
Touch the button to switch on
temperature control for the
right-hand side of the vehicle.
Switching the Heated Exterior
Mirrors On and Off
E266189
Touch the button.
Switching the Heated Windshield
On and Off
Touch the button to clear the
windshield of thin ice and fog.
The heated windshield turns off
after a short period of time.
Switching the Heated Rear
Window On and Off
E184884
Touch the button to clear the
rear window of thin ice and fog.
Switching the Heated Seats On
and Off
Touch the button to cycle
through the various heat
settings.
Switching the Heated Steering
Wheel On and Off
Touch the button.
Switching Maximum Air
Conditioning On and Off
Touch the button for maximum
cooling.
Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning
turns on and the blower motor adjusts to
the highest speed.
Switching Maximum Defrost On
and Off
Touch the button for maximum
defrosting.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
520
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Note: The heated rear window also turns
on when you select maximum defrost.
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off
Touch the button to switch
between outside air and
recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may
reduce the time needed to cool the interior,
when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or
prevent you from switching on, in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk
of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on
and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
Switching the Ventilated Seats On
and Off
E268558
Touch the button to cycle
through the various ventilated
seat settings.
Accessing Rear Climate Controls
E270447
Touch the button to access
additional controls for the rear
climate system.
Rear Climate Control Lock
Indicator
E265289
Touch the button.
When on, you can only operate
the rear passenger settings
through the front controls.
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and
Off
Touch the button to switch on
rear automatic operation, then
set the temperature.
Switching the Rear Climate
Controlled Seats On and Off
E265282
Touch the button to cycle
through the various climate
controlled seat settings.
Switching the Rear Heated Seats
On and Off
Touch the button to cycle
through the various heat
settings.
Switching the Rear Ventilated
Seats On and Off
E268558
Touch the button to cycle
through the various ventilated
seat settings.
PHONE
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
521
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Check the compatibility of your device on
the regional website.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
Go to the settings menu on your cell phone
and switch Bluetooth on.
Select the phone option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Add Phone.
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
vehicle on your cell phone.
2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone.
Note: A number appears on your cell phone
and on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the number on your cell
phone matches the number on the
touchscreen.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you
have successfully paired your cell phone.
4. Download the phonebook from your
cell phone when you are prompted.
Note: If you pair more than one cell phone,
use the phone settings to specify the
primary phone. You can change this setting
at any time.
Using Your Cell Phone
Recent Call List
Display and select an entry from a list of
previous calls.
Contacts
Display a smart search form to look up your
contacts. Use the List button to
alphabetically sort your contacts.
Change Phone
Display the list of paired or connected
devices that you can select.
Phone Settings
Change ring tones, alerts or pair another
phone.
Do Not Disturb
Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones
and alerts off.
Phone Keypad
Directly dial a number.
Mute
Mute the microphone when in a call or
voice recognition session.
Text Messaging
Setting Text Message Notification
iOS
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select the information icon to the right
of your vehicle.
4. Switch text message notification on.
Android
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select the profiles option.
4. Select the phone profile.
5. Switch text message notification on.
522
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Using Text Messaging
DescriptionMenu Item
Hear the text message.Hear It
View the text message.View
Call the sender.Call
Reply to the text message with a standard text message.Reply
Apple CarPlay (If Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: Certain features of the system are
not available when you are using Apple
CarPlay.
Switching Apple CarPlay Off
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Apple CarPlay Preferences.
2. Switch Apple CarPlay off.
Android Auto (If Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: You might need to enable Android
Auto from the settings menu.
Note: Certain features of the system are
not available when you are using Android
Auto.
Switching Android Auto Off
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Android Auto.
2. Switch Android Auto off.
NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: For more information, refer to our
website.
Select the navigation option on
the feature bar.
E297557
Map view menu.A
Zoom out.B
Zoom in.C
Route guidance menu.D
Destination entry menu.E
523
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Setting a Destination
Destination Entry Menu
DescriptionItem
Enter a destination address.Search
Display and select from a list of previous destinations.Previous Destinations
Set your saved home address as your destinationHome
Set your saved place of work as your destination.Work
Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.Favorites
Setting a Destination Using the Text
Entry Screen
E297558
Text entry field.A
Automatic suggestions based on
the text you enter.
B
Information icon.C
Search.D
Keyboard settings.E
Note: Select one of the suggestions to
copy the detail to the text entry field.
You can search by entering all or part of
the destination, such as the Address, POI
Category or Name, Intersection, City,
Latitude/Longitude, etc. Tips: If you do
not specify a location, the system will
use the current vehicle location. You can
specify a location by address, city, state
or zip code. For additional search support,
please visit: support.ford.com.
Note: Press the button in the top right-hand
corner of the main map to display estimated
time of arrival, remaining travel time or
distance to destination.
524
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Setting a Destination Using the Map
Screen
E297559
Re-center the map.A
Selected location.B
3D map rotation. Swipe left or
right.
C
Start route guidance.D
Destination name.E
Select the location on the map.
Select Start to begin route guidance.
Changing the Format of the Map
Display the map in one of the following
formats:
• A two-dimensional map with the
direction you are traveling toward the
top of the screen.
• A two-dimensional map with north
toward the top of the screen.
• A three-dimensional map with the
direction you are traveling toward the
front.
Zoom
Display more or less detail on the map.
Note: You can use pinch gestures to zoom
in and out. Place two fingers on the screen
and move them apart to zoom in. Place two
fingers on the screen and bring them
together to zoom out.
Route Guidance
E297560
F
A
Turn indicator. Select to hear the
last voice prompt.
A
Point of interest.B
Estimated time of arrival,
distance to destination or time
to destination.
C
Current road.D
Mute guidance prompts.E
Cancel route guidance.F
Note: To change guidance prompt volume,
turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays.
525
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Route Guidance Menu
DescriptionMenu Item
Adjust your map preferences for when route guidance is active.Screen View
View a full screen map when route guidance is active.Full Map
View highway exit information for your current route.Highway Exit Info
View the turn list for your current route. Select a road to avoid
it.
Turn List
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information
by pressing this button. This information requires an active
subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. When a route
is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays. When a
route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Traffic List
Adjust navigation settings. See Settings (page 531).Navigation Settings
View information about your current location.Where Am I?
Cancel route guidance.Cancel Route
View the entire current route on the map.View Route
View an alternative route compared to your current one.Detour
Change the order or remove waypoints.Edit Waypoints
The system determines the order of waypoints for you.Optimize Order
Go to the next screen and start the new route.Go
Adjusting the Guidance Prompt
Volume
Turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays to adjust the volume.
Note: If you have inadvertently adjusted
the volume to zero, press the turn indicator
button to play the last voice prompt and
then adjust the volume to the desired level.
Muting Guidance Prompts
Select the mute option on the
screen to mute guidance
prompts.
Note: The system mutes the next and all
future guidance prompts.
Adding Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
You can add up to five waypoints.
1. Select the search option on the map.
2. Set a destination.
3. Select Add Waypoint.
4. Select Go.
526
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Canceling Route Guidance
Select the route guidance menu
option on the active guidance
screen.
Select Cancel Route.
E294817
Note: The route guidance menu option is
always in the bottom right-hand corner of
the main map.
cityseeker (If Equipped)
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address, phone number and a star
rating.
Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
• Restaurant
• Business center
• Handicap facilities
• Laundry
• Refrigerator
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center
• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.
527
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link information. It helps you
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores.
The system calculates a reasonable
efficient route based on available speed
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
SYNC 3 route.
Michelin Travel Guide (If Equipped)
The Michelin travel guide is a service which
provides additional information about
certain places of interest, for example
restaurants, hotels and tourist sites. Points
of interest that have Michelin travel guide
information display a button to show you
more information. Push the button to see
the additional information. If you have
paired your phone with the system, you
can press the phone button to directly
establish a call with the selected point of
interest.
Navigation Map Accuracy and
Updates
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to www.here.com. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
The navigation system map data may
contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time,
changing circumstances, sources used and
the nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results. Inaccurate speed limit
information, turn restrictions and other
road attributes may affect the determined
route and associated guidance
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership. Depending on your purchase
agreement, you might be eligible for free
Map update. You can choose to download
the Map data update onto a USB, order a
USB, or use Wi-Fi to deliver automatic
updates. To update your Map data over
Wi-Fi, your vehicle must be connected to
a Wi-Fi access point. Map Data files are
large, so it is highly recommended to
perform the update when free Wi-Fi is
available otherwise high data rates may
apply. For USB updates, free map update
eligibility, and other details, contact
dealers at 1-866-462-8837 in the United
States and Canada or 01-800-557-5539
in Mexico or visit our local website for more
information.
APPS
The system allows you interact with select
mobile apps while keeping your eyes on
the road. Voice commands, your steering
wheel buttons, or a quick tap on your
touchscreen give you advanced control of
compatible mobile apps. You can also
stream your favorite music or podcasts,
share your time of arrival with friends, and
keep connected safely.
528
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
When you start an app through the system
for the first time, you could be asked to
grant certain permissions. You can review
and change the permissions that you have
granted at any time when your vehicle is
not moving. We recommend that you
check your data plan before using your
apps through the system. Using them
could result in additional charges. We also
recommend that you check the app
provider's terms and conditions and
privacy policy before using their app. Make
sure that you have an active account for
apps that you want to use through the
system. Some apps will work with no
setup. Others require you to configure
some personal settings before you can use
them.
Note: For more information about available
apps, visit catalog.ford.com.
Using Apps on an iOS Device
Select the apps option on the
feature bar.
1. If your device is connected via USB,
switch Apple CarPlay off. See Phone
(page 521).
2. Connect your device to a USB port or
pair and connect using Bluetooth.
3. If prompted to enable CarPlay, select
Disable.
4. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use through SYNC.
Note: If you close the apps on your device,
you will not be able to use them through the
system.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
the touchscreen.
Note: Connect your device to a USB port if
you want to use a navigation app. When
using a navigation app, keep your device
unlocked and the app open.
Using Apps on an Android Device
Select the apps option on the
feature bar.
1. If your device is connected via USB,
switch Android Auto off. See Phone
(page 521).
2. Pair your device. See Phone (page 521).
3. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use through SYNC.
Note: If you close the apps on your device,
you will not be able to use them through the
system.
4. Select Find Mobile Apps.
Note: The system searches and connects
to compatible apps that are running on your
device.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
the touchscreen.
Note: Mobile Apps on your device use the
USB port to establish a connection with
SYNC. Some devices may lose the ability to
play music over USB when Mobile Apps are
enabled.
Using Mobile Navigation on an
Android Device
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Switch Android Auto off. See Phone
(page 521).
3. Switch on Enable Mobile Apps via
USB in the Mobile Apps Settings tile.
4. Select the apps option on the feature
bar.
5. Select the navigation app that you
want to use on the touchscreen.
Note: When using a navigation app, keep
your device unlocked and the app open.
529
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’ s current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
Map
530
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SETTINGS
E280315
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
E268570
Once you select a tile, press the
button next to a menu item to
view an explanation of the
feature or setting.
Sound
Select this tile to adjust the sound settings.
Clock
Select this tile to adjust the clock settings.
Bluetooth
Select this tile to switch Bluetooth on and
off and adjust the settings.
Phone
Select this tile to connect, disconnect, and
manage the connected device settings.
Audio
Select this tile to adjust the audio settings.
Driver Assist (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust Driver Assist
features like Parking Aids, Lane Keeping
System, Pedestrian Detection, and
Auto-Start-Stop.
Vehicle
Select this tile to adjust vehicle settings
like windows, alarm, lighting, and MyKey
settings.
FordPass
Select this tile to adjust the FordPass
settings
General
Select this tile to adjust settings like
language, measurement units, or to reset
the system.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
Select this tile to switch 911 Assist on and
off.
Automatic Updates
Select this tile to adjust the automatic
update settings.
Mobile Apps
Select this tile to adjust permissions,
enable, disable, and update mobile apps.
531
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Display
Select this tile to adjust display settings
like brightness and auto dim.
Charge Settings (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the electric vehicle
charge settings.
Voice Control
Select this tile to adjust voice control
settings like command confirmations and
displayed lists.
Navigation (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust navigation settings
like map preferences and route guidance.
Multi Contour Seats (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the position and
massage function of your multi contour
seats.
Seats (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the lumbar
function of your seats.
Message Center (If Equipped)
Select this tile to view vehicle messages.
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust recalled memory
features when using personal profiles.
Valet Mode (If Equipped)
Select this tile to enable and disable valet
mode.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Select this tile to change the color or
intensity of the interior lighting.
532
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Voice Recognition
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
The system does not under-
stand what I am saying.
– You are using the wrong voice commands.
• See Using Voice Recognition (page 503).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You are speaking too soon.
• Wait for the voice prompt before you speak.
The system does not under-
stand the name of a track or
artist.
– Device limitation. Bluetooth does not support voice
commands.
• Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
– You are using the wrong voice commands.
• See Using Voice Recognition (page 503).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears on
your device.
• Say the name of the track or artist exactly as it
appears on your device. Spell out any abbreviations
in the name.
The song or artist name may have some special char-
acters that are not being recognized by the system.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the files on your device or use the touch-
screen to select and play the track.
533
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears on
your device.
• Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
as it appears on your device. Spell out any abbrevi-
ations in the name.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the contact on your device or use the
touchscreen to select and call the contact.
The system does not under-
stand the name of a contact
in the phonebook on my
device and calls the wrong
contact.
– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears on
your device.
• Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
as it appears on your device. The system applies
phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the names of contacts in the phone-
book on your device. Select the name of the
contact on the touchscreen and use the Hear it
option to get an idea of how the system expects
you to pronounce it.
The system does not under-
stand foreign names of
contacts in the phonebook
on my device.
– Device limitation.
• The system uses text-to-speech technology and
uses a synthetically generated voice rather than
pre-recorded human voice.
The system voice prompts
and the pronunciation of
some words does not seem
to be very accurate.
USB and Bluetooth Audio
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect my device. – Device malfunction.
• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off,
reset it and try again.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
534
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Incorrect device settings.
• Make sure that your device does not have an auto-
install program or active security settings.
• Check that your device is not set only to charge.
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
The system does not recog-
nize my device.
– Device limitation.
• Do not leave your device in your vehicle during very
hot or very cold weather conditions.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
The system does not under-
stand the name of a track or
artist.
– Device limitation. Bluetooth does not support voice
commands.
• Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
I cannot stream audio from
my Bluetooth device.
– Incompatible device.
• Check the compatibility of your device on our
website.
– Device not connected.
• Pair your device. See Phone (page 521).
– Media player not running.
• Start the media player on your device.
The system does not recog-
nize the music on my device.
– Missing or incorrect audio file metadata, for example
artist, song title, album or genre.
• Repair the files on your device.
– Corrupt files.
• Repair the files on your device.
535
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Copyright protected files.
• Use a device that contains files that are not copy-
right protected.
– Unsupported file format.
• Repair or convert the files to a supported format.
See Entertainment (page 509).
– Device indexing required.
• Re-index your device. See Settings (page 531).
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
Sometimes I cannot hear a
track playing on my device.
– Device malfunction.
• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off,
reset it and try again.
When I disconnect my iOS
device the audio volume is
set to maximum.
– Device limitation.
• Turn the volume down on your device
If the system does not play the tracks on your USB device
in the correct order, the following information could help:
The system does not play
the tracks on my USB drive
in the correct order.
– If you are selecting USB as the audio source when the
system is still indexing, SYNC plays tracks sorted
alphabetically by file name in the root directory.
– If you are selecting USB as the audio source after the
system has finished indexing, SYNC plays all tracks
sorted alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag
regardless of where they are located. SYNC uses the
file name if the title in the ID3 Tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting the option to play all tracks from
the browsing menu, SYNC plays all tracks sorted
alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag regardless of
where they are located. SYNC uses the file name if the
title in the ID3 Tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting a track when using the explore
device option, SYNC plays tracks sorted alphabetically
by file name in the folder you have selected. SYNC
then plays all tracks in any subfolders in the folder you
have selected.
536
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Phone
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
During a call, I can hear
excessive background noise.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Check and adjust the audio settings on your cell
phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone and Bluetooth on and off
and try again.
– Cell phone microphone muted.
• Unmute your cell phone microphone.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
During a call, I cannot hear
the other person and they
cannot hear me.
– System restart required.
• Restart the system. Switch the ignition off and
open the door. Close the door and lock the vehicle.
Wait until the touchscreen is off and any illumin-
ated USB ports are not illuminated. Unlock the
vehicle, switch the ignition on and try again.
I cannot download phone-
book.
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
Settings (page 531).
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
• Check the location of the missing contacts on your
cell phone. If they are stored on the SIM card, move
them to the cell phone memory.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
Settings (page 531).
A message displays
suggesting that my phone-
book has downloaded but it
is empty or it has missing
contacts.
537
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.
• Install the latest cell phone firmware.
• Delete your device from system and delete SYNC
from your device and try again.
• Switch automatic phonebook download off. See
Settings (page 531).
I cannot connect my cell
phone.
Text messaging does not
work.
– You did not switch on text message notifications.
• Switch text message notifications on. See Phone
(page 521).
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.
– Device message sharing is not enabled.
• Check the permissions on your device to ensure
text message sharing is enabled.
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
I cannot hear text messages.
538
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Navigation (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot enter a street name
when I am abroad.
– Incorrect entry method.
• Enter the street name with the country.
The system does not recog-
nize coordinates.
– You are using the wrong coordinates format.
• Use the format ##. #####, ##. ##### (for N/S ,
E/W). Add a minus before coordinates if the
direction is West and keep a positive value if the
direction is East, for example 12.5412 means East
and -12.5412 means West.
539
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Apps
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
The system cannot find any
apps.
– Incompatible device.
• You will need an Android device with OS 4.3 or
higher or an iOS device with iOS 8.0 or higher. Pair
and connect your Android device to find AppLink
compatible apps. Connect your iOS device to a
USB port or pair and connect using Bluetooth.
I have a compatible device
and it is correctly connected
but the system still cannot
find any apps.
– AppLink compatible apps not installed on your device.
• Download and install the latest version of the app.
– AppLink compatible apps not running on your device.
• Start the apps to allow the system to find them
and make sure you sign in to any apps if required.
– Incorrect app settings.
• Check and adjust the app settings on your device
and allow SYNC to access the app if required.
I have a compatible device,
it is correctly connected and
my apps are running but the
system still cannot find any
apps.
– Apps failed to fully close.
• Restart the apps and try again.
• If you have an Android device with apps that have
an exit or quit option, use this and then restart the
apps. Alternatively, use the force stop option in the
settings menu on your device.
• If you have an iOS device with iOS 7.0 or higher, tap
the home button on your device twice and then
swipe the app upward to close it.
I have an Android device
that is correctly connected,
I have restarted my apps
and they are running but the
system still cannot find
them.
– An issue on some older versions of the Android oper-
ating system could result in apps not being found.
• Switch Bluetooth off and on again to force the
system to reconnect to your device.
540
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I have an iOS device that is
correctly connected, I have
restarted my apps and they
are running but the system
still cannot find them.
– Cable connection issue.
• Disconnect the cable from your device, wait for a
moment and then connect it again to force the
system to reconnect to your device.
I have an Android device
running a media app which
the system has found but I
cannot hear the sound or
the sound is very quiet.
– Device volume is low.
• Turn the volume up on your device.
I have an Android device
running a number of
compatible apps but the
system cannot find all of
them.
– Device limitation. Some Android devices have a limited
number of Bluetooth ports that apps can use to
connect. If you have more apps running on your device
than the number of available Bluetooth ports, the
system cannot find all of them.
• Close some of the apps to allow the system to find
those that you want to use.
541
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Wi-Fi Connectivity
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi
network.
– Password error.
• Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID,. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection
disconnects after successful
connection.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot
but the network signal
strength is weak.
– Obstructed network signal.
• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the
list of available networks
that I expect to see.
– Hidden network.
• Make the network visible and try again.
542
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot see SYNC when I
search for Wi-Fi networks on
my cell phone or other
device.
– System limitation.
• SYNC does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at this time.
– Weak network signal
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Software downloads take
too long.
– No software update available.
– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
of terms and conditions.
• Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
The system seems to
connect to a Wi-Fi network
and the signal strength is
excellent but the software
does not update.
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and SolutionSymptom
You have not set up Personal Profiles.
I cannot create a profile.
You entered an invalid profile.
You did not select a memory button when prompted.
You did not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you
shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
Personal Profiles has been switched off.
You did not select the lock button on the remote control.
I cannot link a remote
control.
The remote control selected was already associated with
another profile and the system declined to overwrite.
The system performed a profile recall when linking a
remote control.
You did not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you
shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
543
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and SolutionSymptom
You are using the old linking method.
Personal Profiles does not support your unsaved settings.
My personalized settings do
not save.
A different personal profile is active.
Another user changed the settings for the wrong personal
profile.
You did not create a personal profile.
My profile will not recall.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The profile you requested is already active.
You did not link the memory button you are using to a
profile.
You did not link the remote control you are using to a
profile.
You are using the wrong remote control.
You are pressing a button other than the unlock or remote
start on a linked remote control.
You deleted the personal profile.
You switched the personal profiles off.My preset positions recall,
but my profile does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my
preset positions do not.
The preset positions are the same as the guest or previ-
ously active profile.
Unlink and relink your remote control in the Personal
Profiles menu. You may need to see your authorized dealer.
I lost a remote control.
You erased and reprogrammed the remote controls. This
could happen if you let a dealership add a new remote
control to replace a lost one.
I lost all profiles.
Someone performed a master reset without your know-
ledge.
544
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Resetting the System
1. Simultaneously press and hold the
seek up and the audio unit power
buttons until the screen goes black.
2. Wait three minutes to allow the system
to complete the reset.
3. Press the audio unit power button to
switch the system on.
Note: You can reset the system to restore
functionality that has stopped working. The
system reset is designed to restore
functionality and not delete any data that
you have stored.
Additional Information and
Assistance
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer or refer to our website.
545
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
We will repair or replace any properly
authorized dealer-installed Ford Original
Accessory found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or workmanship
during the warranty period, as well as any
component damaged by the defective
accessories.
We will warrant your Ford Original
Accessory through the warranty that
provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Ford Licensed Accessories are the
accessory manufacturer's designs. The
manufacturer develops and therefore
warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and
does not design or test these accessories
to Ford Motor Company engineering
requirements. Contact an authorized Ford
dealer for the manufacturer’s limited
warranty details, and request a copy of the
Ford Licensed Accessories product limited
warranty from the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
546
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Accessories
AUXILIARY SWITCHES
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
equipped with radio transmitters, for
example, two-way radios, telephones
and theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulations, and
should be installed by an authorized
dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
E220728
The auxiliary switch option package
provides six switches mounted in the
overhead console. These switches operate
when the vehicle is running or from battery
power, depending on the switchable fuse
AUXF4's location in the upfitter relay box.
We recommend, however, that the engine
remain running to maintain battery charge
when using the auxiliary switches for
extended periods of time or higher current
draws.
Note: When your vehicle has a diesel
engine, use the auxiliary switches only when
the engine is running. The glow plugs also
drain battery power when the ignition key is
in the on position. Using the auxiliary
switches, even for limited amounts of time,
can cause your battery to drain quickly and
prevent your vehicle from restarting.
When switched on, the auxiliary switches
provide electrical battery power for a
variety of personal or commercial uses.
Switches 1 through 4 provide 25 amps.
Switches 5 and 6 provide 40 amps.
The relay box for the auxiliary switches is
in the engine compartment. See your
authorized dealer for service.
The relays are coded as shown:
547
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Accessories
E220729
Each switch includes a blunt-cut, sealed
wire. The wires are under the instrument
panel on the right-hand side of the
passenger footwell.
548
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Accessories
E314958
The power leads are coded as shown:
Fuse Amp RatingWire ColorCircuit NumberSwitch
25ABrown with green
trace
CB117AAUX 1
25AViolet with orange
trace
CB114AAUX 2
25ABlue with green
trace
CB116AAUX 3
25AGray with brown
trace
CB113AAUX 4
40ABrown with blue
trace
CB115AAUX 5
40AGray with orange
trace
CB118AAUX 6
549
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Accessories
Upfitter Interface Module (If Equipped)
The Upfitter Interface Module (UIM) is an
electronic control module that operates
equipment (such as lift buckets, cranes,
motors, salt spreaders and snow plows)
with external relays.
If you replace the module, it will require
additional programming by the upfitter.
Obtain this data directly from the upfitter
company. The upfitter contact information
is in the vehicle door opening.
For more information on the Upfitter
Interface Module and the auxiliary
switches, contact your upfitter.
550
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans (U.S. Only)
Ford Protect extended service plan means
peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and
provides more protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford
Protect extended service plans!
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With Ford Protect
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising
repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four mechanical Ford Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to
list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including warranty repairs, and
Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.
551
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle
Ford Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
• Cabin air filter replacement every
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric
vehicles only).
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 5% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plan (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
extended service plan. Ford Protect
extended service plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company
of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations.
Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
and rental. When you purchase Ford
Protect extended service plan, you receive
added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Mexico, provided by a network of
participating authorized Ford Motor
Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
and the United States are not eligible for
Ford Protect extended service plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect extended service plan that is
right for you.
552
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Ford Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 429).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Our Genuine Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock our parts and our
authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use our authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle comes with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
message in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval
may be up to one year or 10,000 mi
(16,000 km).
553
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor after each oil change. See Oil
Change Indicator Reset (page 345).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals.
You can drive high performance vehicles
in such a way that may lead to higher oil
consumption this includes extended time
at high engine speeds, high loads, engine
braking, hard cornering maneuvers, track
and off-road usage. Under these
conditions, oil consumption of
approximately 1 quart per 500 miles (1 liter
per 800 km) is possible. As a result, you
need to check the engine oil level at every
refueling and adjust to maintain proper
levels to avoid engine damage.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
We have recommended maintenance
intervals for various parts and component
systems based upon engineering testing.
We rely upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
our genuine or our authorized
re-manufactured replacement parts
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and our Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives
and chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives
not approved by us as part of your vehicle’ s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using our approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
554
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Month
Air filter restriction gauge.
1
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires including the spare for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display.
1
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
1
1
Diesel vehicles only.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps, brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
555
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-Point Inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt or belts
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires including the spare for wear and
proper pressure
2
Fluid levels
1
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir and window washer.
2
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor that determines when you should
change the engine oil based on how you
use your vehicle. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
556
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
When to Expect the Message Prompting You to Change Your Oil
Vehicle Use and Examplemi (km)
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi
(12,000–16,000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving.
No, or moderate, load or towing.
Flat to moderately hilly roads.
No extended idling.
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi
(8,000–12,000 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing.
Mountainous or off-road conditions.
Extended idling, 200-300 hours.
Extended hot or cold operation.
Extreme
2,500–5,000 mi
(4,000–8,000 km)
Maximum load or towing.
Extreme hot or cold operation.
Use of high sulfur diesel fuel.
Note: Use the appropriate special operating condition for maintenance information when
using high sulfur diesel fuels, operating your vehicle off-road or in dusty conditions, such as
unpaved roads.
Note: For every hour that your vehicle idles, it accumulates the equivalent of approximately
25 mi (40 km).
557
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Gasoline Engine
Normal Maintenance Intervals
10,000 mi (16,000 km)/ 450 Engine Hours or 12 Months - Whichever Comes First
Change the engine oil and filter.
1
Rotate the tires, inspect tire wear and measure the tread depth.
2
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
Perform multi-point inspection - recommended.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and the parking brake.
Inspect the engine coolant concentration, freeze-point protection, level and the hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the front axle and U-joints. If applicable, lubricate the grease fittings. Four-wheel
drive vehicles.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and the U-
joints. If applicable, lubricate the grease fittings.
1
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
2
Rotate the front wheels on vehicles with dual rear wheels when specified. Only rotate
the rear wheels if you notice unusual wear.
Brake Fluid Maintenance
1
Change the brake fluid.
2
Every three years
1
Perform this maintenance item every three years. Do not exceed the designated time
for the interval.
2
Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
558
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Other Maintenance Items
Replace the cabin air filter.Every 20,000 mi
(32,180 km)
Replace the engine air filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace the front wheel bearing grease and grease seal, if
you use non-sealed bearings.
Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.
Every 100,000 mi
(160,934 km)
Inspect the accessory drive belt or belts.
1
Every 100,000 mi
(160,934 km)
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter on 6-speed
transmission. Consult dealer for requirements.
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)
Replace the accessory drive belt or belts if not replaced within
the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
Replace the front wheel bearings and seals if you use non-
sealed bearings.
Change the axle(s) fluid. See exceptions.
Change the transfer case fluid, if applicable.
Change the engine coolant.
2
At 200,000 mi
(320,000 km)
1
If not replaced, inspect the belt or belts every 15,000 mi (24,000 km).
2
Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (320,000 km), then every 5 years or
100,000 mi (160,000 km).
Diesel Engine
Electronic Air Filter Maintenance
Minder
Diesel engines have an electronic air filter
maintenance minder that indicates the
status of the engine air filter. You can find
this information within the Vehicle
Maintenance menu, in the information
displays. One of three indications are
possible:
559
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
ResultEngine Air Filter Status
Message
Indicates the engine air filter is performing as expected.Filter OK
Indicates that there is a higher than expected restriction
across the engine air filter, which could represent an air filter
at full useful life or a filter with an obstruction.
Check filter
1
When this displays, inspect the engine air filter and replace
if necessary.
After the inspection or engine air filter replacement, you must
reset the system in order to change the status from Check
Filter to Filter OK.
Indicates that there is an error within the electronic air filter
maintenance minder system requiring service.
System fault
1
Reset the engine air filter information monitor after you replace the air filter.
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Change the engine oil and filter.
2
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display.
Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank.
Rotate the tires, inspect the tires for wear and measure the tread depth.
4
Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the air filter if necessary.
3
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and the parking brake.
Inspect the engine and secondary cooling system coolant concentration freeze-point
protection, level and the hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
560
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Inspect the front axle and U-joints. Lubricate any grease fittings. Four-wheel drive
vehicles.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and the U-
joints. Lubricate any grease fittings.
1
Do not exceed one year/10,000 mi (16,000 km) or 350 engine hours between service
intervals.
2
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
3
Reset the engine air filter information monitor after you replace the air filter.
4
Rotate the front wheels on vehicles with dual rear wheels when specified. Only rotate
the rear wheels if you notice unusual wear.
Brake Fluid Maintenance
1
Change the brake fluid.
2
Every three years
1
Perform this maintenance item every three years. Do not exceed the designated time
for the interval.
2
Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
Other Maintenance items
1
Replace the cabin air filter.Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)
Replace the engine air filter.
2
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters.
Inspect the engine and secondary cooling system coolant
concentration freeze-point protection, additive corrosion
inhibitor strength, coolant level, and hoses. Add coolant
additive if necessary.
Replace the engine air inlet foam filter.Every 50,000 mi
(80,467 km)
Replace the front wheel bearing grease and grease seal if
using non-sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Inspect the accessory drive belt or belts.
3
At 90,000 mi
(144,000 km)
561
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Other Maintenance items
1
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. Consult
dealer for requirements.
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)
Replace the accessory drive belt or belts if not replaced
within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km)
Replace the front wheel bearings and seals if using non-
sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
Change the axle(s) fluid. See exceptions.
Change the transfer case fluid, if equipped.
Change the engine and secondary cooling system coolant.
4
At 200,000 mi
(320,000 km)
1
You can perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last oil
change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
Reset the engine air filter information monitor after you replace the air filter.
3
Perform follow-up inspections every 15,000 mi (24,000 km) after the initial inspection.
Replace the belt or belts at 150,000 mi (240,000 km).
4
Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (320,000 km), then every 5 years or
100,000 mi (160,000 km).
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Gasoline Engine
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
562
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Inspect and lubricate the U-joints grease fittings - if
applicable.
Inspect frequently, service
as required
See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
1
Change the engine oil and filter.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months.
Inspect and lubricate the U-joints grease fittings. - if
applicable.
Replace the front wheel bearing grease and grease seals
if you use non-sealed bearings.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change the transfer case fluid, four-wheel drive vehicles.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.
1
Rotate the front wheels on vehicles with dual rear wheels when specified. Only rotate
the rear wheels if you notice unusual wear.
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
- Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery
Replace the engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace the cabin air filter.
Inspect the brake system.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Lubricate the control arm and steering ball joints grease
fittings - if applicable.
Rotate the tires, inspect tires for wear and measure the
tread depth.
1
Inspect and lubricate the U-joints grease fittings - if
applicable.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
563
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
- Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery
Change the engine oil and filter.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months or 200 engine
hours.
Replace the front wheel bearing grease and grease seals
if you use non-sealed bearings.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
1
Rotate the front wheels on vehicles with dual rear wheels when specified. Only rotate
the rear wheels if you notice unusual wear.
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions - Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace cabin air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
1
Change engine oil and filter.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Inspect and lubricate U-joints if equipped with grease
fittings.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
1
Rotate the front wheels on vehicles with dual rear wheels when specified. Only rotate
the rear wheels if you notice unusual wear.
Off-road operation
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints and the U-joints,
Lubricate grease fittings - if applicable.
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace the engine air filter.
Change the engine oil and filter.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Replace the cabin air filter.
564
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Off-road operation
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure the tread
depth.
1
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if
you use non-sealed bearings.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
1
Rotate the front wheels on vehicles with dual rear wheels when specified. Only rotate
the rear wheels if you notice unusual wear.
Exclusive use of E85 - Flex Fuel Vehicles Only
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change interval
Diesel Engine
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 15,000 mi
(24,000 km) or six months,
600 engine hours
565
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if you
use non-sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
Frequent or Extended Idling - Over 10 Minutes Per Hour of Normal Driving or Frequent
Low-speed Operation if you use your Vehicle for Stationary Operation
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 15,000 mi
(24,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
Frequent Low-speed Operation, Consistent Heavy Traffic Under 25 mph (40 km/h) or
Long Rush-hour Traffic
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 15,000 mi
(24,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
566
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Sustained High-speed Driving at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating - Maximum Loaded Weight
for Vehicle Operation
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 15,000 mi
(24,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if you
use non-sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
Operating in Sustained Ambient Temperatures Below -9°F (-23°C) or Above 100°F (38°C)
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 15,000 mi
(24,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if using
non-sealed bearings. (Two-wheel drive vehicles)
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Rotate the tires, inspect the tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
1
Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km)
Inspect the brake system pads and rotors.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the air filter
if necessary.
2
Inspect the steering, suspension ball joints and the tie rods.
Lubricate any grease fittings.
567
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Change the engine oil and filter.
3
Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km),
six months or 300 engine
hours
Inspect and lubricate the U-joints.
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 15,000 mi
(24,000 km), 6 months or
600 engine hours
Replace the air inlet foam filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if you
use non-sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
1
Rotate the front wheels on vehicles with dual rear wheels when specified. Only rotate
the rear wheels if you notice unusual wear.
2
Reset the engine air filter information monitor after you replace the air filter.
3
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
Off-road Operation
Inspect the functional holes in each leg of the twin exhaust
tips and the holes under the shield just inboard of the right
rear tire to make sure they are clean and clear of debris or
foreign materials. Refer to the Vehicle Care chapter of your
owner’s manual for more information.
As required
Inspect the steering, suspension ball joints and the tie rods.
Lubricate any grease fittings.
Rotate the tires, inspect the tires for wear and measure
the tread depth.
1
Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km),
six months or 300 engine
hours
Inspect the brake system pads and rotors.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the air filter
if necessary.
2
Change the engine oil and filter.
3
Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km)
or 300 engine hours
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 15,000 mi
(24,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Replace the air inlet foam filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
568
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Off-road Operation
Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if you
use non-sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
Change the rear axle fluid. Dana rear axles only - some F-
350s; all F-450s and F-550s.
Every 50,000 mi
(80,000 km)
Change the transfer case fluid. Four-wheel drive vehicles.
Inspect the front axle fluid. Four-wheel drive vehicles.
1
Rotate the front wheels on vehicles with dual rear wheels when specified. Only rotate
the rear wheels if you notice unusual wear.
2
Reset the engine air filter information monitor after you replace the air filter.
3
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
Using Biodiesel, up to and Including 20% Biodiesel (B20)
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 15,000 mi
(24,000 km), six months or
300 engine hours
Using Fuel Other Than Ultra-low Sulfur Diesel Fuel - Vehicles Operated Where Ultra-low
Sulfur Diesel Fuel is not Required or Available
Change the engine oil and filter.Every 2,500 mi (4,000 km)
or three months (if using
high sulfur fuel with more
than 500 ppm sulfur)
Change the engine oil and filter.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months (if using high
sulfur fuel with fewer than
500 ppm sulfur)
569
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Exceptions
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance
Axle(s) and transfer case, 4X4 only, fluid
changes or level checks are not required
unless a leak is suspected or the assembly
has been submerged in water. During long
periods of trailer towing with outside
temperatures above 70°F (21°C) or at
wide-open throttle for long periods above
45 mph (72 km/h), change the rear axle
fluid every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) if the
rear axle is filled with non-synthetic fluid.
This interval can be waived and the
150,000 mi (240,000 km) service interval
can continue if the rear axle is filled with
75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number
XY-75W140-QL, or equivalent. Add friction
modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or
equivalent for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axles. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 429).
Additional Axle Maintenance for Dual
Rear Wheels
Change the rear axle fluid every
250,000 mi (400,000 km) under normal
driving conditions on all commercial
applications. When you operate your
vehicle at or near maximum gross vehicle
weights, change the rear axle fluid every
60,000 mi (96,000 km). In addition,
follow this 60,000 mi (96,000 km)
schedule when you operate your vehicle
under the special operating conditions
where noted.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 3,000 mi (5,000 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty
and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in
these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine
air filter and cabin air filter.
Diesel Particulate Filter
Over time, a slight amount of ash builds
up in the diesel particulate filter, which is
not removed during the regeneration
process. The filter may need to be replaced
with a new or remanufactured part at
approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km).
Actual mileage varies depending on engine
and vehicle operating conditions.
570
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
In this case, the engine control system
illuminates a service light , wrench icon, to
inform you to bring your vehicle to the
dealer for service. If there are any issues
with the oxidation catalyst or particulate
filter system, the engine control system
illuminates a service light, wrench or engine
icon to inform you to bring your vehicle into
a dealer for service.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
RECORD
After the scheduled maintenance services
are performed, record the Repair Order #,
Distance and Engine Hours in the boxes
provided.
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
571
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
572
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
573
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
574
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
575
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
576
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
577
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
578
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
579
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
580
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
airbag cover, on the side of the front or
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna
cables to vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and
brake pipes.
WARNING: Keep antenna and
power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from
any electronic modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation. It is your responsibility to make
sure that any equipment an authorized
dealer installs on your vehicle complies with
applicable local legislation and other
requirements. Installation of some
aftermarket electronic devices could
degrade the performance of vehicle
functions, which use radio frequency signals
such as broadcast radio receiver, tire
pressure monitoring system, push button
start, Bluetooth connectivity or satellite
navigation.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
following illustrations and table. We do not
provide any other special provisions or
conditions for installations or use.
Car/SUV
E239120
581
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
582
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak
RMS)
Frequency Band
MHz
1501-30
2, 35050-54
2, 35068-88
2, 350142-176
2, 350380-512
2, 310806-870
583
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
584
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
585
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(I) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
586
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
587
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
588
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
589
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
590
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’ s and arbitrator’ s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
591
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
592
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
593
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
594
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
595
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
596
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
597
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
598
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
599
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
IGN “INSTITUTO
GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
ARGENTINO”
Argen-
tina
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
Jordan
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement,
HERE shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
600
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
is conditioned on Client’ s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
601
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
“© Bundesamt für Eich-
und Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”
Great Britain
“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”
Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
al tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
602
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Telematics Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
603
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
604
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’ s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
605
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
606
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
607
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Taiwan Territory
Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave
radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter
the frequency, increase the power or
change the characteristics and functions
of the original design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
be detected, immediately stop using the
device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
interference. For the legal
telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept
certain terms and conditions. The following
is a brief summary of the terms and
conditions that apply to you. To view the
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
1. Acceptance
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for
your personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are
intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
comprehensive or accurate information on
all occasions. On occasions, you may
experience additional delay as a result of
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
acknowledge that it is not intended, or
suitable, for use in applications where time
of arrival or driving directions may impact
the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
active, remain at all times responsible for
observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.
608
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development
may mean that some information is not
entirely up-to-date. The information in this
document is subject to change without
notice.
DECLARATION OF
CONFORMITY
Your vehicle could have components that
transmit and receive radio waves and are
therefore subject to government
regulation.
These components must accept any
interference received, including
interference that could cause undesired
operation. For certification labels and
declarations of conformity, visit
www.wirelessconformity.ford.com.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY - VEHICLES WITH: SYNC 3
Radio Frequency Statement
IC Identification NumberFCC Identification NumberSYNC Version
216B-SYNCG3-LACJ-SYNCG3-L3.0
216B-FA170BCARHSACJ-FA-170-BCARHS3.1
216B-FG185SG32MHACJ-FG-185-SG32MH3.2
609
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
These devices comply with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. The device does not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device accepts any interference
received, including interference that
could cause undesired operation.
TYPE APPROVALS
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Blind Spot Information System (If
Equipped)
Argentina
E337180
Ghana
E269695
Malaysia
E269697
Paraguay
E337181
610
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
South Africa
E269696
United Arab Emirates
E269694
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
IC: 4135A-SRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Vietnam
E269693
611
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Appendices
612
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
3
360 Degree Camera...................................232
Advanced Camera Views................................232
Auxiliary Camera................................................234
Bed View Camera..............................................234
Camera Views.....................................................232
Front Camera......................................................233
Keep Out Zone....................................................233
Side Camera........................................................234
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive.....................................207
A
A/C
See: Climate Control.........................................139
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes............................................................217
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.................................................................219
Accessories....................................................546
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................14
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............237
Adjustable Pedals..........................................83
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................370
Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................371
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................370
Adjusting the Pedals.....................................83
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................79
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................79
End of Travel Position........................................80
Memory Feature...................................................80
Airbag Disposal...............................................52
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control.........................................139
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter -
6.2L....................................................................346
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.7L
Diesel.................................................................347
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter -
7.3L.....................................................................349
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm.........................................75
Ambient Lighting...........................................90
Adjusting the Brightness...................................90
Switching Ambient Lighting Off....................90
Switching Ambient Lighting On.....................90
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................75
Arming the Alarm.................................................76
Disarming the Alarm...........................................76
Using the System..................................................75
Appendices.....................................................581
Apps.................................................................528
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................530
Using Apps on an Android Device...............529
Using Apps on an iOS Device........................529
Using Mobile Navigation on an Android
Device................................................................529
At a Glance........................................................18
Audible Warnings and Indicators...........108
Headlamps On Warning Chime....................108
Key in Ignition Warning Chime......................108
Keyless Warning Alert......................................108
Parking Brake On Warning Chime...............108
Audio Control..................................................80
You can operate the following functions
with the control:..............................................80
Audio System................................................474
General Information..........................................474
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
Touchscreen Display/SYNC 3..............474
Adjusting the Volume.......................................475
Changing Radio Stations................................475
Selecting the Audio Modes............................475
Setting a Memory Preset................................475
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off.........475
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse..............................................................475
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC.........476
Accessing the Apps Menu..............................476
Accessing the Clock Settings........................476
Accessing the Media Source Menu.............476
613
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
Accessing the Phone Features.....................476
Accessing the Settings Menu........................476
Accessing the Sound Settings......................476
Adjusting the Volume.......................................477
Changing Radio Stations.................................477
Listening to the Radio.......................................477
Playing or Pausing Media................................477
Switching Radio Text On and Off.................477
Switching Repeat Mode On and Off...........477
Switching Shuffle Mode On and Off...........477
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off.........477
Switching the Display On and Off................477
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse.............................................................478
Using the Display Control...............................478
Using the Number Block.................................478
Autolamps........................................................87
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................87
Automatic Climate Control......................140
Directing the Airflow.........................................140
Setting the Blower Motor Speed...................141
Setting the Temperature..................................141
Switching Auto Mode On and Off.................141
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and
Off.........................................................................141
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On
and Off................................................................141
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off.........................................................................141
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off........................................................................142
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off.........................................................................141
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off.........................................................................141
Automatic High Beam Control..................92
Automatic High Beam Control
Indicators........................................................92
Automatic Transmission...........................201
Brake-Shift Interlock........................................204
For F350, F450, F550 and F600 Chassis
Cab Vehicles...................................................204
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or
Snow.................................................................205
Understanding the Shift Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission.............................201
Understanding Your SelectShift
Automatic™ Transmission.......................202
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check............................................................365
Autowipers.......................................................84
Auxiliary Power Points................................162
400 Watt AC Power Point...............................162
DC Power Point...................................................162
Locations...............................................................163
Auxiliary Switches.......................................547
Upfitter Interface Module...............................550
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................368
Bed Extender....................................................72
Grocery mode........................................................74
Tailgate mode........................................................73
Bed Ramps....................................................269
Installing the Ramp Holder.............................271
Stowing the Bed Ramp.....................................271
Using the Bed Ramp.........................................270
Blind Spot Information System.............248
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Tow....................................................................250
Switching the System Off and On...............252
System Errors......................................................252
Using the System..............................................249
BLIS
See: Blind Spot Information System..........248
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........337
Booster Seats...................................................31
Types of Booster Seats......................................32
Brake Fluid Check........................................366
Brake Fluid Service Interval............................367
Brakes................................................................217
General Information...........................................217
Breaking-In.....................................................310
Bulb Specification Chart...........................467
C
Canceling the Set Speed..........................225
Capacities and Specifications -
6.2L.................................................................437
Air Conditioning System..................................437
614
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates..........................................................440
Automatic Transmission-Six Speed..........438
Automatic Transmission-Ten Speed.........438
Engine Coolant...................................................439
Engine Oil.............................................................439
Front Axle.............................................................444
Fuel Tank...............................................................441
Grease.....................................................................441
Hydraulic Brake System..................................442
Locks......................................................................443
Power Steering System...................................442
Rear Axle - 10.5..................................................444
Rear Axle - 11.8 ...................................................445
Transfer Case......................................................443
Washer Reservoir...............................................445
Capacities and Specifications - 6.7L
Diesel............................................................446
Air Conditioning System.................................446
Alternative Engine Oil for Biodiesel Fuel
Blends (B20 Max)........................................450
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................450
Alternative Engine Oil for Severe Duty
Service...............................................................451
Automatic Transmission.................................447
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank.................452
Engine Coolant...................................................448
Engine Oil.............................................................448
Front Axle.............................................................455
Fuel Tank................................................................451
Grease....................................................................452
Hydraulic Brake System..................................453
Locks......................................................................454
Power Steering System...................................453
Rear Axle - 10.5...................................................455
Rear Axle - 10.8..................................................456
Rear Axle - 11.8 ...................................................456
Transfer Case......................................................454
Washer Reservoir...............................................457
Capacities and Specifications -
7.3L..................................................................457
Air Conditioning System.................................458
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates..........................................................460
Automatic Transmission................................458
Engine Coolant...................................................459
Engine Oil.............................................................459
Front Axle.............................................................464
Fuel Tank...............................................................461
Grease.....................................................................461
Hydraulic Brake System..................................462
Locks......................................................................463
Power Steering System...................................462
Rear Axle - 10.5..................................................464
Rear Axle - 10.8..................................................465
Rear Axle - 11.8 (With HD Tow
Option).............................................................465
Rear Axle - 11.8 (Without HD Tow
Option)............................................................466
Transfer Case......................................................463
Washer Reservoir...............................................467
Capacities and Specifications................429
Cargo Lamps...................................................90
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................381
Catalytic Converter......................................189
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................190
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing....................................................191
Center Console..............................................165
Changing a Bulb...........................................372
Cargo Lamp and Central High Mounted
Brake Lamp Bulbs.........................................374
Fog Lamp Bulbs..................................................373
Front Park and Direction Indicator Lamp
Bulbs..................................................................372
Headlamp Bulbs.................................................372
LED Lamps...........................................................375
License Plate Lamp Bulb................................375
Rear Lamps, Brake Lamps, Rear Direction
Indicator and Reversing Lamp
Bulbs..................................................................373
Changing a Fuse...........................................335
Fuses......................................................................335
Changing a Road Wheel.............................417
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.......................................................417
Jacking the Vehicle............................................422
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools..........418
Stowing the Flat Tire or Spare Tire..............427
Tire Change Procedure.....................................418
Changing the 12V Battery.........................368
Battery Management System......................369
Changing the Engine Air Filter -
6.2L................................................................346
615
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.7L
Diesel.............................................................347
Air Filter Restriction Gauge............................348
Changing the Engine Air Filter -
7.3L.................................................................349
Changing the Engine-Mounted and
Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Fuel
Filters - 6.7L Diesel....................................375
Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Filter........375
Engine-mounted Fuel Filter...........................378
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil
Filter...............................................................345
Engine Lubrication for Severe Service
Operation.........................................................345
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password...................................473
Changing the Wiper Blades......................371
Checking MyKey System Status...............63
MyKey Distance....................................................63
Number of Admin Keys......................................63
Number of MyKeys..............................................63
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................371
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance.................................................42
Child Restraint Positioning.........................33
Child Safety......................................................20
General Information............................................20
Child Safety Locks.........................................35
Left-Hand Side......................................................35
Right-Hand Side...................................................35
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................385
With King Ranch Edition.................................386
Without King Ranch Edition..........................385
Cleaning Products......................................380
Materials...............................................................380
Cleaning the Engine....................................382
Cleaning the Exhaust - 6.7L Diesel.......382
Cleaning the Exterior...................................381
Cleaning the Headlamps.................................381
Exterior Chrome Parts......................................381
Exterior Plastic Parts.........................................381
Stripes or Graphics.............................................381
Underbody...........................................................382
Under Hood.........................................................382
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens........................385
Cleaning the Interior...................................383
Cleaning the Wheels..................................387
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................383
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................62
Climate.............................................................519
Accessing Rear Climate Controls.................521
Accessing the Climate Control Menu.........519
Directing the Airflow..........................................519
Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator...........521
Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................519
Setting the Temperature.................................519
Switching Auto Mode On and Off................519
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and
Off......................................................................520
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On
and Off.............................................................520
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off......................................................................520
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and
Off........................................................................521
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off........................................................................521
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off.......................................................................519
Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On
and Off.............................................................520
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off......................................................................520
Switching the Heated Exterior Mirrors On
and Off.............................................................520
Switching the Heated Rear Window On and
Off......................................................................520
Switching the Heated Seats On and
Off......................................................................520
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On
and Off.............................................................520
Switching the Heated Windshield On and
Off......................................................................520
Switching the Rear Climate Controlled
Seats On and Off...........................................521
Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and
Off........................................................................521
Switching the Rear Ventilated Seats On
and Off...............................................................521
Switching the Ventilated Seats On and
Off........................................................................521
Climate Control.............................................139
616
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network........................................................470
Enabling the Modem Using
FordPass..........................................................470
Enabling the Modem Using the
Touchscreen...................................................470
What Is the Modem..........................................470
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check - 6.2L...............353
See: Engine Coolant Check - 6.7L
Diesel.................................................................357
See: Engine Coolant Check - 7.3L...............360
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........51
Creating a MyKey............................................61
Programming or Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................62
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot..........473
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot.............................................................473
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name and
Password..........................................................473
Cross Traffic Alert........................................253
Cross Traffic Alert Behavior When Trailer
is Attached......................................................255
Cross Traffic Alert Indicator...........................255
Cross Traffic Alert Information
Messages.........................................................255
Cross Traffic Alert System
Limitations......................................................254
Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors............254
Switching the System On and Off..............255
Using Cross Traffic Alert..................................253
Cruise Control...............................................236
Cruise Control Indicators...........................237
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control................................................81
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control.............................................................81
Customer Assistance.................................322
D
Data Recording................................................10
Comfort, Convenience and Entertainment
Data.......................................................................12
Event Data.................................................................11
Service Data.............................................................11
Services That Third Parties Provide...............12
Services That We Provide..................................12
Vehicles With a Modem......................................12
Vehicles With an Emergency Call
System..................................................................13
Vehicles With SYNC.............................................13
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running
Lamps..............................................................87
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)............88
Declaration of Conformity.......................609
Declaration of Conformity - Vehicles
With: SYNC 3.............................................609
Radio Frequency Statement........................609
Diesel Particulate Filter..............................196
Oxidation Catalytic Converter and Diesel
Particulate Filter System............................196
Regeneration........................................................196
Digital Radio..................................................478
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................479
Direction Indicators.......................................89
Doors and Locks.............................................65
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 6.7L
Diesel............................................................350
Draining the Diesel Fuel Conditioner
Module...............................................................351
Filter Location......................................................351
Drive Control..................................................262
Selectable Drive Modes..................................262
Driver Alert.....................................................244
Using Driver Alert...............................................244
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................44
Children and Airbags..........................................49
Passenger Airbag On and Off Switch ..........44
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.......................................................48
Driving Aids....................................................244
Driving Hints...................................................307
Driving Through Water...............................310
For Vehicles without Tremor Off-Road
Package.............................................................310
For Vehicles with Tremor Off-Road
Package..............................................................311
617
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running Lamps....87
See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)................88
E
Economical Driving.....................................307
Electromagnetic Compatibility...............581
Electronic Locking Differential.................215
Activating the Electronic Locking
Differential........................................................215
Operating ELD With a Spare or Mismatched
Tires....................................................................216
Electronic Tailgate.........................................70
With the Outside Control Button...................70
With the Remote Control..................................70
Emission Law.................................................188
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance.........189
Tampering With a Noise Control
System..............................................................188
End User License Agreement.................584
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) ................................584
Engine Block Heater.....................................176
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................177
Engine Coolant Check - 6.2L...................353
Adding Coolant...................................................353
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................356
Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................355
Recycled Coolant..............................................354
Severe Climates.................................................354
Engine Coolant Check - 6.7L
Diesel.............................................................357
Adding Coolant...................................................357
Coolant Change.................................................360
Engine and Secondary Cooling System
Refill Procedure.............................................359
Engine-driven Cooling Fan............................360
Recycled Coolant..............................................359
Severe Climates.................................................360
Engine Coolant Check - 7.3L...................360
Adding Coolant...................................................361
Coolant Change.................................................363
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................364
Engine-driven Cooling Fan (Fan
Clutch)..............................................................363
Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................363
Recycled Coolant...............................................362
Severe Climates.................................................363
Engine Emission Control...........................188
Engine Idle Shutdown.................................176
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................75
Engine Oil Check - 6.2L..............................341
Adding Engine Oil..............................................342
Engine Oil Check - 6.7L Diesel................343
Adding Engine Oil..............................................343
Engine lubrication for severe service
operation ........................................................344
Engine Oil Check - 7.3L..............................344
Adding Engine Oil..............................................344
Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.2L...........................341
Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.7L Diesel..............341
Engine Oil Dipstick - 7.3L............................341
Engine Specifications - 6.2L....................429
Drivebelt Routing...............................................429
Engine Specifications - 6.7L Diesel.......429
Drivebelt Routing...............................................430
Engine Specifications - 7.3L....................430
Drivebelt Routing................................................431
Entertainment..............................................509
AM/FM Radio.......................................................510
Apps........................................................................518
Bluetooth Stereo or USB..................................517
CD.............................................................................516
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)..........................................................513
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)..........................................................511
Sources..................................................................510
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information.................................518
USB Ports..............................................................518
Environment......................................................17
Essential Towing Checks..........................295
Before Towing a Trailer....................................303
Dynamic Hitching Using the Rear View
Camera System............................................296
Hitches...................................................................297
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller.............300
618
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)........................................304
Safety Chains......................................................299
Trailer Brakes.......................................................299
Trailer Lamps......................................................303
Trailer Towing Connector................................295
When Towing a Trailer.....................................303
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording............................................10
Export Unique Options.................................16
Exterior Mirrors................................................95
Blind Spot Information System......................98
Clearance Lamps .................................................97
Direction Indicator Mirrors ................................97
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................95
Heated Exterior Mirrors ......................................97
Memory Mirrors ....................................................97
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................95
PowerScope™ Power Telescoping
Mirrors.................................................................96
Puddle Lamps........................................................97
Spot Lamps............................................................97
Telescoping Mirrors.............................................96
Trailer Towing Camera System.......................97
F
Fastening the Seatbelts...............................37
Fastening the Cinch Tongue............................38
Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................39
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................38
Using the Seatbelt with Cinch Tongue
(Front Center Seat on Super Cab and
Crew Cab)...........................................................37
Fire Extinguisher............................................316
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................417
Floor Mats........................................................313
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................88
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................83
Ford Credit.........................................................14
US Only.....................................................................14
Ford Protect....................................................551
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
(CANADA ONLY)..........................................552
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)...................................................................551
Four-Wheel Drive.........................................207
Front Fog Lamps............................................88
Front Fog Lamp Indicator.................................88
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On or
Off.........................................................................88
Fuel and Refueling.......................................178
Fuel Consumption........................................187
Advertised Capacity...........................................187
Fuel Economy.......................................................187
Fuel Filter - 6.2L/7.3L...................................371
Fuel Quality - Diesel.....................................181
Biodiesel.................................................................182
Diesel Fuel Additives ........................................183
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right
Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Not Required ...........181
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right
Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Required (United
States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S. Virgin
Islands And Other Locales) .......................181
Fuel Quality - E85.........................................179
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles..............................................................179
Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline............................................................180
Fuel Quality - Gasoline..............................180
Choosing the Right Fuel..................................180
Fuel Shutoff....................................................316
Fuses................................................................329
Fuse Specification Chart..........................329
Engine Compartment Fuse Box...................329
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel........333
G
Garage Door Opener...................................158
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........158
Gauges..............................................................101
DEF Gauge............................................................103
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge..........103
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge..............................103
Fuel Gauge............................................................103
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge.................................................................103
619
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
Turbo Boost Gauge............................................103
Type 1 and 2...........................................................101
Type 3......................................................................102
Gearbox
See: Transmission..............................................201
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................53
Intelligent Access.................................................53
General Maintenance Information........553
Multi-Point Inspection.....................................556
Owner Checks and Services..........................554
Protecting Your Investment...........................553
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?..........................553
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................553
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................325
Getting the Services You Need...............322
Away From Home..............................................322
Global Opening...............................................95
Opening the Windows.......................................95
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake..............................................219
Hazard Flashers............................................316
HDC
See: Using Hill Descent Control...................226
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................370
Headrest
See: Head Restraints.........................................147
Head Restraints.............................................147
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................148
Heated Exterior Mirrors..............................144
Heated Rear Window..................................144
Heated Seats.................................................156
Rear Heated Seats.............................................156
Heated Steering Wheel................................81
Heated Windshield......................................144
Windshield Wiper De-Icer...............................144
Heating
See: Climate Control.........................................139
Hill Start Assist..............................................219
Switching the System On and Off..............220
Using Hill Start Assist......................................220
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
- Vehicles With: Automatic
Temperature Control................................142
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather.............................................................143
General Hints........................................................142
Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................143
Quickly Heating the Interior............................142
Recommended Settings for Cooling...........143
Recommended Settings for Heating..........143
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
- Vehicles With: Manual Temperature
Control...........................................................143
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather.............................................................144
General Hints........................................................143
Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................143
Quickly Heating the Interior............................143
Recommended Settings for Cooling...........143
Recommended Settings for Heating..........143
Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods
During Extreme High Ambient
Temperatures..................................................144
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................219
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........337
Horn.....................................................................82
I
Ignition Switch...............................................168
In California (U.S. Only).............................323
Information Display Control........................81
Information Displays...................................109
General Information..........................................109
Information Messages................................120
4WD.........................................................................137
Active Park............................................................120
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................121
Adaptive Steering...............................................122
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control..............122
Airbag......................................................................123
Alarm and Security.............................................123
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................123
Battery and Charging System........................124
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System....................................................124
620
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
Diesel Messages..................................................125
Doors and Locks..................................................127
Driver Alert.............................................................128
Drivetrain................................................................128
Engine.....................................................................128
Fuel..........................................................................129
Keys and Remote Controls.............................129
Lane Keeping System.......................................130
Maintenance........................................................130
MyKey.......................................................................131
Off Road..................................................................131
Park Aid...................................................................132
Park Brake..............................................................132
Power Steering.....................................................133
Pre-Collision Assist............................................133
Remote Start........................................................134
Seats........................................................................134
Starting System .................................................134
Tailgate...................................................................134
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................135
Trail Control..........................................................135
Trailer.......................................................................136
Installing Child Restraints...........................22
Child Seats..............................................................22
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child
Restraints...........................................................28
Front Seat Tether Strap Attachment
(Regular Cab)...................................................29
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Crew
Cab and Super Cab)......................................30
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use) .....................................................27
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Except Front
Center Position of Super Cab and Crew
Cab)......................................................................22
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Front Center
Position of Super Cab and Crew
Cab)......................................................................24
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)...........................................26
Using Tether Straps.............................................28
Instrument Cluster........................................101
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................87
Instrument Panel............................................18
Interior Air Quality........................................146
Interior Lamps.................................................89
Front Interior Lamp.............................................89
Rear Interior Lamps............................................90
Interior Mirror...................................................98
Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................98
Manual Dimming Mirror.....................................98
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................317
Connecting the Jumper Cables......................317
Jump Starting.......................................................318
Preparing Your Vehicle......................................317
Removing the Jumper Cables........................318
K
Keyless Entry...................................................68
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD..............................................................68
Keyless Starting............................................169
Keys and Remote Controls.........................53
L
Lane Keeping System................................245
Switching the System On and Off..............246
System Display...................................................246
System Settings.................................................246
Troubleshooting..................................................247
Lighting Control..............................................86
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam..............87
Headlamp High Beam.......................................86
Lighting..............................................................86
General Information...........................................86
Limited Slip Differential.............................215
Load Carrying................................................265
Load Limit.......................................................265
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................269
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.................................................................265
Locating the Cabin Air Filter.....................146
Locking and Unlocking.................................65
Activating Intelligent Access............................65
Autolock...................................................................67
621
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
Battery Saver..........................................................67
Illuminated Entry..................................................67
Power Door Locks................................................65
Remote Control....................................................65
Smart Unlock........................................................66
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys......................................................................66
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................417
M
Maintenance..................................................337
General Information..........................................337
Manual Climate Control.............................139
Directing the Airflow..........................................139
Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................139
Setting the Temperature.................................139
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On
and Off..............................................................140
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off.......................................................................140
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off.......................................................................140
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off.......................................................................139
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off.......................................................................140
Manual Seats.................................................149
Manual Lumbar ..................................................150
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................150
Recline Adjustment...........................................150
Memory Function..........................................153
Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................154
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob
..............................................................................153
Recalling a Preset Position.............................153
Saving a Preset Position..................................153
Message Center
See: Information Displays...............................109
Mirrors
See: Windows and Mirrors................................94
Mobile Communications Equipment......16
Moonroof..........................................................99
Bounce-Back.......................................................100
Opening and Closing the Moonroof.............99
Motorcraft Parts - 6.2L...............................431
Motorcraft Parts - 6.7L Diesel.................433
Motorcraft Parts - 7.3L...............................434
MyKey – Troubleshooting...........................63
MyKey™............................................................60
Principle of Operation........................................60
N
Navigation......................................................523
Changing the Format of the Map................525
cityseeker..............................................................527
Michelin Travel Guide.......................................528
Navigation Map Accuracy and
Updates............................................................528
Route Guidance..................................................525
Setting a Destination.......................................524
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................528
Zoom......................................................................525
Network Connectivity................................470
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network............................................................470
Network Connectivity –
Troubleshooting.........................................471
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........556
Diesel Engine.......................................................559
Gasoline Engine.................................................558
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor.............................556
O
Off-Road Driving..........................................307
After Off-Road Driving....................................309
Basic Off-road Driving Techniques............308
Crossing Obstacles..........................................309
Hill Climbing........................................................309
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................345
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check - 6.2L...........................341
See: Engine Oil Check - 6.7L Diesel.............343
See: Engine Oil Check - 7.3L..........................344
Opening and Closing the Hood..............337
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................327
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........327
Overhead Console.......................................165
Overriding Automatic High Beam
Control.............................................................92
622
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
P
Parking Aids...................................................228
Principle of Operation......................................228
Parking Brake.................................................219
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................75
SecuriLock®...........................................................75
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................75
Perchlorate........................................................14
Phone................................................................521
Android Auto........................................................523
Apple CarPlay......................................................523
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time...................................................................522
Text Messaging...................................................522
Using Your Cell Phone......................................522
Post-Crash Alert System...........................319
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................65
Power Running Boards.................................77
Power Seats...................................................150
Adjusting the Lumbar Support.......................151
Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front Seats
With Active Motion ........................................151
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................367
Power Take-Off............................................205
Split Shaft Capability......................................206
Power Windows.............................................94
Accessory Delay...................................................95
Bounce-Back.........................................................94
One-Touch Up or Down....................................94
Window Lock.........................................................95
Pre-Collision Assist.....................................258
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings............................................................260
Blocked Sensors.................................................261
Distance Indication and Alert.......................259
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System..............................................................258
Protecting the Environment........................17
Puncture
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................417
R
Rear Axle..........................................................215
Rear Parking Aid...........................................228
Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................229
Rear Seats.......................................................154
Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion ..............154
Rear Under Seat Storage.................................155
Returning the Seat to the Seating
Position..............................................................155
Rear View Camera.......................................229
Camera Guidelines...........................................230
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................231
Rear Camera Delay............................................231
Using the Rear View Camera
System..............................................................230
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera...................................229
Recommended Towing Weights...........290
Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight for Your Vehicle..............................294
Refueling - Diesel.........................................184
Dual Fuel Tanks...................................................186
Fueling Tips..........................................................185
Refueling................................................................185
Refueling - Gasoline....................................183
Fuel Filler Cap......................................................184
Remote Control..............................................53
Car Finder................................................................58
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................53
Intelligent Access Key.........................................54
Memory Feature....................................................57
Remote Start.........................................................58
Replacing the Battery.........................................55
Sounding the Panic Alarm................................58
Remote Start.................................................144
Automatic Settings............................................145
Removing the Tailgate...................................71
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............387
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................14
Collision Repairs....................................................14
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..................................................................14
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................14
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................59
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter..................146
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................327
623
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................327
Resuming the Set Speed...........................237
Roadside Assistance...................................315
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance........................................................316
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................315
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................315
Roadside Emergencies...............................315
Running-In
See: Breaking-In..................................................310
Running Out of Fuel....................................183
S
Safety Canopy™............................................50
Safety Precautions.......................................178
Satellite Radio.............................................480
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN).................................................................481
Satellite Radio Reception Factors...............481
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service..................481
Troubleshooting.................................................482
Scheduled Maintenance Record.............571
Scheduled Maintenance...........................553
Seatbelt Extensions......................................42
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.....................40
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................41
Belt-Minder™.........................................................41
Seatbelts...........................................................36
Principle of Operation........................................36
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................40
Conditions of operation....................................40
Seats..................................................................147
Security...............................................................75
Selective Catalytic Reductant System -
Diesel...............................................................191
Contaminated Diesel Exhaust Fluid or
Inoperative Selective Catalytic Reduction
System...............................................................195
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines and
Information......................................................194
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level................................191
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning Messages
and Vehicle Operations...............................193
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank...........192
Settings............................................................531
911 Assist................................................................531
Ambient Lighting...............................................532
Audio.......................................................................531
Automatic Updates...........................................531
Bluetooth...............................................................531
Charge Settings..................................................532
Clock........................................................................531
Display....................................................................532
Driver Assist..........................................................531
FordPass................................................................531
General...................................................................531
Message Center..................................................532
Mobile Apps..........................................................531
Multi Contour Seats..........................................532
Navigation.............................................................532
Personal Profiles................................................532
Phone......................................................................531
Seats.......................................................................532
Sound......................................................................531
Valet Mode...........................................................532
Vehicle.....................................................................531
Voice Control.......................................................532
Setting the Cruise Control Speed..........236
Changing the Set Speed.................................236
Setting the Trail Control Speed..............225
Side Airbags.....................................................49
Sitting in the Correct Position..................147
Sliding Windows............................................98
Power Sliding Back Window...........................98
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains................................408
Snow Plowing.................................................311
Engine temperature while plowing..............313
Installing the Snowplow...................................311
Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow
Attached............................................................312
Snowplowing with your Airbag Equipped
Vehicle................................................................312
Transmission operation while
plowing..............................................................313
Spare Wheel
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................417
Special Notices................................................15
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................15
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................15
624
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
Special Instructions..............................................15
Using a Slide-In Camper....................................15
Using your Vehicle as an Ambulance............15
Using your Vehicle as a Stationary Power
Source..................................................................16
Using your Vehicle With a Snowplow............15
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................562
Diesel Engine.......................................................565
Exceptions............................................................570
Gasoline Engine.................................................562
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control...........................................236
Spot Lamps.....................................................89
Spring U-Bolt Check - F-600..................378
U-bolt Nut Torque.............................................379
Stability Control............................................222
Principle of Operation......................................222
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch...........................................168
Starting a Diesel Engine - 6.7L
Diesel...............................................................171
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................173
Cold Weather Operation..................................173
Cold Weather Starting.......................................173
Diesel Engine Fast Start Glow Plug
System................................................................172
Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................172
Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................172
Starting a Gasoline Engine - 6.2L/
7.3L..................................................................169
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................170
Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Fuel
Vehicles Only)...................................................171
Failure to Start.....................................................170
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.................171
Important Ventilating Information................171
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving................................................................170
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................170
Vehicles with an Ignition Key.........................169
Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................170
Starting and Stopping the Engine.........168
General Information..........................................168
Steering...........................................................256
Adaptive Learning..............................................257
Adaptive Steering...............................................257
Electronic Torque Overlay Steering............256
Hydraulic Power Steering...............................256
Steering Wheel................................................79
Storage Compartments.............................165
Sunroof
See: Moonroof......................................................99
Sun Visors.........................................................99
Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................99
Supplementary Restraints System.........43
Principle of Operation........................................43
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off.....................................................92
Activating the Automatic High Beam
Control.................................................................92
Switching Cruise Control On and
Off..................................................................236
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................236
Switching Cruise Control On.........................236
Switching Off the Engine - 6.7L
Diesel..............................................................176
Switching Trail Control On and Off.......225
Symbols Glossary.............................................8
SYNC™ 3.........................................................501
General Information..........................................501
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting......................533
Additional Information and
Assistance.......................................................545
Apps.......................................................................540
Navigation............................................................539
Personal Profiles................................................543
Phone.....................................................................537
Resetting the System.......................................545
USB and Bluetooth Audio..............................534
Voice Recognition..............................................533
Wi-Fi Connectivity.............................................542
SYNC™ Applications and
Services.......................................................488
911 Assist..............................................................488
SYNC Mobile Apps...........................................490
SYNC™...........................................................484
General Information.........................................484
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................492
T
Tailgate Lock....................................................70
Tailgate Step.....................................................71
Closing the Step....................................................72
625
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
Opening the Step..................................................72
Tailgate...............................................................70
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............429
Terrain Control..............................................226
Principle of Operation......................................226
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................324
Tire Care..........................................................392
Glossary of Tire Terminology........................393
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................392
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall...........................................................394
Temperature A B C............................................393
Traction AA A B C...............................................392
Treadwear.............................................................392
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........409
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring
System...............................................................416
Vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring
System.............................................................409
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................390
Towing a Trailer.............................................272
Load Placement.................................................273
Towing Points...............................................320
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels.........................................................304
Emergency Towing...........................................304
Recreational Towing........................................304
Towing..............................................................272
Traction Control.............................................221
Principle of Operation.......................................221
Trail Control Indicators...............................225
Trail Control....................................................225
Trailer Reversing Aids..................................274
Conventional Trailer Setup.............................276
Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailer
Setup.................................................................278
Positioning Your Vehicle and Trailer............275
Pro Trailer Backup Assist With Trailer
Reverse Guidance.........................................274
Setting Up the System.....................................275
Troubleshooting - Conventional
Trailer.................................................................282
Troubleshooting - Fifth Wheel and
Gooseneck Trailer.........................................287
Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist....................279
Using Trailer Reverse Guidance...................280
Trailer Sway Control...................................290
Transfer Case Fluid Check.......................366
Transmission Code Designation............436
Transmission..................................................201
Transporting the Vehicle............................319
Type Approvals.............................................610
Radio Frequency Certifications for Blind
Spot Information System..........................610
U
Under Hood Overview - 6.2L...................338
Under Hood Overview - 6.7L
Diesel.............................................................339
Under Hood Overview - 7.3L...................340
Under Seat Storage.....................................165
Front Under Seat Storage Compartment -
Vehicles With Locking Storage.................166
Front Under Seat Storage Compartment -
Vehicles Without Locking Storage..........165
Rear Under Seat Storage................................166
Universal Garage Door Opener...............158
HomeLink Wireless Control System...........158
USB Port.........................................................483
Locating the USB Ports...................................483
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................237
Automatic Cancellation...................................241
Blocked Sensor...................................................242
Canceling the Set Speed................................240
Changing the Set Speed.................................240
Detection Issues..................................................241
Following a Vehicle...........................................238
Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow
Usage..................................................................241
Overriding the Set Speed...............................240
Resuming the Set Speed................................240
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............238
Setting the Gap Distance...............................239
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off........................................................................241
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On.......................................................................238
Switching to Normal Cruise Control...........243
System Not Available.......................................242
Using Four-Wheel Drive............................207
4WD Indicator Lights........................................207
626
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Vehicles.............................................................210
Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly (ESOF) 4WD
system...............................................................207
Entering and Exiting Rock Crawl Mode with
Tremor Package............................................209
How Your Vehicle Differs from Other
Vehicles.............................................................210
Operating 4WD Vehicles with Spare or
Mismatched Tires.........................................209
Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD
system..............................................................208
Using Hill Descent Control.......................226
Hill Descent Modes...........................................226
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................63
Using Power Running Boards.....................77
Automatic Power Deploy...................................77
Automatic Power Stow.......................................77
Bounce-back..........................................................78
Enabling and Disabling.......................................77
Manual Power Deploy.........................................77
Using Snow Chains....................................408
Using Stability Control...............................223
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
(RSC®).............................................................223
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player.............................................................491
Audio Voice Commands.................................492
Media Sources.....................................................491
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............487
Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu.................................................................488
Pairing a Phone..................................................487
Phone Controls..................................................488
Phone Voice Commands................................487
Using Traction Control................................221
Switching the System Off................................221
System Indicator Lights and
Messages..........................................................221
Using Voice Recognition...........................485
Apps.......................................................................508
Automatic Blower Motor Speed
Reduction........................................................509
Climate..................................................................505
Entertainment....................................................504
General..................................................................503
Initiating a Voice Session...............................485
Navigation............................................................507
Phone....................................................................506
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................508
System Interaction and Feedback.............486
Voice Settings....................................................509
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................325
V
Vehicle Care..................................................380
General Information.........................................380
Vehicle Certification Label.......................436
Vehicle Identification Number................435
Vehicle Storage.............................................387
Body........................................................................387
Brakes....................................................................388
Cooling system...................................................388
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery.............388
Engine....................................................................388
Fuel system.........................................................388
General..................................................................387
Miscellaneous.....................................................388
Removing Vehicle From Storage.................388
Tires........................................................................388
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot................................473
Ventilated Seats............................................157
Ventilation
See: Climate Control.........................................139
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number............435
Voice Control....................................................81
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators...............104
Adaptive Cruise Control...................................104
Adaptive Steering..............................................104
Anti-Lock Braking System..............................104
Automatic High Beam......................................104
Battery....................................................................105
Blind Spot Monitor.............................................105
Brake System Warning Lamp........................105
Check 4X4.............................................................105
Check Fuel Cap...................................................105
Cruise Control......................................................105
Diesel Engine Brake...........................................105
Diesel Exhaust Fluid..........................................105
627
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
Direction Indicator.............................................106
Door Ajar................................................................106
Electronic Locking Differential......................106
Engine Coolant Temperature........................106
Engine Oil..............................................................106
Fasten Seatbelt..................................................106
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators..........................108
Front Airbag.........................................................106
Front Fog Lamps................................................106
High Beam............................................................106
Hill Descent..........................................................106
Low Fuel Level.....................................................106
Low Tire Pressure Warning.............................106
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control..........107
Service Engine Soon..........................................107
Stability Control..................................................107
Stability Control Off...........................................107
Tailgate Ajar..........................................................107
Transmission Tow/Haul...................................107
Wait To Start.........................................................107
Water In Fuel.........................................................107
Warning Triangle...........................................316
Washer Fluid Check......................................371
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................381
See: Wipers and Washers.................................84
Waxing.............................................................382
What Is Automatic High Beam
Control.............................................................92
What Is Cruise Control...............................236
Requirements......................................................236
What Is the Cabin Air Filter.......................146
What Is Trail Control...................................225
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................417
Wheels and Tires........................................390
General Information.........................................390
Technical Specifications.................................428
Windows and Mirrors...................................94
Windshield Washers.....................................85
Windshield Wipers........................................84
Speed Dependent Wipers................................84
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades...................371
Wipers and Washers.....................................84
Wireless Accessory Charger.....................163
628
Super Duty (TFE), enUSA, Edition date: 201909, Third-Printing-
Index
